Ram 2020 Chassis Cab dually truck Owner's Manual

Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important extension of your Ram vehicle.

Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App

Store

®

or Google Play

®

Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).

U.S.

CANADA

DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF

THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLET

MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA

RAMTRUCKS.COM

(U.S.)

RAMTRUCK.CA

(CANADA)

©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.

`

RAM CHASSIS CAB

2020 OWNER’S MANUAL

This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling

1-866-726-4636

(U.S.) or

1-800-387-1143

(Canada), or by contacting your dealer.

This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting

www.techauthority.com

and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling

1-800-387-1143

.

WARNING:

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle

.

The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common questions.

Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit

www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html

(U.S.),

www.owners.mopar.ca

(Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.

WARNING

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................ 10

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................12

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................78

4 SAFETY .......................................................................................................................................... 112

5 STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................169

6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................269

7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................299

8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................................361

9 MULTIMEDIA .............................................................................................................................. 375

10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................455

11

INDEX .............................................................................................................................................459

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

9

10

11


2

INTRODUCTION

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...............................11

Essential Information ..................................11

Symbols........................................................ 11

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............................11

VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS..........................11

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.........11

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED...............12

KEYS ......................................................................13

Key Fob......................................................... 13

IGNITION SWITCH .................................................17

Keyless Push Button Ignition ......................17

REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) ...18

How To Use Remote Start ...........................18

Remote Start Abort Message......................19

To Enter Remote Start Mode ......................19

To Exit Remote Start Mode Without

Driving The Vehicle ..................................... 19

To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The

Vehicle .......................................................... 19

Remote Start Comfort System — If

Equipped ......................................................19

General Information .................................... 20

REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) .........20

How To Use Remote Start ...........................20

Remote Start Abort Message......................21

To Enter Remote Start Mode ......................21

To Exit Remote Start Mode Without

Driving The Vehicle ...................................... 21

To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The

Vehicle.......................................................... 21

Remote Start Comfort System — If

Equipped ...................................................... 22

SENTRY KEY.......................................................... 22

Key Programming ....................................... 22

Replacement Keys....................................... 22


VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .... 23

To Arm The System...................................... 23

To Disarm The System ................................ 24

Rearming Of The System............................. 24

Security System Manual Override .............. 24

DOORS .................................................................. 24

Manual Door Locks...................................... 24

Power Door Locks — If Equipped ............... 25

Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry (If

Equipped) .................................................... 25

Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped ......... 28

Child-Protection Door Lock — If Equipped.. 28

DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED... 29

Programming The Memory Feature............ 29

Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless

Entry Key Fob To Memory ........................... 30

Memory Position Recall............................... 30

SEATS ....................................................................30

Manual Front Seat Adjustment .................. 31

Power Driver Seat Adjustment — If

Equipped ...................................................... 32

Heated Seats — If Equipped ....................... 33

Ventilated Seats — If Equipped................... 34

HEAD RESTRAINTS ..............................................35

Front Head Restraints................................. 35

Front Head Restraint Removal ................... 36

Rear Head Restraint Adjustment ............... 36

Rear Head Restraint Removal.................... 36

STEERING WHEEL.................................................37

Tilt Steering Column .................................... 37

Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 37

DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF

EQUIPPED .............................................................38

MIRRORS ..............................................................39

Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ...... 39

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If

Equipped ..................................................... 39

Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View

Camera Display — If Equipped ................... 39

Outside Mirrors ........................................... 40

Driver's Outside Automatic Dimming

Mirror — If Equipped.................................... 40

Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...................... 40

Power Convex Mirror Switch — If

Equipped ...................................................... 41


Trailer Towing Mirrors..................................41

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .....................42

Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If

Equipped ......................................................42

Outside Mirrors Folding Feature................. 42

Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped..... 43

EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................43

Multifunction Lever...................................... 43

Headlight Switch.......................................... 43

Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) ................. 44

High/Low Beam Switch ............................... 44

Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —

If Equipped ................................................... 44

Flash-To-Pass...............................................45

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .........45

Parking Lights And Panel Lights ................. 45

Directional LED Headlamp System — If

Equipped ......................................................45

Headlights On With Wipers (Available With

Automatic Headlights Only)......................... 46

Headlight Delay............................................ 46

Lights-On Reminder..................................... 46

Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .................. 46

Turn Signals ................................................46

Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............. 46

Cargo Lights/Trailer Spotter Lights — If

Equipped ......................................................46

Battery Saver................................................47

INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................ 47

Courtesy Lights ............................................ 47

Illuminated Entry ......................................... 48

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS............. 49

Windshield Wipers....................................... 49

Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........... 50

CLIMATE CONTROLS ........................................... 50

Manual Climate Control Overview .............. 50

Automatic Climate Control Overview.......... 53

Climate Control Functions........................... 59

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ....... 59

Operating Tips ............................................. 60

WINDOWS ............................................................ 61

Power Windows — If Equipped.................... 61

Wind Buffeting ............................................ 63

HOOD .................................................................... 63

To Open The Hood ...................................... 63

To Close The Hood....................................... 63

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED ......... 64

Before You Begin Programming

HomeLink®.................................................. 64

Canadian/Gate Operator Programming..... 66

Using HomeLink®........................................ 67

Security......................................................... 67

Troubleshooting Tips ................................... 67


INTERNAL EQUIPMENT........................................ 68

Storage......................................................... 68

Cupholders .................................................. 73

Electrical Power Outlets .............................. 74

Power Inverter — If Equipped ..................... 75

Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ....... 76

Overhead Sunglass Storage ....................... 77

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR

INSTRUMENT PANEL

BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —

GASOLINE ..............................................................78

Base / Midline Instrument Cluster

Descriptions................................................. 79

PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —

GASOLINE ..............................................................80

Premium Instrument Cluster

Descriptions................................................. 81

BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —

DIESEL....................................................................82

Diesel Instrument Cluster .......................... 82

PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —

DIESEL ...................................................................84

Diesel Instrument Cluster .......................... 84

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY.......................85

Instrument Cluster Display Controls .......... 85

Oil Life Reset ............................................... 87

Display Menu Items..................................... 87

Diesel Messages And Warnings ................. 95

Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode

Message — Electrical Load Reduction

Actions — If Equipped.................................. 99

3


4

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ............... 100

Red Warning Lights....................................100

Yellow Warning Lights ...............................103

Yellow Indicator Lights...............................106

Green Indicator Lights ...............................108

White Indicator Lights................................109

Blue Indicator Lights..................................109

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .... 109

Onboard Diagnostic System

(OBD II) Cybersecurity................................110

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS ........................................................ 110

SAFETY

SAFETY FEATURES ............................................ 112

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................112

Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...113

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 120

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With

Mitigation — If Equipped............................120

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) ........................................................123

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .................. 131

Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....131

Important Safety Precautions...................131

Seat Belt Systems .....................................132

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...140

Child Restraints..........................................148

Transporting Pets.......................................165

SAFETY TIPS....................................................... 165

Transporting Passengers ..........................165

Exhaust Gas ..............................................166

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside

The Vehicle ................................................166

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make

Outside The Vehicle...................................168

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE — GAS ENGINE .........169

Automatic Transmission............................169

Tip Start Feature .......................................169

Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition...................169

Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/

STOP Button...............................................170

Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or

−30°C) ......................................................172

After Starting..............................................173

STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE .....173


Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition...................173

Extreme Cold Weather ..............................175

Normal Starting Procedure — Engine

Manifold Air Temperature Above 66°F

(19°C) ........................................................176

Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Air

Temperature 0°F To 66°F (–18°C to

19°C)..........................................................176

Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold Air

Temperature Below 0°F (-18°C)..............177

Starting Fluids............................................178

NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE ....... 178

Cold Weather Precautions ........................179

Engine Idling .............................................181

Noise ..........................................................182

Stopping The Engine .................................182

Idle Shutdown............................................183

Programmable Maximum Vehicle

Speed .........................................................183

Operating Precautions ..............................183

Cooling System Tips ..................................183

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Manual

Regeneration - If Equipped .......................184

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED........ 184

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —

GAS ENGINE ...................................................... 185

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —

DIESEL ENGINE.................................................. 185

DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE (ENGINE

BRAKING) .......................................................... 186

PARKING BRAKE .............................................. 187

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ........................... 188

Ignition Park Interlock ...............................189

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock

System .......................................................189

Six–Speed Automatic Transmission — If

Equipped ...................................................190

Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If

Equipped ....................................................195

AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED ........... 200


FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF

EQUIPPED .......................................................... 200

Electronically Shifted Transfer Case

(Eight-Speed Transmission) — If

Equipped ...................................................200

Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Six

Speed Transmission) — If Equipped .........204

Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If

Equipped ....................................................207

LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL .......................... 209

POWER TAKE OFF (PTO) OPERATION — IF

EQUIPPED .......................................................... 210

POWER STEERING............................................. 210

Hydraulic Power Steering ..........................210

SPEED CONTROL .............................................. 211

To Activate..................................................211

To Set A Desired Speed.............................212

To Vary The Speed Setting ........................212

To Accelerate For Passing ........................212

To Resume Speed......................................213

To Deactivate .............................................213

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF

EQUIPPED ........................................................... 213

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Operation....................................................214

Activating Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) ...........................................................215

To Activate/Deactivate..............................215

To Set A Desired ACC Speed.....................215

To Cancel....................................................216

To Turn Off..................................................216

To Resume .................................................216

To Vary The Speed Setting ........................216

Setting The Following Distance In ACC.....217

Overtake Aid...............................................219

ACC Operation At Stop...............................219

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu........219

Display Warnings And Maintenance ........220

Precautions While Driving With ACC.........221

General Information ..................................223

Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control

Mode...........................................................224

PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF

EQUIPPED ...........................................................225

ParkSense Sensors ...................................226

ParkSense Warning Display......................226

ParkSense Display.....................................226

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........228

Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist

System........................................................229

Cleaning The ParkSense System..............229

ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....229

PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK

ASSIST................................................................. 230

ParkSense Sensors ...................................230

ParkSense Warning Display......................231

ParkSense Display.....................................231

Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear

ParkSense..................................................234

Service The ParkSense Front/Rear Park

Assist System.............................................234

Cleaning The ParkSense System..............234

ParkSense System Usage Precautions....234

LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 235

LaneSense Operation................................235

Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................236

LaneSense Warning Message ..................236

Changing LaneSense Status.....................238

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............. 238

AUX Camera — If Equipped ......................240

SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF

EQUIPPED........................................................... 241

AUX Camera — If Equipped ......................245

ENGINE RUNAWAY............................................ 246

REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GAS ENGINE ...... 246

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ................247

5


6

REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL

ENGINE ............................................................... 247

Fuel Filler Cap ............................................247

Avoid Using Contaminated Fuel................248

Bulk Fuel Storage — Diesel Fuel ...............248

Diesel Exhaust Fluid ..................................248

Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage ....................249

Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) ...........249

VEHICLE LOADING............................................. 251

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ......251

Payload.......................................................251

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ............251

Tire Size......................................................251

Rim Size......................................................251

Inflation Pressure ......................................251

Curb Weight................................................251

Loading.......................................................251

TRAILER TOWING .............................................. 252

Common Towing Definitions .....................252

Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer

Weight.........................................................255

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer

Weight Ratings)..........................................256

Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................256

Towing Requirements ...............................256

Towing Tips ................................................261

SNOWPLOW — IF EQUIPPED............................ 262

Before Plowing ...........................................262

Snowplow Prep Package Model

Availability ..................................................263

Over The Road Operation With Snowplow

Attached .....................................................263

Operating Tips............................................263

General Maintenance................................263

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.) ..........................................264

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another

Vehicle........................................................264

Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive

Models........................................................264

Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive

Models........................................................265

DRIVING TIPS......................................................267

Driving On Slippery Surfaces ...................267

Driving Through Water ..............................267

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS........................269

ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.....269


BULB REPLACEMENT ........................................274

Replacement Bulbs ...................................274

Replacing Exterior Bulbs ...........................275

FUSES ..................................................................279


Power Distribution Center.........................279

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ...................... 285

4500/5500 Models ..................................286

Preparations For Jacking ..........................286

Jacking Instructions 4500 And 5500

Series .........................................................286

To Stow The Flat Or Spare — If

Equipped ...................................................289

Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped...289

JUMP STARTING ............................................... 290

Preparations For Jump Start.....................291

Jump Starting Procedure ..........................291

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ......................... 292

GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6–SPEED

TRANSMISSION ................................................ 293

MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 – SPEED

TRANSMISSION ................................................ 294

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................ 295

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 296

Two-Wheel Drive Models...........................297

Four-Wheel Drive Models..........................297

Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ......297

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

(EARS) ................................................................ 298

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 298


SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING — GAS ENGINE........ 299

Maintenance Plan......................................299

Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle.................302

SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE .. 303

Oil Change Indicator System — Cummins

Diesel..........................................................303

Perform Service Indicator — Cummins

Diesel .........................................................304

Maintenance Plan — Cummins Diesel

Engine ........................................................305

ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 310

6.4L Engine ...............................................310

6.7L Engine ................................................311

Checking Oil Level — Gas Engine .............312

Checking Oil Level — Diesel Engine..........312

Adding Washer Fluid..................................312

Maintenance-Free Battery .......................313

Pressure Washing......................................313

DEALER SERVICE .............................................. 314

Engine Oil ..................................................314

Engine Oil Filter..........................................316

Engine Air Cleaner Filter............................316

Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................318

Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...............321

Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter.......321

Engine Mounted Fuel Filter

Replacement..............................................322

Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter

Replacement..............................................324

Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of

Fuel ............................................................324

Intervention Regeneration Strategy —

Message Process Flow .............................325

Diesel Exhaust Fluid ..................................326

Body Lubrication........................................326

Windshield Wiper Blades ..........................326

Exhaust System ........................................328

Cooling System .........................................329

Charge Air Cooler — Inter-Cooler ..............332

Brake System ............................................333


Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid

Level ..........................................................336

Transfer Case ............................................337

Noise Control System Required

Maintenance & Warranty .........................337

HOISTING ............................................................340

TIRES................................................................... 340

Tire Safety Information..............................340

Tires — General Information ....................346

Tire Types...................................................350

Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................351

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .....................353

Tire Chains and Traction Devices ............354

Tire Rotation Recommendations..............355

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................... 356

Treadwear ..................................................356

Traction Grades .........................................357

Temperature Grades .................................357

STORING THE VEHICLE ..................................... 357

BODYWORK........................................................ 357

Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......357

Body And Underbody Maintenance..........358

Preserving The Bodywork..........................358

INTERIORS ......................................................... 359

Seats And Fabric Parts..............................359

Plastic And Coated Parts...........................360

Leather Parts .............................................360

Glass Surfaces ..........................................360

7


8

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IDENTIFICATION DATA ...................................... 361

Vehicle Identification Number .................361

BRAKE SYSTEM ................................................ 361

Hydraulic Brake Assist — If Equipped.......361

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE

SPECIFICATIONS................................................ 361

Torque Specifications................................361

FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GAS ENGINE............ 363

6.4L Engine ................................................363

Reformulated Gasoline .............................363

Materials Added To Fuel ...........................363

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends......................364

Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel

Vehicles ......................................................364

CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...364

MMT In Gasoline........................................364

Fuel System Cautions................................364

Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................365

FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE....... 365

Fuel Specifications ...................................366

Biodiesel Fuel Requirements....................366

FLUID CAPACITIES — GAS ENGINE.................. 368

FLUID CAPACITIES — DIESEL ENGINE............. 368

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — GAS ENGINE .... 369

Engine ........................................................369

Chassis .......................................................371

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — DIESEL

ENGINE ...............................................................371

Engine ........................................................371

Chassis.......................................................374

MOPAR ACCESSORIES .....................................374

Authentic Accessories By Mopar .............374

MULTIMEDIA

UCONNECT SYSTEMS .......................................375

CYBERSECURITY ...............................................375

UCONNECT SETTINGS .......................................376

Uconnect 3 Settings ..................................376

Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV Settings .............390

Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display

Settings ......................................................408

SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION...........426

Safety Guidelines.......................................426

UCONNECT 3.0 ...................................................427

Introduction................................................427

Radio Mode................................................428

Media Mode...............................................430

Phone Mode...............................................431

UCONNECT 3 WITH 5-INCH DISPLAY ..............433

Introduction................................................433

Radio Mode................................................434

Media Mode...............................................437

Phone Mode...............................................439

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED........................................................... 445

Radio Operation.........................................445

Media Mode...............................................445

IPOD®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF

EQUIPPED........................................................... 446

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.... 447

Regulatory And Safety Information ..........447

VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS.................... 448

Introducing Uconnect................................448

Get Started.................................................449

Basic Voice Commands ............................449

Radio ..........................................................450

Media .........................................................450

Phone .........................................................450

Voice Text Reply — If Equipped.................451

Climate (4C/4C NAV).................................451

Navigation (4C NAV) ..................................452

Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped .................452

Using Do Not Disturb ................................452

Android Auto™ — If Equipped ..................452

Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped .................453


Additional Information...............................454


CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE .................................................. 455

Prepare For The Appointment...................455

Prepare A List.............................................455

Be Reasonable With Requests .................455

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...............................455

FCA US LLC Customer Center ...................456

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ...........456

Mexico ........................................................456

Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands............456

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or

Speech Impaired

(TDD/TTY)...................................................456

Service Contract .......................................456

WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 457

MOPAR PARTS................................................... 457

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 457

In The 50 United States And

Washington, D.C. .......................................457

In Canada...................................................457

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 458

9


10

INTRODUCTION

Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.

This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. Refer to the “Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner's Information, that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If

Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.

When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and care about your satisfaction.


HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

E

SSENTIAL

I

NFORMATION

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment.

The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.

S

YMBOLS

Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this component. Refer to

“Warning Lights and Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument

Panel” for further information on the symbols used in your vehicle.

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains

CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle.

If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

11

VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/ body builders. US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section

2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty Information. Such equipment includes video monitors,

VCRs, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.

Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the conversion/camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions are missing, please contact an authorized dealer for assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the applicable manufacturer.

For information on the Body Builder’s Guide refer to www.ramtrucks.com.

This website contains dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer's technical support.

For service issues, contact an authorized dealer.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

1


12

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED

Access your Owner’s Information right through your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen system (if equipped).

To access the Vehicle User Guide on your

Uconnect Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect

Apps button. From there, press the Vehicle User

Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Uconnect registration is required.

Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User

Guide Touchscreen Icon

NOTE:

Vehicle User Guide features are not available while the vehicle is moving. If you try to access while the vehicle is in motion, the system will display the message “Feature not available while the vehicle is in motion”.

Pre-Installed Features











Your User Guide — Updated in real-time

Touchscreen convenience

Maintenance schedules and information

Comprehensive icon and symbol glossary

Available when and where you need it





Customizable interface

Multilingual

Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you will be able to explore your warranty information and radio manual when and where you need them. Your Uconnect system displays the

Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to assist in better understanding your vehicle.

There’s no app to download, no phone to connect and no external device needed for playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout the year, in real-time, so it is never out of date.

Features/Benefits





Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen radio

Enhanced search and browsing capability











Robust NAV application (if equipped)

Add selected topics to a fast-access Favor ites category

Icon and symbol glossary

Warranty information

Crucial driver information and assistance:



Operating Instructions



Warranty Information



Fluid Level Standards



Maintenance Schedules



Emergency Procedures



911 Contact and More

TIP:

When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it to your Favorites, for easy access in the future.


KEYS

K

EY

F

OB

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The ignition system consists of a key fob with Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP push button ignition system. The Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) system (if equipped) consists of a key fob and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature.

NOTE:

The key fob may not be found if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.

If the vehicle is equipped with remote power door locks, the key fob allows you to lock or unlock all doors, as well as activate the Panic

Alarm, from distances up to approximately 66 ft

(20 m). The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

NOTE:





In the ON/RUN position, all key fob buttons will work until the vehicle reaches 2 mph

(4 km/h).

The key fob should not be placed next to the wireless charging pad (if equipped).

Key Fob

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13

1 — Unlock

2 — Lock

3 — Remote Start

4 — Panic

5 — Emergency Key

In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to the instrument cluster, which will display directions to follow.

In a situation where the battery is low or fully depleted, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side opposite of the emergency key) against the START/STOP ignition button and push to operate the ignition switch.

To Unlock The Doors

If the vehicle is equipped with remote power door locks, push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to unlock the driver’s door.

Push the unlock button twice within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.

2


14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push of the unlock button. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

To Lock The Doors

If the vehicle is equipped with remote power door locks, push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or turned off.

NOTE:

Pushing the lock button on the key fob while you are in the vehicle will activate the vehicle secu rity alarm system. Opening a door with the vehicle security alarm system activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the unlock button to deactivate the vehicle security alarm system.

Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in

“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Using The Panic Alarm

To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push the Panic button on the key fob. When the Panic

Alarm is activated, the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a second time or driving the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or greater.

NOTE:



The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will remain on.



You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system.

Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob With

Remote Control

The replacement battery model is one CR2450 battery.

NOTE:



Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa tion.



Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board.

1. Remove the emergency key by pushing and holding the release button located on the side of the key fob while pulling the emergency key out with your other hand.

Emergency Key Release button


2. Slightly remove the emergency key from the key fob, approximately 10 mm. The blade of the emergency key should just become visible.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15 the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.

5. Replace the battery by pushing the new battery down on an angle toward the top edge of the opening. Then, push down on the remainder of the battery to lock into place.

2

Key Fob Back Cover Removal

4. Remove the battery by using the emergency key to pry the battery out of its housing.

Emergency Key

3. Holding the key fob with the button side facing down, use the emergency key to pry up the battery cover until the cover releases from the key fob housing.

Key Fob Battery Removal

NOTE:

When replacing the battery, ensure the + sign on the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching

Key Fob Battery Replacement

6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the top edge of the back cover with the top of the fob, and press the edges into the interlocking hinges until all edges snap together with no large visual gaps.



NOTE:

The key fob battery should only be replaced by qualified technicians. If the battery requires replacement, see an authorized dealer.

Alternative Back Cover Removal Method:

The back cover of the key fob can also be removed by inserting the emergency key into the left or right side open slots, and twisting to pop off the cover.

Alternate Key Fob Back Cover Removal Method

NOTE:

The key fob battery should only be replaced by qualified technicians. If the battery requires replacement, see an authorized dealer.

Programming Additional Key Fobs

Programming the key fob may be performed by an authorized dealer.

NOTE:

Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all

Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and with Innovation, Science and

Economic Development Canada license-exempt

RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation, Science and Economic

Development applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:

1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et

2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compro mettre le fonctionnement.

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:

1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y

2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.


IGNITION SWITCH

K

EYLESS

P

USH

B

UTTON

I

GNITION

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry key fob is in the passenger compartment.

The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During START, RUN will illuminate.

NOTE:

In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob against the

START/STOP ignition button, with your foot applied on the brake pedal, and push to operate the ignition switch.

Keyless Push Button Ignition

1 — OFF

2 — ACC (Accessory)

3 — ON/RUN

The push button ignition can be placed in the following modes:

OFF



The engine is stopped.



Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking, alarm, etc.) are still available.

ACC





Engine is not started.

Some electrical devices are available.


RUN





Driving position.

All the electrical devices are available.

START



The engine will start.

WARNING!



When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.



Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.



Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat tended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.



Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil dren, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

(Continued)

2



WARNING!

(Continued)



Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

The engine only runs when the ignition is in the

ON/RUN position, or from a remote start request.

In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob against the

START/STOP ignition button and push to operate the ignition switch.

Back Up Starting Method

NOTE:

The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the

Keyless Enter-N-Go system from starting the vehicle.

NOTE:

Refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And

Operating" for further information.

REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED

(GASOLINE)

This system uses the key fob to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).

NOTE:

Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may reduce this range.

H

OW

T

O

U

SE

R

EMOTE

S

TART

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:



















Gear selector in PARK

Doors closed

Hood closed

Hazard switch off

Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)

Battery at an acceptable charge level

PANIC button not pushed

Fuel meets minimum requirement

System not disabled from previous remote start event






Vehicle security alarm not active

Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated

WARNING!



Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.



Keep key fobs away from children. Opera tion of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.

R

EMOTE

S

TART

A

BORT

M

ESSAGE

The following messages will display in the instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:











Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open

Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open

Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low

Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault

Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to

Reset

The instrument cluster display message stays active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.

T

O

E

NTER

R

EMOTE

S

TART

M

ODE

Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. The parking lights will flash, vehicle doors will lock, and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Once the vehicle has started, the engine will run for

15 minutes.

NOTE:



If your power door locks were unlocked,

Remote Start will automatically lock the doors.









If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.

The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.

For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.

The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15 minute cycles) with the key

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19 fob. However, the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.

T

O

E

XIT

R

EMOTE

S

TART

M

ODE

W

ITHOUT

D

RIVING

T

HE

V

EHICLE

Push and release the remote start button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire

15 minute cycle.

NOTE:

To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.

T

O

E

XIT

R

EMOTE

S

TART

M

ODE

A

ND

D

RIVE

T

HE

V

EHICLE

Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and disarm the vehicle security alarm system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

R

EMOTE

S

TART

C

OMFORT

S

YSTEM

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

When remote start is activated, the heated steering wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather. In

2


20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated. These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE:

The Remote Start Comfort system can be acti vated and deactivated through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi media” for further information on Remote Start

Comfort system operation.

G

ENERAL

I

NFORMATION
















NOTE:


REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL)

This system uses the key fob to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).

NOTE:



Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may reduce this range.



The Remote Start system will wait for the

Wait To Start Indicator Light to extinguish before cranking the engine. This allows time for the intake heater to preheat the incoming air, and is normal operation in cold weather.

Refer to “Wait To Start Light”, located in

“Warning Lights And Messages” within

“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information.

H

OW

T

O

U

SE

R

EMOTE

S

TART

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:



Transmission in PARK







Doors closed

Hood closed

Hazard switch off
















Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)

Battery at an acceptable charge level

PANIC button not pushed

Fuel meets minimum requirement

Water In Fuel Indicator Light is not illumi nated

Wait To Start Light is not illuminated

Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated

WARNING!



Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.



Keep key fobs away from children. Opera tion of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death.

R

EMOTE

S

TART

A

BORT

M

ESSAGE

The following messages will display in the instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:









Remote Start Aborted — Door Open

Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open

Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low

Remote Start Aborted — System Fault

The instrument cluster display message is stored until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.

T

O

E

NTER

R

EMOTE

S

TART

M

ODE

Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob twice, within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). In cold ambient temperature conditions, the diesel vehicle may delay crank up to 30 seconds for the Intake Air

Heater. Once the vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15 minutes.

NOTE:







Crank may be delayed up to 75 seconds for intake air heater operation at high altitudes, and/or extreme cold.

The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.

For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.






Additional features, such as windshield wipers, will also not be available while the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.

The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15 minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the ignition switch must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.

T

O

E

XIT

R

EMOTE

S

TART

M

ODE

W

ITHOUT

D

RIVING

T

HE

V

EHICLE

Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire

15 minute cycle.

NOTE:

To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will disable for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.

T

O

E

XIT

R

EMOTE

S

TART

M

ODE

A

ND

D

RIVE

T

HE

V

EHICLE

To exit Remote Start Mode and drive the vehicle before the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock the door and disarm the vehicle security

2


22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE alarm System (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE:

The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN posi tion in order to drive the vehicle.

R

EMOTE

S

TART

C

OMFORT

S

YSTEM

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

When remote start is activated, the heated steering wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated. These features will stay on through the duration of remote start or until the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE:

The Remote Start Comfort system can be acti vated and deactivated through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi media” for further information on Remote Start

Comfort system operation.

SENTRY KEY

The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.

Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from another vehicle.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone attempted to start the engine with an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used to start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start and shut off after two seconds.

If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.

All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

K

EY

P

ROGRAMMING

Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer.

R

EPLACEMENT

K

EYS

NOTE:

Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!



Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

(Continued)


CAUTION!

(Continued)



For vehicles equipped with Keyless

Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position.

NOTE:

Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been programmed.

When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer

System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.

G

ENERAL

I

NFORMATION
















NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli -

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23 ance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED

The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized operation.

When the vehicle security alarm is activated, interior switches for door locks are disabled.

The system will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to

8 cycles if the trigger remains active and then the vehicle security alarm will rearm itself.

T

O

A

RM

T

HE

S

YSTEM

Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm:

1. Remove the key from the ignition system

(on vehicles with keyed ignition). Refer to

"Starting The Engine" in "Starting And

Operating" for further information.



Make sure the vehicle ignition system is

OFF.

2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle:



Push the lock button on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open.

2





Push the lock button on the exterior

Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same exterior zone. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go —

Passive Entry" in "Doors" in this chapter for further information.



Push the lock button on the key fob.

3. If any doors are open, close them.

The vehicle security alarm will set when you use the power door locks, or use the key fob to lock the doors. After all the doors are locked and closed, the vehicle security light, in the instrument panel cluster, will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set, the vehicle security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed.

T

O

D

ISARM

T

HE

S

YSTEM

The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods:

1. Push the unlock button on the key fob.

2. Grasp the Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the

Passive Entry door handle (if equipped).

Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive

Entry" in "Doors" in this chapter for further information.

3. Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position.

The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.

If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.

R

EARMING

O

F

T

HE

S

YSTEM

If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will turn the horn off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8 cycles if the trigger remains active and then the vehicle security alarm will rearm itself.

S

ECURITY

S

YSTEM

M

ANUAL

O

VERRIDE

The vehicle security alarm will not arm/disarm if you lock/unlock the doors using the manual door lock.

DOORS

M

ANUAL

D

OOR

L

OCKS

Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock knob down. The lock knobs will unlock when the interior handle is used to open the doors.

Door Lock Knob

Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle without lifting the lock knob.

Doors locked before closing will remain locked when closed.



The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on your vehicle.

WARNING!






For personal security and safety in the event of an collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle.



Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs from vehicle, and lock all doors. and lock your vehicle.



Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)






Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil dren, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

P

OWER

D

OOR

L

OCKS

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

The power door lock switches are on each front door trim panel. Use these switches to lock or unlock the doors.

NOTE:

The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the

Keyless Enter-N-Go system from starting the vehicle.

Power Door Lock Switches

While in the ACC or ON/RUN positions, if you push the power door lock switch, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate.

This prevents you from accidentally locking your key fob in the vehicle. Removing the key fob or closing the door will allow the locks to operate.

A chime will sound if the key fob is in the vehicle and a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key fob.

K

EYLESS

E

NTER

-N-G

O

— P

ASSIVE

E

NTRY

(I

F

E

QUIPPED

)

The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.

2



NOTE:





Passive Entry may be programmed on/off.

Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.





If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm.

The vehicle’s security alarm can be armed/ disarmed by pushing the Passive Entry key fob lock/unlock buttons (if equipped).



The key fob may not be able to be detected by the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob's wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry door handle from locking/unlocking the vehicle.

To Unlock From The Driver's Side:

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver's door automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

NOTE:

If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle. To select between

“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All

Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

To Unlock From The Passenger Side:

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked.

NOTE:

All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock

Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st

Press”).

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry

Key Fob In Vehicle:

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry key fobs. If one of the vehicle's Passive Entry key fobs is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid Passive

Entry key fobs are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times

(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the

Passive Entry key fob can be locked in the vehicle).


To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:

With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push the door handle lock button to lock all doors.

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).

Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

NOTE:



After pushing the door handle lock button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive

Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.





The Passive Entry system depends on a key fob that is not fully discharged of its coin battery capacity.

The LED light on the key fob will not blink if the key fob battery is low or fully depleted, but a low key fob battery condition will still support the Passive Entry system function ality. When the key fob battery is low, the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27 instrument cluster will display a message indicating that the key fob battery is low.

Refer to “Keys” in this chapter for further information.

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.

General Information









2










NOTE:


A

UTOMATIC

D

OOR

L

OCKS

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds

15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer.

Please see an authorized dealer for service.

Automatic Doors Unlock — If Equipped

This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when either front door is opened. This will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been driven (shifted out of PARK and all doors closed).

Automatic Doors Unlock Programming — If

Equipped

The Automatic Doors Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled as follows:



For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in




For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi media” for further information.

NOTE:

Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accor dance with local laws.

C

HILD

-P

ROTECTION

D

OOR

L

OCK

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your vehicle have the

Child-Protection Door Lock system.

To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to engage and disengage the

Child-Protection locks. When the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.


Child Lock Control

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside door handle when the Child Protection Door Locks are engaged.

NOTE:





After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position.

For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the door lock switch to the unlock posi tion, roll down the window, and open the door with the outside door handle.

DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows the driver to save up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile saves desired position settings for the following features:





Driver seat position

Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped)







Side mirrors

Adjustable pedals (if equipped)

A set of desired radio station presets

NOTE:





If equipped with power convex mirrors, these mirror positions will not set as part of a memory profile. Refer to “Mirrors” in this chapter for further information.

Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one key fob can be linked to memory position

1 and the other key fob can be linked to memory position 2.

The driver memory settings switch is located on the driver door, next to the door handle, and consists of three buttons:






The set (S) button, which is used to activate the memory save function.

The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either of two saved memory profiles.

Driver Memory Settings Buttons

P

ROGRAMMING

T

HE

M

EMORY

F

EATURE

To create a new memory profile, perform the following:

1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors, adjustable pedals (if equipped), and radio station presets).

2



3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch, and then push the desired memory button (1 or 2) within five seconds. The instrument cluster display will display which memory position has been set.

NOTE:

Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK.

L

INKING

A

ND

U

NLINKING

T

HE

R

EMOTE

K

EYLESS

E

NTRY

K

EY

F

OB

T

O

M

EMORY

Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of two saved memory profiles by pushing the unlock button on the key fob.

NOTE:

Before programming your key fob you must select the “Personal Settings Linked to Key

Fob” feature through the Uconnect Settings.


To program your key fob, perform the following:

1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.

2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2.

NOTE:

If a memory profile has not already been set, refer to "Programming The Memory Feature" in this section for instructions on how to set a memory profile.

3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the set (S) button on the memory switch.

4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster.

5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within 10 seconds.

NOTE:

Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory settings by pushing the set (S) button, and within 10 seconds, pushing the unlock button on the key fob.

M

EMORY

P

OSITION

R

ECALL

NOTE:

The vehicle speed must be lower than 5 mph

(8 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), a message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display.

To recall the memory settings for driver one or two, push the desired memory button number

(1 or 2) or the unlock button on the key fob linked to the desired memory position.

A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2).

When a recall is canceled, the driver's seat and the adjustable pedals (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint

System of the vehicle.

WARNING!



It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.



Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed.



Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.


M

ANUAL

F

RONT

S

EAT

A

DJUSTMENT

Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward

Adjustment

Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat.

Manual Seat Adjustment Bar

While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.


WARNING!



Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.



Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.

Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment

The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, lean back to the desired position and release the lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever once the seat back is in the upright position.

Manual Recline Lever

WARNING!



Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while actuating the handle. The seatback may swing forward and hit you causing injury.



To avoid injury, place your hand on the seat back and actuate the handle, then position the seatback in the desired position.

40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped

The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat. On some models, the back of the center portion (20%) easily folds down to provide an armrest/center storage compartment.

2



P

OWER

D

RIVER

S

EAT

A

DJUSTMENT

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

Some models may be equipped with an eight-way power driver's seat. The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the driver's seat cushion. There are two power seat switches that are used to control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback.

Power Seat Switches

1 — Power Seat Switch

2 — Power Seatback Switch

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the rear of seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached.

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

Reclining The Seatback

The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached.

WARNING!



Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death.



Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt.



Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.


Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.

Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.

Lumbar Control Switch

Easy Entry/Exit Seat

This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.

The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where you have the driver’s seat positioned when you remove the key fob from the ignition.





When you remove the key fob from the igni tion, the driver’s seat will move about

2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver’s seat position is greater than or equal to

2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the

ACC or RUN position.

When you remove the key fob from the igni tion, the driver’s seat will move to a position

0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver’s seat position is between

0.9 inches and 2.7 inches (22.7 mm and

67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition to the ACC or RUN posi tion.



The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver’s seat position is less than

0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or

Easy Entry.

When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory setting profile. Refer to “Driver Memory

Settings — If Equipped” in this chapter for further information.


NOTE:

The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The

Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect

Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa tion.

H

EATED

S

EATS

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and seat backs.

WARNING!



Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys ical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time.

(Continued)

2



WARNING!

(Continued)



Do not place anything on the seat or seat back that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.

Front Heated Seats

The heated seats control buttons are located on the center instrument panel below the touchscreen, and are also located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.



Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting on.





Push the heated seat button a second time to turn the MED setting on.

Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the LO setting on.



Push the heated seat button a fourth time to turn the heating elements off.

NOTE:



The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.



The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator changes it.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start, the driver’s seat can be programmed to come on during a remote start.

This feature can be programmed through the

Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

Rear Heated Seats

On some models, the two outboard rear seats are equipped with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console.

There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently. You can choose from HI, MED,

LO, or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use.



Push the heated seat button once to turn the HI setting on.



Push the heated seat button a second time to turn the MED setting on.





Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the LO setting on.

Push the heated seat button a fourth time to turn the heating elements off.

NOTE:



The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator changes it.



Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes.



The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate.

V

ENTILATED

S

EATS

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

Front Ventilated Seats

Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at three speeds, HI, MED and LO.

The front ventilated seats control buttons are located on the center instrument panel below the touchscreen, and are also located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.










Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.

Press the ventilated seat button a second time to choose MED.

Press the ventilated seat button a third time to choose LO.

Press the ventilated seat button a fourth time to turn the ventilation off.

NOTE:

The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate.


On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a remote start.



HEAD RESTRAINTS

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!





All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.

Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.

NOTE:

Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of your head.

F

RONT

H

EAD

R

ESTRAINTS

Four-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with front four-way driver and passenger head restraints.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35 base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.

To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of the head restraint toward the front of the vehicle as desired and release. To adjust the head restraint rearward, pull the top of the head restraint to the forward most position and release. The head restraint will return to the rear most position.

NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat, the center head restraint is not adjustable or removable.

Two-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with front two-way driver and passenger head restraints.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.

2



Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location

WARNING!



All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.



Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision.

F

RONT

H

EAD

R

ESTRAINT

R

EMOVAL

To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment button and the release button while pulling upward on the whole assembly. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the appropriate height.

WARNING!





A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.

Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occu pant compartment.

ALL the head restraints MUST be rein stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.

R

EAR

H

EAD

R

ESTRAINT

A

DJUSTMENT

The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and removable head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint.

Release/Adjustment Buttons

1 — Release Button

2 — Adjustment Button

NOTE:



The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab) has only one adjustment position that is used to aid in the routing of a tether. Refer to

“Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.



Do not reposition the head restraint

180 degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head.

R

EAR

H

EAD

R

ESTRAINT

R

EMOVAL

To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment button and the release button while pulling upward on the whole assembly. To

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37 reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the appropriate height.

NOTE:

To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat bottom must be folded up.

WARNING!



A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.

Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occu pant compartment.



ALL the head restraints MUST be rein stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.

STEERING WHEEL

T

ILT

S

TEERING

C

OLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the steering column, below the multifunction lever.

Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired. Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in place.

Tilt Steering Lever

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.


H

EATED

S

TEERING

W

HEEL

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather.

The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the operator turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.

The heated steering wheel control button is located on the center instrument panel below the touchscreen, as well as within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.





Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn the heating element on.

Press the heated steering wheel button a second time to turn the heating element off.

NOTE:

The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate.


On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start.

2





WARNING!



Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys ical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods.



Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF

EQUIPPED

The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake and accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel.

The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of the steering column.

Adjustable Pedals Switch

The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition

OFF.

The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Speed

Control System is on. If there is an attempt to adjust the pedals when the system is locked out, the following messages will appear (if equipped with an instrument cluster display):





Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control

Engaged

Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In

Reverse

NOTE:



Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full pedal travel.





Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the best possible seat/pedal position.

For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory

Settings, you can use your remote keyless entry key fob or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to return the adjust able pedals to pre-programmed positions.

Refer to “Driver Memory Settings — If

Equipped” in this chapter for further informa tion.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving. You could lose control and have an accident. Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal's path.


MIRRORS

I

NSIDE

D

AY

/N

IGHT

M

IRROR

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield).

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

A

UTOMATIC

D

IMMING

M

IRROR

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you.

NOTE:

The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve rear view viewing.

The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off through the touchscreen.

Automatic Dimming Mirror


CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

A

UTOMATIC

D

IMMING

M

IRROR

W

ITH

R

EAR

V

IEW

C

AMERA

D

ISPLAY

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you.

When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear, a video display illuminates to display the image generated by the rear view camera (for the

3500, 4500, and 5500 Chassis Cab vehicles, the Rear Backup Camera is shipped loose and

2


40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE not installed. Please refer to the Ram Body

Builders Guide for more information). The auto dimming feature is also disabled to improve rear view viewing.

Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera

O

UTSIDE

M

IRRORS

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps under the outside mirrors, they can be turned off through the Uconnect display. For further information, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Multimedia”.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.

Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror.

D

RIVER

'

S

O

UTSIDE

A

UTOMATIC

D

IMMING

M

IRROR

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.

P

OWER

M

IRRORS

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

The controls for the power mirrors are located on the driver's door trim panel.

Power Mirror Controls

1 — Mirror Direction Control

2 — Right Mirror Selection

3 — Left Mirror Selection

The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch.

To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R

(right) button to select the mirror that you want to adjust.


Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.

Power Mirror Movement

P

OWER

C

ONVEX

M

IRROR

S

WITCH

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

The Power Convex Mirror Switch is located on the door trim panel, above the power mirror controls. The switch enables the movement of the convex portion of both the driver and passenger outside mirrors.

Power Convex Mirror Switch

To adjust the convex portion of the outside mirrors, push the Power Convex Mirror Switch.

Then, select the mirror you want to adjust by using the L (left) or R (right) buttons.

To return the control to the large mirror, push the Power Convex Mirror Switch a second time.


NOTE:

If the Power Convex Mirror Switch is not pushed a second time, the switch will automatically default back to the larger portion of the outside mirrors after a period of time.

T

RAILER

T

OWING

M

IRRORS

These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror head to provide a greater vision range when towing extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped in or out).

2

Trailer Towing Position

NOTE:

Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to entering an automated car wash.

Trailer Tow Power Convex Mirror



A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror and can be adjusted separately.

Blindspot Mirror

H

EATED

M

IRRORS

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature will be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped).

Refer to “Climate Controls” in this chapter for further information.

T

ILT

S

IDE

M

IRRORS

I

N

R

EVERSE

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic outside mirror positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside mirrors will then return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse position.

NOTE:

The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not turned on when delivered from the factory.



O

UTSIDE

M

IRRORS

F

OLDING

F

EATURE

All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manually folded both forward and rearward to prevent damage.

Folding Mirror

CAUTION!

It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full rearward position to resist damage when entering a car wash or a narrow location.


I

LLUMINATED

V

ANITY

M

IRROR

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.

“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If

Equipped

The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun.

To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the “Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired position.


EXTERIOR LIGHTS

M

ULTIFUNCTION

L

EVER

The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column.

2

Lift Cover For Illuminated Mirror

“Slide-On-Rod” Extender

Multifunction Lever

H

EADLIGHT

S

WITCH

The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument panel light dimming, cargo light/trailer spotter lights (if equipped), and fog lights (if equipped).



Headlight Switch

1 — Rotate Control Knob

2 — Ambient Light Dimmer

3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer

4 — Front Fog Lights

5 — Cargo Light

Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight, parking light, and instrument panel light operation.

D

AYTIME

R

UNNING

L

IGHTS

(DRL

S

)

The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except PARK. This provides a constant "lights on" condition until the ignition is placed in the OFF position. The lights illuminate at less than half of normal intensity. If the parking brake is applied, the

Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn off.

NOTE:





If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running

Lights can be turned on and off using the

Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect

Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa tion.

On some vehicles, the Daytime Running

Lights may deactivate,or reduce intensity on one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights are activated).

H

IGH

/L

OW

B

EAM

S

WITCH

Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the multifunction lever back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.

A

UTOMATIC

H

IGH

B

EAM

H

EADLAMP

C

ONTROL

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror or forward facing camera.

This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.

NOTE:





The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off by selecting “ON” under “Auto Dim High Beams” within your

Uconnect settings, as well as turning the headlight switch to the AUTO position. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly.




To opt out of the Advanced Auto High Beam

Sensitivity Control (default) and enter

Reduced High Beam Sensitivity Control (not recommended), on vehicles equipped with mirror controlled automatic high beams and without the forward facing camera, toggle the high beam lever six full on/off cycles within

10 seconds of placing the ignition in the ON position. The system will return to the default setting when the ignition is OFF.

If the windshield or Automatic High Beam

Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See a local authorized dealer.

To Activate

1. The Automatic High Beams are enabled through the Uconnect system. Refer to


2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position.

3. Push the multifunction lever away from you

(toward front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.

NOTE:

The Automatic High Beams will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 12 mph (20 km/h).

To Deactivate

1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward in vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal operation of low beams).

2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the system.

The Automatic High Beams can also be deactivated through the Uconnect system.


F

LASH

-T

O

-P

ASS

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the lever is released.

A

UTOMATIC

H

EADLIGHTS

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

This system automatically turns your headlights on or off based on ambient light levels. To turn the system on, turn the headlight switch clockwise, aligning the indicator with the AUTO on the headlight switch. When the system is on, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on. This means your headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition switch in

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45 the OFF position. To turn the Automatic System off, turn the headlight switch counterclockwise to the O (off) position.

NOTE:

The engine must be running before the head lights will come on in the Automatic mode.

P

ARKING

L

IGHTS

A

ND

P

ANEL

L

IGHTS

To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights, from the O (off) position, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent. To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.

D

IRECTIONAL

LED H

EADLAMP

S

YSTEM

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

This is a system consisting of LED (low/high beam) headlights that incorporate dynamic cornering with 5-degree inboard/15-degree outboard swivel. The headlights continuously and automatically adapt to the driving conditions around bends or when cornering based on steering wheel angle.

The system directs the headlights to light up the road in the best way, taking into account the speed of the vehicle and the bend or corner angle, as well as the speed of the vehicle while the steering wheel is being turned.

2



The adaptive lights are automatically activated when the vehicle is traveling above approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).

H

EADLIGHTS

O

N

W

ITH

W

IPERS

(A

VAILABLE

W

ITH

A

UTOMATIC

H

EADLIGHTS

O

NLY

)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off, if they were turned on by this feature.

NOTE:



H

EADLIGHT

D

ELAY

To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned off while the headlight switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be canceled by either turning the headlight switch on then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

NOTE:



L

IGHTS

-O

N

R

EMINDER

If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound when the driver’s door is opened.

F

RONT

F

OG

L

IGHTS

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or low beam headlights and push in the center of the headlight switch control knob. Pushing the headlight switch control knob a second time will turn the front fog lights off.

T

URN

S

IGNALS

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster display will flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE:

If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec tive outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.

L

ANE

C

HANGE

A

SSIST

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

Tap the multifunction lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times then automatically turn off.

C

ARGO

L

IGHTS

/T

RAILER

S

POTTER

L

IGHTS

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

The cargo lights (if equipped) and trailer spotter lights (if equipped) are turned on by pushing the cargo lights button located on the lower half of the headlight switch.

Front Fog Light Switch


Cargo Lights Button On Headlight Switch

The cargo lights will turn on for approximately

60 seconds when a key fob unlock button is pushed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.

When these lights are activated using the button on the headlight switch, the trailer spotter lights will remain illuminated when the vehicle transmission is in PARK, NEUTRAL, or

REVERSE. The trailer spotter lights will turn off when the vehicle transmission is placed in

DRIVE.

B

ATTERY

S

AVER

To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.

If the ignition is OFF, the interior lights will automatically turn off when:







Any door is left ajar for 10 minutes.

The Dome Off button is pushed.

The cargo and spotter lights are manually activated by the headlight switch.

NOTE:

Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is

ON.

If the headlights remain on while the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off.

INTERIOR LIGHTS

C

OURTESY

L

IGHTS

The courtesy, dome, and cargo lights are turned on when any door is opened or the Dome On button is pushed on the overhead console. Also, if your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless

Entry, and the unlock button is pushed on the key fob, the courtesy, dome, and cargo lights will turn on.


Courtesy/Reading Lights

The overhead console lights can also be operated individually as reading lights by pushing the corresponding buttons.

2

Front Courtesy/Reading Lights

1 — Driver’s Reading Light On/Off Button

2 — Dome Off Button

3 — Dome On Button

4 — Passenger’s Reading Light On/Off Button

NOTE:

On vehicles equipped with an LED overhead console, if both the Dome On and Dome Off buttons are pushed, the Illuminated Entry with door ajar feature will be disabled, but the Dome

Lights inside the vehicle will turn on.



Three types of Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights are available for your vehicle:







Push button on/off

Push lens on/off

No on/off button, just Courtesy Light

NOTE:

The Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights will remain on until the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have been turned off before exiting the vehicle. If the interior lights are left on after the ignition is turned off, they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes.

Dimmer Control

The dimmer controls are part of the headlight switch and are located on the left side of the instrument panel.

Dimmer Controls

1 — Ambient Light Control

2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control

With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the right dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights.

Rotating the left dimmer control will adjust the interior and ambient light levels.

NOTE:





The dimming of the touchscreen is program mable through the Uconnect system. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further details.

The ambient lights are only active when the headlights or parking lights are on.

I

LLUMINATED

E

NTRY

The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob to unlock the doors (if the vehicle is equipped with remote power door locks) or open any door.

This feature also turns on the puddle lamps located beneath the outside mirrors (if equipped).

The lights will fade to off after approximately

30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.

The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will not turn off if the Dome On button on the overhead console is pushed.

The illuminated entry system will not operate if the Dome Off button on the overhead console is pushed.

NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with Illuminated

Approach lights under the outside mirrors, they can also be turned off by pushing the Dome Off button.


WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

W

INDSHIELD

W

IPERS

The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction lever. Turn the end of the lever to select the desired wiper speed.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.

Intermittent Wiper System

The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob upward to the first detent.

The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the low continual speed position. The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every one second. The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.

Windshield Washers

To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer knob is released from this position.

If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer knob is pushed while in the off position, the wiper will turn on and cycle approximately three times after the wash knob is released.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49 mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use.

Mist Feature

When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one time and automatically shut off.

NOTE:

The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.

2



R

AIN

S

ENSING

W

IPERS

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings to activate this feature.

NOTE:



The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive. Position

3 should be used for normal rain conditions.

Positions 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity. Positions 4 and

5 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the O (off) position when not using the system.

NOTE:



The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.





The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield.

Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor mance.

The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the following conditions:







Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni tion is first placed in the ON position, the Rain

Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).

Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than

5 mph (8 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position.

Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain

Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, Rain

Sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit condi tions (mentioned previously) exist.

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the touchscreen (if equipped), on the sides of the touchscreen, or on the instrument panel below the radio.

M

ANUAL

C

LIMATE

C

ONTROL

O

VERVIEW

Manual Climate Controls


Icon


Description

MAX A/C Setting

Set the Temperature Control Knob to the MAX A/C setting to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. Moving the temperature control knob away from the MAX A/C setting causes the MAX A/C operation to exit.

A/C Button

Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator illuminates when the A/C is on.

Recirculation Button

Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between

Recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the

Recirculation button is pushed. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

Temperature Control

Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the air forced through the Climate Control system. The temperature increases as you turn the temperature control knob clockwise. The temperature decreases as you turn the temperature control knob counterclockwise.

Blower Control

Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the Climate Control system. There are seven blower speeds available. The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.

2



Icon

Panel Mode

Bi-Level Mode

Description

Mode Control

Turn the Mode Control knob to adjust the airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:

Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.

Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE:

Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

Floor Mode

Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

Mix Mode

Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.



Icon Description

Front Defrost Setting

Turn the Mode Control knob to the Front Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.

Rear Defrost Button

Push and release the Rear Defrost button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 15 minutes.

Climate Control OFF

To turn the Climate Controls off, turn the Blower Control knob to the O (off) position.

A

UTOMATIC

C

LIMATE

C

ONTROL

O

VERVIEW

NOTE:

Icons and descriptions can vary based upon vehicle equipment.

2

Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display

Automatic Temperature Controls

Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch Display Automatic

Temperature Controls



Icon Description

MAX A/C

Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. The

MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.

NOTE:

The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.

Faceplate A/C Button

Touchscreen A/C

Button

A/C Button

Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current setting. The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.

Recirculation Button

Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator illuminates when Recirculation is on. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.



Icon

Faceplate Auto Button

Description

Touchscreen Auto

Button

AUTO

Set your desired temperature and press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired temperature by automatically adjusting the blower speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly recommended for efficiency. You can press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to turn AUTO on. The AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is on. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.

2

Front Defrost Button

Press and release the Front Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use

Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.

Rear Defrost Button

Push and release the Rear Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 15 minutes.



Icon

Faceplate Temperature

Knobs

Description

Touchscreen

Temperature Buttons

Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons

Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button (or rotate knob if equipped) on the faceplate or touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the blue button (or rotate knob if equipped) on the faceplate or touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.

NOTE:

The numbers within the temperature display will only appear if the system is equipped with an automatic climate control system.

Up and down buttons are only available on vehicles equipped with a 12-inch display.

SYNC

Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC synchronizes the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.

NOTE:

The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.



Icon

Faceplate Blower Knob

Touchscreen Blower

Buttons

Description

Blower Control

Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available.

The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.

Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.

Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.

Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.

NOTE:

On Uconnect 4C NAV With 12–inch display radios, pressing the blower control button below one turns the Climate Control system OFF.

Faceplate Mode Button

Touchscreen Mode

Buttons

Mode Control

Mode Control regulates the airflow distribution. The airflow distribution outlets are: instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets, and demist outlets.

Faceplate: Push the Mode button to change the airflow distribution mode.

Touchscreen: Press one of the “MODE” buttons to change the airflow distribution mode.

The Mode settings are as follows:

2

Panel Mode

Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.



Icon

Bi-Level Mode

Description

Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE:

Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.

Floor Mode

Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

Mix Mode

Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Climate Control OFF Button

Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control system ON/OFF.


C

LIMATE

C

ONTROL

F

UNCTIONS

A/C (Air Conditioning)

The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.

NOTE:



For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.





If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower speed if needed.

If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the

A/C condenser (located in front of the radi ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.

Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radiator and through the condenser.

MAX A/C

MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance.

Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is on.

In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings.

Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected setting and

MAX A/C to exit.

Recirculation

In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The

Recirculation feature may be unavailable

(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield.

On systems with Manual Climate Controls, if equipped, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled automatically if this mode is selected.

Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in the control button to blink and then turns off.


A

UTOMATIC

T

EMPERATURE

C

ONTROL

(ATC)

Automatic Operation

1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.

2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature control buttons. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.

3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically.

NOTE:





It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.

The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or

Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric

2


60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE customer-programmable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

To provide you with maximum comfort in the

Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.

Manual Operation Override

This system offers a full complement of manual override features. The AUTO symbol in the front

ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode.

O

PERATING

T

IPS

NOTE:

Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions.

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT coolant

(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.

Winter Operation

To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause window fogging.

Vacation/Storage

Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

Window Fogging

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use the

Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:



Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water.



Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.



Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In

Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.


Cabin Air Filter

The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.

Operating Tips Chart

WEATHER

Hot Weather And

Vehicle Interior Is Very

Hot

Warm Weather

Cool Sunny

Cool & Humid

Conditions

CONTROL

SETTINGS

Set the mode control to , on, and blower on high. Roll down the windows for a minute to flush out the hot air. Adjust the controls as needed to achieve comfort.

Turn on and set the mode control to the position.

Operate in position.

Set the mode control to position and turn on to keep windows clear.

WEATHER

Cold Weather

CONTROL

SETTINGS

Set the mode control to the position. If windshield fogging starts to occur, move the control to the position.

WINDOWS

P

OWER

W

INDOWS

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

Power Window Controls

Power Window Switches

The power window controls located on the driver's door trim panel have up-down switches that give you fingertip control of all power

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61 windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the front passenger door for passenger window control and on the rear doors for rear window control. The windows will operate when the ignition switch is placed in the

ON/RUN or ACC position, and for up to

10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the

OFF position or until a front door is opened.

NOTE:

The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

This feature is cancelled when either front door is opened.

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle.

Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/

RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.

2



Auto-Down — If Equipped

Both the driver and front passenger window switch have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch.

To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.

To open the window part way, push the switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.

Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection

— If Equipped

Pull the window switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.

To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop.

NOTE:

If the window runs into any obstacle during the

Auto-Closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window.

Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually.

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing.

Reset Auto-Up

Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:

1. Make sure the door is fully closed.

2. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed.

3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open.

Window Lockout Switch — If Equipped

The window lockout switch on the driver's door allows you to disable the window control on the rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors, push the window lock switch into the latched or down position. To enable the window controls, push the window lock switch again and return the switch to the released or up position.

Window Lockout Switch


Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped

The switch for the power sliding rear window is located on the overhead console.

Power Sliding Rear Window Switch

Push the switch rearward to open the window.

Pull the switch forward to close the window.

Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped

A locking device in the center of the window helps to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the lock to release the window.

W

IND

B

UFFETING

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window.

HOOD

T

O

O

PEN

T

HE

H

OOD

To open the hood, two latches must be released.

1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at the base of the instrument panel.


2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood and push the safety latch lever to the left to release it, before raising the hood.

Hood Release

Safety Latch Location

T

O

C

LOSE

T

HE

H

OOD

Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches

(30 cm) from the engine compartment and drop it. Make sure that the hood is completely closed.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death.

2



CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.

The HomeLink® buttons that are located on the sun visor designate the three different

HomeLink® channels.

HomeLink® Buttons

NOTE:

HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active.

WARNING!



Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufac tured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features.



Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the trans ceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.

NOTE:

Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manu factured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free

1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at

HomeLink.com for safety information or assis tance.

B

EFORE

Y

OU

B

EGIN

P

ROGRAMMING

H

OME

L

INK

®

Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming.

For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink® system.

To erase the channels, place the ignition in the

ON/RUN position, and push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to

20 seconds or until the orange indicator flashes.

NOTE:





Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons.

If you have any problems, or require assis tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for infor mation or assistance.


Programming A Rolling Code

For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener.

NOTE:

It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer.

Training The Garage Door Opener

1 — Door Opener

2 — Training Button

1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to

3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the

HomeLink® button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.

3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to program while you push and hold the hand-held transmitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.

5. On the garage door opener (in the garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button.

This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or

“TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.

NOTE:

You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pushed.


6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink® button twice

(holding the button for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete.

NOTE:

If the garage door opener/device does not acti vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training. To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button

(Rolling Code)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps:


2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with

“Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

2



Programming A Non-Rolling Code

For programming garage door openers manufactured before 1995.





3. Press and hold the HomeLink® button you want to program while you press and hold the hand-held transmitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid.

5. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.



If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the

HomeLink® button is pressed.



To program the two remaining

HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.


(Non-Rolling Code)



2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with

“Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step

2 and follow all remaining steps.

C

ANADIAN

/G

ATE

O

PERATOR

P

ROGRAMMING

For programming transmitters in Canada/

United States that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several seconds of transmission.

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this

Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor.





3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink® button, while you press and release

(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has successfully accepted the frequency signal.

The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.

4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door may open and close while you are programming.


5. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.

NOTE:



If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should activate when the

HomeLink® button is pressed.



To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels.

If you unplugged the garage door opener/ device for programming, plug it back in at this time.


(Canadian/Gate Operator)



2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button.

3. Without releasing the button, proceed with

“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all remaining steps.

U

SING

H

OME

L

INK

®

To operate, push and release the programmed

HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

S

ECURITY

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle.

To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the orange indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

T

ROUBLESHOOTING

T

IPS

If you are having trouble programming

HomeLink®, here are some of the most common solutions:



Replace the battery in the garage door opener hand-held transmitter.






Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener to complete the training for a Rolling

Code.

Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free1-800-355-3515 or, on the

Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

WARNING!



Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the trans ceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.



Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufac tured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features.

2



G

ENERAL

I

NFORMATION
















NOTE:


INTERNAL EQUIPMENT

S

TORAGE

Glove Compartment

The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel and features both an upper and lower storage area.

NOTE:

Not all vehicles are equipped with a door over the upper storage area.

Glove Compartment

1 — Upper Glove Compartment Release Button (If

Equipped)

2 — Upper Glove Compartment

3 — Lower Glove Compartment

If equipped with a covered upper glove compartment, push the release button to open.

To open the lower glove compartment, pull the release handle.


Door Storage

Front Door Storage — If Equipped

Storage areas and bottle holders (driver’s side only) are located in the door trim panels.

Front Door Storage

Rear Door Storage — If Equipped

Storage compartments are located in both the driver and passenger rear door trim panels.

Rear Door Storage

Center Storage Compartment — If

Equipped

The center storage compartment is located between the driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment provides an armrest and contains both an upper and lower storage area.

Center Storage Compartment


WARNING!



This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle operation, or a collision. Only use the center seating position when the armrest is fully upright.



In a collision, the latch may open if the total weight of the items stored exceeds about

10 lbs (4.5 kg). These items could be thrown about endangering occupants of the vehicle. Items stored should not exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).

Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to raise the cover. The upper storage area contains a USB power outlet located at the rear of the area that can be used to power small electrical devices, refer to “Electrical Power

Outlets” in this section for further information.

With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle to open the lower storage bin. The lower bin contains a power inverter outlet located in the front portion of the lower bin. There is also a

“fill line” located along the rear inside wall of the lower bin. Contents above the “fill line” may interfere with cupholder placement if equipped with a premium center console.

2


70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE the rear bin to access the coinholder/small storage bin.

With the center console lid open, push the release button at the front of the cupholder bin to slide tray rearward for access to the front lower storage bin. Slide forward to access the rear lower storage bin.

Forward Portion Of Lower Storage Bin

1 — Wireless Charging Pad

2 — Power Inverter

3 — Storage Area

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.

Premium Center Console — If Equipped

The premium center console is equipped with two front storage bins located in front of the center storage compartment. These storage bins may be equipped with tandem doors. Push the front bin to access the cupholders. Or push

Center Console Tandem Doors— If Equipped

1 — Push Front Bin Access

2 — Push Rear Bin Access

Tandem Doors Open Position

1 — Front Bin Open

2 — Rear Bin Open

Push Release Button To Slide Tray

Front Bench Seat Storage — If Equipped

If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat, storage can be found by folding down the center seat back. A console storage area and cupholders are available. With the seatback in the upright position, lifting the seat bottom also reveals a storage location.



Seatback Storage — If Equipped

Located in the back of both the driver and passenger front seats are pockets that can be used for storage.

Front Bench Seat Storage Location

If equipped, there is a storage drawer located in the lower center of the instrument panel. It can be released by pushing the access button above it. The drawer is actuator assisted once the access button is pushed. Pull drawer outward to the fully open position.

Driver’s Side Seatback Storage

Storage Bin (Regular Cab)

The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs the length of the cab.

Storage Bin

Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped

Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat may be equipped with a folding load floor.

WARNING!

Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on the load floor. While driving or in an accident you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration, or sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor may move around with force and strike occupants, resulting in serious or fatal injury.

Storage Drawer Access Button

2



Unfolding The Load Floor/Crew Cab

1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.

3. Lift the front panel until the load floor unfolds into position.

WARNING!

Do not drive with the load floor in the up position. When stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor could move to the down position causing serious injury.

Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position

2. Unfold both the legs using the straps.

Load Floor Legs In Opened Position

Load Floor In Open Position

4. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.

Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access

Under The Seat

1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.

2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the load floor.

3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load floor.

Load Floor Securing Straps/Crew Cab

4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the secured down position before you operate the vehicle.

Below Rear Seat Storage (Crew Cab)

The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the storage compartment.

To open the storage compartments, unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the load floor and lift upward on the fold flat lid.



2

Crew Cab Storage

NOTE:

For more information on storage and the fold flat floor, refer to “Fold Flat Load Floor” in this section.

C

UPHOLDERS

Front Seat Cupholders

For vehicles equipped with a center console, two cupholders are located in front of the console storage bin.

Front Cupholders

NOTE:

If the vehicle is equipped with a premium center console with double (tandem) doors, push the front bin door to access the cupholders.

Vehicles Equipped With 40/20/40 Seats

The cupholders are located on the backside of the center portion of the front seat (20). Fold down the center section of the front seat to gain access to the cupholders.

Front Cupholders With Bench Seat

Rear Cupholders — If Equipped

Some vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders located in the center armrest.

Rear Armrest Cupholder



Some vehicles may be equipped with a rear cupholder that consists of two cup wells for rear passenger convenience.

Rear Cup Wells

E

LECTRICAL

P

OWER

O

UTLETS

The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet can provide power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the standard “cigar lighter” plug.

The 12 Volt power outlets and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp)

USB Port (Charge Only) have a cap attached to the outlet indicating “12V DC,” together with either a key symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol.

A key symbol indicates that the ignition must be in the ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide power. The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is connected to the battery, and can provide power at all times.

CAUTION!



Do not exceed the maximum power of

160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the

160 Watts (13 Amps) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced.



Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

An auxiliary power outlet can be found in the tray on top of the center stack. This power outlet works when the ignition is in the ON/RUN, ACC, or OFF position.

Power Outlet — Top Of Center Stack

Power Outlet Fuse Locations:





F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow UCI Port/ USB Rear

Center Console

F90 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel

Power Outlet Battery Fed (If Equipped)





F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel

Power Outlet Ignition Fed (If Equipped)

F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter/ Instru ment Panel Power Outlet (If Equipped)

When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug any equipment as to not drain the battery of the vehicle. All accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge.



WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:



Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.



Do not touch with wet hands.



Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle.



If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!



Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).

Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.



Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the battery even more quickly.

Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

(Continued)



After the use of high power draw accesso ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's battery.

P

OWER

I

NVERTER

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

If equipped, a 115 Volt (400 Watts Maximum) inverter may be located inside the center console towards the right hand side, just under the Wireless Charging Pad (if equipped). This inverter can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 400 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.

Center Console Power Inverter Outlet

There is also a second 115 Volt (400 Watts

Maximum) power inverter located on the rear of the center console. This inverter can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 400 Watts.

Certain high-end video game consoles exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.

All power inverters are designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of

400 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter shuts down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should reset.

2



WARNING!

(Continued)



Close the lid when not in use.



If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

W

IRELESS

C

HARGING

P

AD

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

Rear Center Console Power Inverter Outlet

NOTE:

400 Watts is the maximum for the inverter, not each outlet. If three outlets are in use, 400 Watts is shared amongst the devices plugged in.

If equipped, there may be a 115 Volt (400 Watts

Maximum) inverter located to the right of the center stack, just below the climate controls.

This inverter can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 400 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.

Center Stack Power Inverter

To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device. The outlet turns off when the device is unplugged.

NOTE:



The Power Inverter only turns on if the igni tion is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.



Due to a built-in overload protection, the power inverter shuts down if the power rating is exceeded.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:



Do not insert any objects into the recepta cles.



Do not touch with wet hands.

(Continued)

Wireless Charging Pad

Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15W 3A Qi wireless charging pad located inside of the center console. This charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge your Qi enabled mobile phone.

Qi is a standard that uses magnetic induction to transfer power to your mobile device.

Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless charging. If the phone is not equipped

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77 with Qi wireless charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a specialized back plate can be purchased from your mobile phone provider or a local electronics retailer. Please see your phone’s owner’s manual for further information.

The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip mat, an adjustable cradle to hold your mobile phone in place and an LED indicator light.

CAUTION!

The key fob should not be placed on the charging pad or within 15 cm (150 mm) of it.

Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob. Placing the fob in close proximity of the charging pad blocks the fob from being detected by the vehicle and prevents the vehicle from starting.


O

VERHEAD

S

UNGLASS

S

TORAGE

At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is provided for the storage of one pair of sunglasses.

From the closed position, push the door latch to open the compartment.

2

Overhead Sunglass Door

The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.


78

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE

Base / Midline Instrument Cluster — Gasoline


B

ASE

/ M

IDLINE

I

NSTRUMENT

C

LUSTER

D

ESCRIPTIONS

1. Tachometer



Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000).

2. Voltmeter



When the vehicle is in the RUN state, the gauge indicates the electrical system voltage. The pointer should stay within the normal range if the battery is charged. If the pointer moves to either extreme left or right and remains there during normal driving, the electrical system should be serviced.

3. Instrument Cluster Display



When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows the instrument cluster display messages. Refer to “Instrument

Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for further information.

4. Oil Pressure Gauge



The pointer should always indicate the oil pressure when the engine is running. A continuous high or low reading under normal driving conditions may indicate a lubrication system malfunction. Imme diate service should be obtained from an authorized dealer.

5. Speedometer



Indicates vehicle speed.

6. Temperature Gauge





The gauge pointer shows engine coolant temperature. The pointer positioned within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.

You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Servicing And

Maintenance.” Follow the warnings under the

Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.

7. Fuel Gauge



The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/

RUN position.



The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.

Refer to “Refueling The Vehicle — Gas

Engine” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

3


80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE

Premium Instrument Cluster — Gasoline


P

REMIUM

I

NSTRUMENT

C

LUSTER

D

ESCRIPTIONS

1. Tachometer









Instrument Panel” for further informa tion.

3. Speedometer




4. Temperature Gauge



The gauge pointer shows engine coolant temperature. The pointer positioned within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.



The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

WARNING!


You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Servicing And

Maintenance.” Follow the warnings under the

Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.


5. Fuel Gauge



The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/

RUN position.



The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel door is located.

Refer to “Refueling The Vehicle — Gas


3

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.



BASE / MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL

D

IESEL

I

NSTRUMENT

C

LUSTER

1. Tachometer




Base / Midline Diesel Instrument Cluster — Diesel

2. Engine Coolant Temperature



This gauge shows the engine coolant temperature. The gauge pointer will likely show higher temperatures when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or in heavy stop and go traffic. If the red

Warning Light turns on while driving, safely bring the vehicle to a stop, and turn off the engine. DO NOT operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.


WARNING!


You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads greater “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “h,” turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.







4. Oil Pressure Gauge



The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure when the engine is running.

A continuous high or low reading under normal driving conditions may indicate a lubrication system malfunction. Imme diate service should be obtained from an authorized dealer.

5. Speedometer




6. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge



The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is required to maintain normal vehicle operation and emissions compliance. If something is wrong with the gauge, a DEF Warning

Message or Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) will be displayed. More information is available in the instrument cluster display section under the heading of

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning

Messages.


7. Fuel Gauge



The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.



The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel filler door is located.

Refer to “Refueling The Vehicle — Diesel


NOTE:





The gauge may take up to five seconds to update after adding a gallon or more of

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) to the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to the DEF system, the gauge may not update to the new level.

See an authorized dealer for service.

The DEF gauge may also not immediately update after a refill if the temperature of the

DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid and allow the gauge to update after a period of run time. Under very cold conditions, it is possible that the gauge may not reflect the new fill level for several drives.

3



PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL

D

IESEL

I

NSTRUMENT

C

LUSTER

1. Tachometer




Premium Instrument Cluster — Diesel








3. Speedometer




4. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge



The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of Diesel Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank.

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is required to maintain normal vehicle operation and emissions compliance. If something is wrong with the gauge, a DEF Warning

Message or Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) will be displayed. More information is available in the instrument cluster display section under the heading of


Messages.

5. Fuel Gauge



The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.



The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the vehicle where the fuel filler door is located.

Refer to “Refueling The Vehicle — Diesel


NOTE:



The DEF tank on these vehicles is designed with a large amount of full reserve. So the level sensor will indicate a full reading even before the tank is completely full. To put it another way, there’s additional storage capacity in the tank above the Full mark that’s not represented in the gauge. You may not see any movement in the reading – even after driving up to 200 miles (321 kilome ters) in some cases.





The gauge may take up to five seconds to update after adding a gallon or more of




DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid and allow the gauge to update after a period of run time. Under very cold conditions, it is possible that the gauge may not reflect the new fill level for several drives.


INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument cluster display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in the

OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed to display important information about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver interactive display located on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can show you how systems are working and give you warnings when they are not. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through the main menus and submenus. You can access the specific information you want and make selections and adjustments.

I

NSTRUMENT

C

LUSTER

D

ISPLAY

C

ONTROLS

The instrument cluster display features a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.

3



Base Instrument Cluster Display

1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls

2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen

The instrument cluster display menu items may consist of the following:





Speedometer

Vehicle Info













Driver Assist — If Equipped

Fuel Economy

Trip Info

Trailer Tow

Audio

Messages





Screen Set Up

Vehicle Settings — If Equipped



Commercial Settings — If Equipped

The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following instrument cluster display control buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel:

Premium Instrument Cluster Display

1 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls

2 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen







Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons

Up Arrow Button

Push and release the up arrow button to scroll upward through the main menu items, submenu screen, and vehicle settings.

Down Arrow Button

Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu items, submenu screen, and vehicle settings.

Right Arrow Button

Push and release the right arrow button to access/select the infor mation screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push


 and hold the right arrow button for two seconds to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.

Left Arrow Button

Push and release the left arrow button to access/select the infor mation screens, submenu screens of a main menu item, or to return to the main menu.

O

IL

L

IFE

R

ESET

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change

Required” message will display in the instrument cluster display after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style.

NOTE:

Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display controls for the following procedure.

Oil Life Reset Procedure

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the

ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu to

“Vehicle Info.”

3. Push and release the right arrow button to access the ”Vehicle Info” screen, then scroll up or down to select “Oil Life.”

4. Push and hold the right arrow button to select “Reset”.

5. Push and release the down arrow button to select “Yes,” then push and release the right arrow button to reset the Oil Life to

100%.

6. Push and release the up arrow button to exit the instrument cluster display screen.

Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life

1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the

ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).


2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times within ten seconds.

3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the

ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.

NOTE:

If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

D

ISPLAY

M

ENU

I

TEMS

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the desired selectable menu icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display.

Speedometer

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the speedometer menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to cycle the display between mph and km/h.

3



Vehicle Info

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Vehicle Info menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to enter the submenus items of Vehicle Info. Follow the directional prompts to access or reset any of the following Vehicle Info submenu items:





Tire Pressure

Coolant Temperature























Transmission Temperature — If Equipped

Oil Temperature

Oil Pressure

Exhaust Brake — If Equipped

Boost Pressure — If Equipped

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) — If Equipped

Oil Life

Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped

Battery Voltage

Gauge Summary

Engine Hours

Driver Assist — If Equipped

The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the ACC system.

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Driver Assist menu is displayed in the instrument cluster display.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature

The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC system settings. The information displayed depends on ACC system status.

Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following displays in the instrument cluster display:

Adaptive Cruise Control Off

When ACC is deactivated, the display will read

“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Ready

When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”

Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering wheel) and the following will display in the instrument cluster display:

ACC SET

When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the instrument cluster.

The ACC screen may display once again if any

ACC activity occurs, which may include any of the following:







Distance Setting Change

System Cancel

Driver Override







System Off

ACC Proximity Warning

ACC Unavailable Warning

For further information, refer to “Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting

And Operating.”

LaneSense — If Equipped

The instrument cluster display displays the current LaneSense system settings. The information displayed depends on LaneSense system status and the conditions that need to be met. For further information, refer to “LaneSense

— If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”

Fuel Economy

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Fuel Economy menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and Hold the right arrow button to reset Average Fuel

Economy.










Current Fuel Economy Gauge

Average Fuel Economy Value

Range To Empty

Fuel Tank Levels — If Equipped

Trip A/Trip B

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to enter the submenus of

Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip B information will display the following:







Distance

Average Fuel Economy

Elapsed Time

Push and hold right arrow button to reset all information.

Trailer Tow

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trailer Tow menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button and the next screen will display the following trailer trip information:



Trip Distance (trailer specific): Push and hold the right arrow button to reset the distance.



Trailer Brake



Output



Type



Gain



Trailer Tire Pressure — If Equipped

Audio

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. This menu will display the audio source information, including the Song name, Artist name, and audio source with an accompanying graphic.

Phone Call Status

When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status pop-up will display on the screen. The pop-up will remain until the phone is answered or ignored.

NOTE:

The call status will temporarily replace the previous media source information displayed on the screen. When the pop-up is no longer displayed, the display will return to the last used screen.


Stored Messages

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Messages Menu item is highlighted.

This feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Push and release the right or left arrow buttons to cycle through stored messages.

Screen Setup Menu Item

Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Screen Setup menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to enter the

Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed.

Current Gear — If Equipped





Off (Default Setting)

On

Odometer





Unit Without Decimal (Default Setting)

Unit With Decimal

3



Favorite Menu





Speedometer

Vehicle Info











Driver Assist (Show/Hide) — If Equipped

Fuel Economy (Show/Hide)

Trip Info (Show/Hide)

Trailer Tow (Show/Hide)

Audio (Show/Hide)









Messages

Screen Setup

Vehicle Settings — If Equipped


NOTE:

Menus with (Show/Hide) can push the right arrow button to choose whether to show or hide this menu in the instrument cluster display.

Upper Left — If Equipped















None

Compass (Default Setting) — If Equipped

Outside Temp — If Equipped

Time

Range To Empty

Average Econ

Current Econ

























Trip A Distance

Trip B Distance

Trailer Trip — If Equipped

Trailer Brake — If Equipped

Oil Pressure — If Equipped

Coolant Temperature — If Equipped

Oil Temperature — If Equipped

Battery Voltage — If Equipped


Oil Life — If Equipped


Turbo Boost — If Equipped




Center





None

Compass

















Outside Temp

Time

Range To Empty

Average Econ

Current Econ

Trip A Distance

Trip B Distance






Audio





Speedometer (Default Setting)

Menu Title

Upper Right

None

















Compass — If Equipped

Outside Temp (Default Setting)

Time

Range To Empty

Average Econ

Current Econ

Trip A Distance

Trip B Distance

























Oil Pressure — If Equipped

Coolant Temperature — If Equipped

Oil Temperature — If Equipped

Battery Voltage — If Equipped


Oil Life — If Equipped





Left Side — If Equipped





None

Range











Average Econ

Menu Icon (Default Setting)

Coolant Temperature

Oil Temperature

Transmission Temperature





Oil Life


Right Side — If Equipped



None













Range (Default Setting)

Average Econ

Menu Icon

Coolant Temperature

Oil Temperature






Oil Life


Lower Left — If Equipped



None





Compass

Outside Temp





























Time

Range To Empty

Average Econ

Current Econ

Trip A Distance

Trip B Distance

Trailer Trip

Trailer Brake

Oil Pressure

Coolant Temperature

Oil Temperature

Battery Voltage (Default Setting)


Oil Life
















Lower Right — If Equipped



None





Compass

Outside Temp

Time

Range To Empty

Average Econ


























Current Econ

Trip A Distance

Trip B Distance

Trailer Trip

Trailer Brake

Oil Pressure (Default Setting)

Coolant Temperature

Oil Temperature

Battery Voltage


Oil Life










Restore Defaults



Cancel (Default Setting)

Right Arrow button

Settings — If Equipped

Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in

PARK.

Push and release the up and down button until

Settings displays in the instrument cluster display.

3



Follow the prompts to display and set any of the following Vehicle Settings.

NOTE:

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following settings.





If equipped with a base radio (Non-Touchscreen) Vehicle Settings will be included in the instrument cluster display.

If equipped with a Touchscreen radio, the Vehicle Settings will be included in the radio head unit.

Setting Names

Language Select

Units

Setting Names Abbreviated

(Left Submenu Layer)

Language

Units

Submenus (Right Submenu Layer)

ParkSense

Tilt Mirror in Reverse

Rain Sensing Wipers

Hill Start Assist

Headlights Off Delay

Illuminated Approach

Headlights On with Wipers

Automatic High Beams

Daytime Running Lights

Flash Lights with Lock

Auto Lock Doors

Auto Unlock Doors

ParkSense

Tilt Mirror in R

Auto Wipers

Hill Start Assist

Lights Off Delay

Lights w/ Unlock

Lights w/ Wipers

Auto High Beams

Daytime Lights

Lights w/ Lock

Auto Lock Doors

Auto Unlock Doors

English, Spanish, French, Italian, German, Dutch, Arabic

U.S.; Metric





Front Volume — Low; Medium; High

Rear Volume — Low; Medium; High

On; Off

On; Off

On; Off

0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds

0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds

On; Off

On; Off

On; Off

On; Off

On; Off

On; Off



Setting Names



Sound Horn with Remote Start Horn w/ Rmt Start

Sound Horn with Remote Lock Horn w/ Rmt Lock

Remote Unlock Sequence Remote Unlock

Key Fob Linked to Memory

Passive Entry

Remote Start Comfort System

Easy Exit Seat

Key-off Power Delay

Key in Memory

Passive Entry

Rmt Start Comfort

Easy Exit Seat

Power Off Delay

Commercial Settings

Trailer Select

Brake Type

Commercial

Trailer Select

Brake Type


On; Off

Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press

Driver Door; All Doors

On; Off

On; Off

Off; Remote Start; All starts

On; Off

Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes; 10 minutes





Aux Switches

Power Take-Off



PIN Setup

NOTE:

If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not known, see an authorized dealer to have the PIN reset.

Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3; Trailer 4

Light Electric; Heavy Electric; Light EOH; Heavy EOH

3



Setting Names

Trailer Name

Compass Variance

Calibrate Compass

Fuel Saver Display



Trailer Name

Compass Var

Compass Cal

Fuel Saver
































Trailer # (# is equal to slot position)

Boat

Car

Cargo

Dump

Equipment

Flatbed

Gooseneck

Horse

Livestock

Motorcycle

Snowmobile

Travel

Utility

5th Wheel

1-15 increments of 1

Cancel; Calibrate

On; Off



Commercial Settings allows the driver to set and recall additional features when the transmission is in PARK.

Push and release the up and down button until

Commercial Settings displays in the instrument cluster display.

Follow the prompts to enter the required PIN and enter the Commercial Settings submenu.

NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen radio, “Commercial Settings” will replace

“Vehicle Settings” in the instrument cluster display. The Commercial Settings menu will only include the settings below. For information on vehicle settings in vehicles equipped with touchscreen radios, refer to “Uconnect

Settings” in “Multimedia”.

Commercial Settings allows you to access the following features (if equipped):









Power Take Off (PTO)

Remote Ignition

Idle Control

Backup Alarm







ParkSense

Aux Switches

PIN Setup

NOTE:

If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not known, see an authorized dealer to have the PIN reset.

D

IESEL

M

ESSAGES

A

ND

W

ARNINGS

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages

The Cummins diesel engine meets all diesel emissions standards, resulting in one of the lowest emitting diesel engines ever produced.

To achieve these emissions standards, your vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine and exhaust system. These systems are seamlessly integrated into your vehicle and managed by the Powertrain Control Module

(PCM). The PCM manages engine combustion to allow the exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with no input or interaction on your part.


WARNING!

A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.

Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to additional maintenance required on your vehicle or engine. The following messages may display in your instrument cluster display:



Perform Service — Your vehicle will require emissions maintenance at a set interval. To help remind you when this maintenance is due, the instrument cluster display will display “Perform Service”. When the

“Perform Service” message is displayed in the instrument cluster display it is necessary to have the emissions maintenance performed. Emissions maintenance may include replacing the Closed Crankcase

Ventilation (CCV) filter element. The proce dure for clearing and resetting the "Perform

Service" indicator message is located in the appropriate Service Information.

3







Exhaust System — Regeneration Required

Now — "Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at

Highway Speeds to Remedy" will be displayed in the instrument cluster display if the exhaust particulate filter reaches 80% of its maximum storage capacity. Under conditions of exclusive short duration and low speed driving cycles, your Cummins diesel engine and exhaust after-treatment system may never reach the conditions required to remove the trapped PM. If this occurs, the

“Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at

Highway Speeds to Remedy” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster display. If this message is displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in alerting you of this condi tion

By simply driving your vehicle at highway speeds for as little as 45 minutes, you can remedy the condition in the particulate filter system and allow your Cummins diesel engine and exhaust after-treatment system to remove the trapped PM and restore the system to normal operating condition.

Exhaust System — Regeneration In Process

Exhaust Filter XX% Full — Indicates that the

Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) is self-cleaning.





Maintain your current driving condition until regeneration is completed.

Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed

— This message indicates that the Diesel

Particulate Filter (DPF) self-cleaning is completed. If this message is displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in alerting you of this condition.

Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now

— This message indicates regeneration has been disabled due to a system malfunction.

At this point the engine Powertrain Control

Module (PCM) will register a fault code, the instrument panel will display a MIL light.

CAUTION!

See an authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust system could occur soon with continued operation.



Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See

Dealer — This message indicates the PCM has derated the engine to limit the likelihood of permanent damage to the after-treatment system. If this condition is not corrected and a dealer service is not performed, extensive exhaust after-treatment damage can occur.

To correct this condition it will be necessary to have your vehicle serviced by an autho rized dealer.

NOTE:

Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing your oil and resetting the oil change indicator by 0 miles remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust filter from performing it's cleaning routine. This will shortly result in a

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) and reduced engine power. Only an authorized dealer will be able to correct this condition.

CAUTION!

See an authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust system could occur soon with continued operation.

Cold Ambient Derate Mode Messages

The vehicle will display messages when a derate (engine power reduction) is activated to protect the engine during start up in cold ambient temperatures.










Engine Power Reduced During Warm-Up —

This message will display during start up when the ambient temperature is between

10°F (-12°C) and -10°F (-23°C).

Engine Power Reduced Up To 30 Sec

(Seconds) During Warm-Up — This message will display during start up when the ambient temperature is between -10°F (-23°C) and

-25°F (-32°C).

Engine Power Reduced Up To 2 Min

(Minutes) During Warm-Up — This message will display during start up when the ambient temperature is -25°F (-32°C) and below.

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine warm up protection feature that may limit engine performance after cold starting at low ambient temperatures. The length of time engine speed is limited is dependent upon engine coolant temperature. Engine speed may be briefly limited to 1,000 RPM after starting with coolant temperature below freezing conditions, and may be limited to

1,000 RPM for up to approximately two minutes under more severe cold conditions.

Coolant Low — This telltale will turn on to indi cate the vehicle coolant level is low. Refer to

“Dealer Service” in “Servicing And Mainte nance” for more information.


Messages

There are four different messages which are displayed if the vehicle detects that the DEF system has been filled with a fluid other than

DEF, has experienced component failures, or when tampering has been detected. The vehicle may be limited to a maximum speed of 5 mph

(8 km/H) if the DEF system is not serviced within less than 200 miles (322 km) of the fault being detected.

When the DEF system needs to be serviced the following warnings will display:





DEF Low Refill Soon — This message will display when the low level is reached, during vehicle start up, and with increased frequency during vehicle operation. It will be accompanied by a single chime. Approxi mately 5 gallons (19 Liters) of DEF is required to refill the tank when this message is initially displayed on pickup applications, and approximately 7 gallons (26 Liters) are required on chassis-cab applications.

Speed Limited to 5 MPH in XXX mi Refill DEF

— This message will continuously display if the “DEF Low Refill Soon” message is ignored, and the frequency of occurrence of


 the chime will increase unless up to 2 gallons

(7.5 Liters) of DEF is added to the tank.

5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or

Refuel Refill DEF — This message will contin uously display when the counter reaches zero, and will be accompanied by a periodic chime.

The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum speed of 5 mph upon the first of the following conditions to occur:



If the vehicle is shutoff and restarted.



If the vehicle is idled for an extended period of time, approximately one hour or greater.



If the system detects that the level of fuel in the tank has increased.

Add a minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) of DEF to the tank in order to avoid vehicle operation at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/H).

NOTE:

A minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) may be required to restore normal vehicle operation.

Although the vehicle will start normally and can be placed in gear after this message has been

3


98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL initially displayed, extreme caution should be utilized since the vehicle will only be capable of maneuvering at a maximum speed of 5 mph

(8 km/H).

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault Warning

Messages

There are five different messages which are displayed if the vehicle detects that the DEF system has been filled with a fluid other than

DEF, has experienced component failures, or when tampering has been detected. The vehicle may be limited to a maximum speed of 5 mph

(8 km/H) if the DEF system is not serviced within less than 200 miles (322 km) of the fault being detected.

When the DEF system needs to be serviced the following warnings will display:



Service DEF System See Dealer — This message will display when the fault is initially detected, each time the vehicle is started, and periodically during driving. The message will be accompanied by a single chime. We recommend you drive to the nearest autho rized dealer and have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.



5 MPH Max Speed in 150 mi Service DEF

System See Dealer — This message will display if the DEF system has not been serviced after the “Service DEF System – See

Dealer” message is displayed. This message will continuously display until the mileage counter reaches zero, and will be accompa nied by a periodic chime. The message will continue to countdown until it reaches zero unless the vehicle is serviced. We recom mend you drive to your nearest authorized dealer and have your vehicle serviced imme diately.

NOTE:

Under some circumstances this mileage counter may start with a value of less than

150 miles (241 km). For example, if recurring faults are detected in a time interval of less than 40 hours, the counter may restart at the value where it stopped when a previous fault was temporarily remedied, or at a minimum of

50 miles (80 km).



5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or

Refuel Service DEF See Dealer — This message will continuously display when the mileage counter reaches zero, and will be accompanied by a periodic chime.

The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum speed of 5 mph upon the first of the following conditions to occur:



If the vehicle is shutoff and restarted.



If the vehicle is idled for an extended period of time, approximately one hour or greater.



If the system detects that the level of fuel in the tank has increased.



5 MPH Max Speed Service DEF System See

Dealer — This message will continuously display, and will be accompanied by a peri odic chime. Although the vehicle can be started and placed in gear, the vehicle will only operate at a maximum speed of 5 mph.

Your vehicle will require towing, see an authorized dealer for service.

NOTE:

When this message is displayed, the engine can still be started. However, the vehicle will only operate at a maximum speed of 5 mph.



Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer — This message will display when the fault is initially detected, each time the vehicle is started, and periodically during driving. The message will be accompanied by a single chime. We

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99 recommend you drive to the nearest autho rized dealer and have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

RAM Active Air System

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Ram

Active Air system that provides enhanced performance, especially when towing under demanding hot or high altitude conditions. If the instrument cluster display displays the message “Active Airbox Service Required See

Dealer”, vehicle performance may be reduced until service is performed by an authorized RAM dealer.

B

ATTERY

S

AVER

O

N

/B

ATTERY

S

AVER

M

ODE

M

ESSAGE

— E

LECTRICAL

L

OAD

R

EDUCTION

A

CTIONS

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent

Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical system and status of the vehicle battery.

In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.

Load reduction is only active when the engine is running. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current drive cycle.

When load reduction is activated, the message

“Battery Saver On Some Systems May Have

Reduced Power” will appear in the instrument cluster.

These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.

NOTE:





The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the charging system continuously.

If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery Charge Warning

Light” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be affected by load reduction:



Heated Seats/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel










Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors

HVAC System

115 Volt AC Power Inverter System

Audio and Telematics System

Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the following conditions:



The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads are larger than the capability of charging system. The charging system is still functioning properly.





Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, overloaded power outlets

+12 Volts, 115 Volt AC, USB ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).

Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices.







Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long parking periods).

The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time (weeks, months).

The battery was recently replaced and was not charged completely.

3







The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on when the vehicle was parked.

The battery was used for an extended period with the engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appli ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and similar devices.

What to do when an electrical load reduction action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode”)

During a trip:



Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:









Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte rior).

Check what may be pbv lugged in to power outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volt AC,

USB ports.

Check HVAC settings (blower, tempera ture).

Check the audio settings (volume).

After a trip:



Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and Ignition

Off Draw currents).





Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time and parking time).

The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecu tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not help to identify the cause.

WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES

The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.

R

ED

W

ARNING

L

IGHTS

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

This warning light indicates when the driver or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/

RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the

Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound.

Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in

“Safety” for further information.

Air Bag Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.

If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Brake Warning Light

This warning light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101 indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake

Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock

Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the

Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE:

The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic

Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the

OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101 detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the

ON/RUN position.

NOTE:

This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

Hood Open Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate when the hood is ajar/open and not fully closed.

NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.

Vehicle Security Warning Light — If

Equipped

This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.

3



Engine Coolant Temperature Warning

Light

This warning light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too high, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to cool, whichever comes first.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning

(A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle.

If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.

Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case

Of Emergency” for further information.

Battery Charge Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component.

Oil Pressure Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

Oil Temperature Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate the engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to return to normal levels.

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning

Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a problem with the Electronic

Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

NOTE:

This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals are pressed at the same time.

If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or

ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.


Electric Power Steering Fault Warning

Light

This warning light will turn on when there's a fault with the Electric Power

Steering (EPS) system. Refer to

“Power Steering” in “Starting And

Operating” for further information.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible.

Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate when the Trailer Brake has been disconnected.

Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting

And Operating” for further information.

Transmission Temperature Warning Light

— If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate to warn of a high transmission fluid temperature. This may occur with strenuous usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to drive normally.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire.

CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission

Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

Door Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.

NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.


Y

ELLOW

W

ARNING

L

IGHTS

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault

Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the ACC system.

Contact a local authorized dealer for service.

For further information, refer to “Adaptive

Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And

Operating.”

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator

Warning Light (MIL)

The Engine Check/Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an

Onboard Diagnostic System called

OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. This warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving

3


104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.

When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this occurs.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as refer enced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occu pants or others.

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica tor Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active


This warning light will indicate when the Electronic Stability Control system is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or

ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.







The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC

Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or

ACC/ON/RUN position.

The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.

This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF


This warning light indicates the

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or

ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously.

Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If

Equipped

This warning light will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.

Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Servicing

And Maintenance” for further information.

Low Fuel Warning Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.2 gal (12 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added.

A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel

Warning.


Low Coolant Level Warning Light

This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant level is low.

Refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And

Maintenance” for further information.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If

Equipped

This warning light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see an authorized dealer.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)


The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire.

CAUTION!

Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105 under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the

3



TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle.

Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your sensor function checked.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning

Light

This warning light monitors the

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required as soon as possible. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning

Light is not also on.

If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/

RUN position, have the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.

Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the Forward

Collision Warning System. Contact an authorized dealer for service.

Refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW)" in

"Safety" for further information.

Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.

Speed Control Fault Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate the Speed Control System is not functioning properly and service is required. Contact an authorized dealer.

Y

ELLOW

I

NDICATOR

L

IGHTS

Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator


This indicator light illuminates to indicate that Forward Collision

Warning is off.

Refer to “Auxiliary Driving Systems” in “Safety” for further information.

TOW/HAUL Indicator Light

This indicator light will illuminate when TOW/HAUL mode is selected.

Refer to “Automatic Transmission” in

“Starting And Operating” for further information.


Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light — If

Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate to indicate when Trailer Merge Assist has been activated.

Cargo Light — If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the cargo light is activated by pushing the cargo light button on the headlight switch.

Snowplow Mode Indicator Light — If

Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when Snowplow Mode has been activated.

Refer to “Snowplow” in “Starting And


4WD Lock Indicator Light

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOCK mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.

Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in

“Starting And Operating” for further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.

4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels.

Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If

Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.

4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive HIGH mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.


NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the

4WD power transfer case is in the

NEUTRAL mode and the front and rear driveshafts are disengaged from the powertrain.

Cold Ambient Derate Mode Indicator Light

— If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when a derate (engine power reduction) is activated for protection of the turbocharger in cold ambient temperatures.

For further information, refer to “Instrument


Instrument Panel”.

Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light — If

Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the Diesel Exhaust Brake has been activated, and is in full strength mode.

Refer to “Diesel Exhaust Brake (Engine

Braking)” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

3



Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator


The Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)

Indicator will illuminate if the vehicle is low on Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF).

Refer to “Starting And Operating” for further information.

Wait To Start Light — If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate for approximately two seconds when the ignition is turned to the RUN position.

Its duration may be longer based on colder operating conditions. Vehicle will not initiate start until telltale is no longer displayed.

Refer to “Starting The Engine” in “Starting And


NOTE:

The “Wait To Start” telltale may not illuminate if the intake manifold temperature is warm enough.

Water In Fuel Indicator Light — If Equipped

The “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” will illuminate when there is water detected in the fuel filter. If this light remains on, DO NOT start the vehicle before you drain the water from the fuel filter to prevent engine damage.

Refer to the “Draining Fuel/Water Separator

Filter” section in “Dealer Service” in “Servicing


G

REEN

I

NDICATOR

L

IGHTS

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With

Target Light — If Equipped

This will display when the ACC is set and a target vehicle is detected.

Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If

Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No

Target Detected Indicator Light — If

Equipped

This light will turn on when the

Adaptive Cruise Control is SET and there is no target vehicle detected.

Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If

Equipped" in "Starting And Operating" for further information.

ECO Mode Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light will turn on when ECO Mode is active.

Park/Headlight On Indicator Light

This indicator light will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting To Know

Your Vehicle” for further information.

Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

Refer to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting To Know


Turn Signal Indicator Lights

When the left or right turn signal is activated, the turn signal indicator will flash independently and the corresponding exterior turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the multifunction lever is moved down

(left) or up (right).


NOTE:





A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.

Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.



If equipped with fog lamps, the fog lamp on the side of the activated turn signal will also illuminate to provide additional light when turning.

Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If

Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed

Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

Automatic Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator


This indicator light will illuminate when the Diesel Exhaust Brake has been activated, and has switched to

Automatic mode.

Refer to “Diesel Exhaust Brake (Engine

Braking)” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

W

HITE

I

NDICATOR

L

IGHTS

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light

— If Equipped

This light will illuminate when the vehicle equipped with Adaptive Cruise

Control (ACC) has been turned on but not set.

Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If

Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

Cruise Control Ready Indicator

This indicator light will illuminate when the cruise control is ready, but not set. Refer to “Speed Control” in


Set Speed Display

The Set Speed Display indicator light indicates the set speed for the Speed

Control and Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) settings.


B

LUE

I

NDICATOR

L

IGHTS

High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the high beam headlights are on. With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated

Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

3



If any of these systems require service, the OBD

II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!



Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed.



If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system.

WARNING!



ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your vehicle.



If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, it may:



Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an acci dent involving serious injury or death.



Access, or allow others to access, infor mation stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information.

O

NBOARD

D

IAGNOSTIC

S

YSTEM

(OBD II) C

YBERSECURITY

Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard

Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls.

For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Multimedia”.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the

OBD II system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The

OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the

I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.


Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.

NOTE:

If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:



The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's

OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.



The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's

OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.


If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the

I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.

3


112

SAFETY FEATURES

A

NTI

-L

OCK

B

RAKE

S

YSTEM

(ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions.

The system automatically prevents wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.

The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.

ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one or more wheels begin to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).

You also may experience the following when

ABS activates:





The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop)

The clicking sound of solenoid valves

SAFETY





Brake pedal pulsations

A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.



WARNING!

The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to inter ference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment.

This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.



Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)



The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.



The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.



The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

ABS is designed to function with the Original

Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires.

Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.


Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light

The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/

RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required.

However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock

Brake Warning Light” is on.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.

E

LECTRONIC

B

RAKE

C

ONTROL

(EBC)

S

YSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced

Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start

Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS),

SAFETY 113

Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic

Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.

Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer

Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control

(HDC).

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock

Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).

Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

Brake System Warning Light

The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the “Brake

System Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as soon as possible.

4


114 SAFETY

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) manages the distribution of the braking torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.

NOTE:

ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off” mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability

Control (ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehi cles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.

When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.





Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel posi tion.

Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel posi tion.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction

Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction

Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.


WARNING!



Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)



Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

ESC Operating Modes

NOTE:

Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.

SAFETY 115

ESC On

This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.

Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.

Partial Off

The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.

To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the “ESC OFF” switch and the “ESC OFF

Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC OFF” switch and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will turn off.

NOTE:

For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple momentary button pushes may be required to return to “ESC On”.

4


116 SAFETY

WARNING!



When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func tionality of ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator

Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial

Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the

ESC system is reduced.



Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.

Full Off — If Equipped

This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used on any public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC OFF” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC OFF” switch.

NOTE:

System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to

“Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.

ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes (if equipped.)

WARNING!



In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full

Off” mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.



The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light

And ESC OFF Indicator Light

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction

Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON mode. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.


Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.


NOTE:




Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is turned on.





Each time the ignition is turned on, the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off previously.

The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation.

The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) in a reduced mode.

Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped

Hill Descent Control (HDC) is intended for low speed off road driving while in 4L Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.

HDC Has Three States:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate)

2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application)

3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed)

Enabling HDC

HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:



Driveline is in 4L Range







Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)

Parking brake is released

Driver door is closed

Activating HDC

Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the HDC set speeds:

HDC Target Set Speeds





P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not activate.

R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

SAFETY 117























N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)

D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)

3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)

4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)

5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)

6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)

7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)

8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)

9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped

NOTE:

During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC target speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission. When actively controlling HDC the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions.

Driver Override

The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or brake application at any time.

4


118 SAFETY

Deactivating HDC

HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur:









Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake application.

Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).

Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.

Vehicle is shifted to PARK.

Disabling HDC

HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the following conditions occur:





The driver pushes the HDC switch.

The driveline is shifted out of 4L Range.











The parking brake is applied.

The driver door opens.

The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph

(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.

The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph

(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).

HDC detects excessive brake temperature.

Feedback To The Driver

The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the

HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.



The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi nate and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is the normal oper ating condition for HDC.







The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.

The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to excess speed.

The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have cooled sufficiently.

WARNING!

HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal.

The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate:





The feature must be enabled.

The vehicle must be stopped.











The parking brake must be off.

The driver door must be closed.

The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.

The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in

REVERSE gear).

HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manual transmis sion, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.


WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill Start

Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury.

Towing With HSA

HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while towing a trailer.

WARNING!



If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough brake pres sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released.

In order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually acti vate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.



HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans mission in PARK.



Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury.

SAFETY 119

Disabling And Enabling HSA

This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows:



If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.



If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

For vehicles not equipped with an instrument cluster display, perform the following steps:

1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing straight forward).

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Start the engine.

5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half turn to the left.

6. Push the “ESC OFF” switch located in the lower switch bank below the climate control four times within 20 seconds. The “ESC OFF

Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off two times.

4


120 SAFETY

7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right.

8. Place the ignition to the OFF mode and then back to ON. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.

9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

Traction Control System (TCS)

The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine power to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if

TCS and Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in a reduced mode.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.

NOTE:

TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.

Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And


When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial

Off” or “Full Off” modes.

WARNING!

If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS

F

ORWARD

C

OLLISION

W

ARNING

(FCW)

W

ITH

M

ITIGATION

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with Mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.

NOTE:

FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake

Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is probable, the driver will be provided with audible and visual warn ings as well as a possible brake jerk warning.

If the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn ings by braking and the system determines that

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121 the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will compensate and provide additional brake force as required.

If an FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide the maximum braking possible to mitigate the potential forward collision. If the

Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release the brakes.

FCW Message

When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated.

NOTE:



The minimum speed for FCW activation is

3 mph (5 km/h).







The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the course prediction.

This is expected and is a part of normal FCW activation and functionality.

It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such misuse of the system, after four

Active Braking events within a key cycle, the

Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti vated until the next key cycle.

The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.

WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every type of potential collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.

SAFETY 121

Turning FCW On or Off

The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display in the control settings. Refer to


NOTE:











When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front.

When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system from warning the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”, “FCW OFF" will be displayed in the instrument cluster display.

When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this prevents the system from providing limited active braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.

When FCW status is set to “Warning and

Braking”, this allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it applies autonomous braking.

The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full

On” from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned off, it will reset to “Full On” when the vehicle is restarted.

4


122 SAFETY

FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity

The FCW sensitivity and Active Braking status are programmable through the Uconnect

System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Multimedia” in the Owner's Manual for further information.



Far



When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the

“Far” setting and the system status is

“Warning and Braking”, this allows the system to warn the driver of a possible more distant collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings.



More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent warnings may prefer this setting.



Medium




“Medium” setting and the system status is “Warning and Braking”, this allows the system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings.



Near




“Near” setting and the system status is

“Warning and Braking”, this allows the system to warn the driver of a possible closer collision with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings.



This setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.



More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want to avoid frequent warnings may prefer this setting.

FCW Limited Warning

If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW

Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited

Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, the active braking may not be fully available. Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will return to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.

Service FCW Warning

If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays:





ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required

Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required

This indicates there is an internal system fault.

Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

General Information

















NOTE:


T

IRE

P

RESSURE

M

ONITORING

S

YSTEM

(TPMS)

(Vehicles Under 10K Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR) Only)

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.

NOTE:

The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a graphic showing the pres sure values of each tire with the low tire pres sure values in a different color, or the Uconnect radio will display a TPMS message. When this occurs you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven

SAFETY 123 for at least three hours, or driven less than

1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And

Maintenance” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven — this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low TPMS Warning Light illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the TPMS

Warning Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle

4


124 SAFETY may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi

(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning

Light off.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately

23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS

Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi

(186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.

CAUTION!



The TPMS has been optimized for the orig inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been estab lished for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage.



Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked.



After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.

This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor.

NOTE:







The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the Tire

Fill Alert feature the TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.





The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi bility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning

Light.

Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.


Example: Tire Pressure Monitoring Display

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.

NOTE:

It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:



Receiver module



Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors





Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, which display in the instrument cluster

Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning

Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure

Warnings

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring

Warning Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. The instrument cluster will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color. An "Inflate to XX" message will also be displayed.

Example: Low Tire Pressure Display

SAFETY 125

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those in a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message.

Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the graphic display in the instrument cluster will return to its original color, and the

“Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi

(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni toring Warning Light off.

Service TPMS Warning

If a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Warning Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a

"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a

4


126 SAFETY minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Warning Light” will no longer flash, and the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:





Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.

Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.





Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

Using tire chains on the vehicle.



Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

A system fault may occur due to an incorrect

TPM sensor location condition. When a system fault occurs due to an incorrect TPM sensor location, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning

Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a “Tire Pressure Temporarily

Unavailable” message in place of the tire pressure display screen. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring

Indicator Light” will no longer flash and the tire pressure display screen will be displayed showing the tire pressure values in the correct locations.

Vehicles With Non-Matching Full Size Spare Or

Compact Spare





The non-matching full size spare or compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.

Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the non-matching full size spare or compact spare tire.

If you install the non-matching full size spare or compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS Warning Light and a “LOW

TIRE” message will remain on and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still display a pressure





 value in a different color and an “Inflate to

XX” message.

After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning

Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the instru ment cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM

SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pres sure value.

Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the non-matching full size spare or compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127 need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TTPMS) — If Equipped

The Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TTPMS) is a feature that displays the trailer tire pressure values and warn the driver of a low tire pressure event based on the drivers set target tire pressure value, through TTPMS settings found in the radio.

The TTPMS monitors the pressure of each tire and warns the driver through the instrument cluster, when either a low tire pressure condition falls below 25% of the drivers set pressure or if a system malfunction occurs. The instrument cluster will display the actual tire pressure or dashes for each of the trailer tires in the correct trailer position, based on trailer configuration. The TTPMS can support up to 12 trailer tires per configured trailer on up to four configurable trailers. Refer to “Uconnect

Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System

Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Pairing

In order use this feature, the provided tire pressure sensors must be installed in the desired trailer tires and the sensors must be paired to the truck. If the target trailer requires more than the provided four sensors, additional sensors can be purchased at an authorized

Ram dealership.

With the sensors installed and the trailer near or connected to your Ram truck, initiate the pairing process by entering the settings menu in the radio and select trailer. Refer to “Uconnect

Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information. Select the desired trailer profile to pair to, open the “Tire Pressure” menu, and hit

“Setup All Tires.”

SAFETY 127

NOTE:

The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing process is complete.

Trailer Tire Pressure Settings

Trailer Tire Pressure Pairing

4


128 SAFETY

Follow the on screen prompts to select the number of axles (1 - 3), the number of trailer tires (2, 4, 6, 8, or 12), and the set trailer tire pressure. The range is selectable anywhere between 25-125 psi (172-862 kPa).

Once psi (kPa) is programmed, the pairing screen appears. Tire sensors must be paired in order shown. Starting with Tire 1, deflate tire by

5 psi (34 kPa) and wait for a horn chirp. It may take up to three minutes for the chirp to occur, indicating that the sensor has paired. Repeat process on each tire, in order, until complete.

Do not exit the pairing screen until process is complete. If pairing was unsuccessful, a double horn chirp will sound, and a prompt on the touchscreen will allow you to retry the procedure; “Retry” will only appear when setup fails. Each tire must be successfully paired during a single pairing process to receive the success screen.

NOTE:

If the pairing process times out after three minutes of no communication with a sensor, a double horn chirp will occur indicating the pairing has failed and a message will display on the radio indicating the process was unsuc cessful. Under certain circumstances, the double horn chirp may continue to happen every three minutes indicating the failed pairing. If this happens, the horn chirping may be canceled by cycling the ignition button OFF and then back to ON/RUN position.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure

Warnings

When a tire pressure low in one or more of the active road tires is detected, the instrument cluster will display a message stating “Trailer

Tire Pressure Low”. The instrument cluster will then display the TTPMS graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color.

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those in a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the customer programmed target tire pressure value as shown at the top of the TTPMS instrument cluster graphic. Once the tire(s) are inflated, the system will automatically update the graphic display in the instrument cluster, returning to its original color. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TTPMS to receive the updated information.

Service TTPMS Warning

If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster will display a “Trailer Tire Pressure

System Service Required” message for a minimum of five seconds.

Once the system fault is corrected the "Trailer

Tire Pressure System Service Required" message will no longer be displayed. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to

10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TTPMS to receive the trailer tire pressure information.

Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured

A “Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured” message will be displayed in the Instrument

Cluster on the TTPM instrument cluster graphic when a trailer number is selected that has not had trailer tire pressure sensors paired. To correct this condition, see “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”.

Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active

Trailer

The “Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match

Active Trailer” message will be displayed in the

Instrument Cluster when the trailer sensors being received by the TTPM module do not match the trailer sensors paired to the current

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129 trailer number selected. This message will be displayed when the sensors being received completely match the sensors paired to another trailer number configured in the TTPM module.

To correct this condition, the correct trailer number must be selected in the radio. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.

Tire Fill Alert — If Equipped

This feature notifies the user when the placard tire pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the tire.

The customer may choose to disable or enable the Tire Fill Alert feature through use of the customer settings in the radio.

NOTE:



Only one tire can be filled at a time when using the Tire Fill Alert system.



The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the system is in deactivation mode (if equipped).

The system will be activated when the TPM receiver module detects a change in tire pressure. The ignition must be in the RUN mode, with the transmission in PARK (P).

NOTE:

It is not required to have the engine running to enter Tire Fill Alert mode.

The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.

If the hazard lamps do not come on while inflating the tire, the TPM sensor may be in a null spot preventing the TPM sensor signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle may need to be moved either forward or backward slightly to exit the null spot.

When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure display screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

Operation:









The horn will chirp once to let the user know when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches recommended pressure.

The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over filled and will continue to chirp every five seconds if the user continues to inflate the tire.

The horn will chirp once again when enough air is let out to reach proper inflation level.

The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is then under-inflated and will continue to

SAFETY 129 chirp every five seconds if the user continues to deflate the tire.

Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) — If Equipped

The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an optional feature that is included as part of the normal Tire Fill Alert system. The system is designed to allow the customer to select a pressure to inflate or deflate the vehicle's front and rear axle tires to and to provide feedback to the customer while inflating or deflating the vehicle's tires.

In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application which is located in the apps menu of the Uconnect

System, the customer will be able to select a pressure setting for both the front and rear axle tire pressures by scrolling through a pressure range from XX to 15 psi in 1 psi increments for each axle setting. XX = the vehicle’s cold placard pressure values for the front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle placard pressure label.

The customer may also store the pressure values chosen for each axle in the radio as a preset pressure. The customer will be allowed to store up to two sets of preset values in the radio for the front and rear axle pressure values.

4


130 SAFETY

Once the customer selects the tire pressures for the front and rear axles that they want to inflate or deflate to, they can begin inflating or deflating one tire at a time.

NOTE:

The STFA system will only support inflating or deflating one tire at a time.

The system will be activated when the TPM receiver module detects a change in tire pressure. The ignition must be in the RUN mode, with the transmission in PARK (P).

The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.

If the hazard lamps do not come on while inflating or deflating the tire, the TPM sensor may be in a null spot preventing the TPM sensor signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle may need to be moved either forward or backward slightly to exit the null spot.

When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure display screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

Operation:



The horn will chirp once when the selected pressure is reached to let the user know when to stop inflating or deflating the tire.





The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over inflated or over deflated and will continue to chirp every five seconds if the user continues to inflate or deflate the tire.

The horn will chirp once again when enough air is added or removed to reach proper selected pressure level.

Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)

3500/4500/5500 Series Trucks

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire

Pressure Information System (TPIS).

The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to transmit tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.

NOTE:

It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPIS consists of the following components:





Receiver module

Four TPM sensors (Single Rear Wheel (SRW) applications)





Six TPM sensors (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) applications)

Pressure display in the instrument cluster

The TPIS system will display all four (Single Rear

Wheel (SRW) applications) or six (Dual Rear

Wheel (DRW) applications) tire pressure values in the instrument cluster display.

If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received.

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the "SERVICE

TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:





Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors.

Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals.








Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.

Using tire chains on the vehicle.

Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

General Information
















NOTE:


OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems:

SAFETY 131

O

CCUPANT

R

ESTRAINT

S

YSTEMS

F

EATURES



Seat Belt Systems





Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air

Bags

Child Restraints

Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.

I

MPORTANT

S

AFETY

P

RECAUTIONS

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child

Restraints” in this section for further information) must be secured in the

4


132 SAFETY appropriate child restraint or belt- positioning booster seat in a rear seating position.

3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for further information).

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for customer service contact information.

WARNING!



Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.



Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.

S

EAT

B

ELT

S

YSTEMS

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System

(BeltAlert)

Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The

BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.

Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the

Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133 remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)

(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt

Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.

The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.

Change Of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.

NOTE:

If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions except the Crew Cab front center seating position have combination lap/ shoulder belts.

SAFETY 133

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions.

However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!



Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags.



In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the inte rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.



It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

(Continued)

4


134 SAFETY

WARNING!

(Continued)



Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.



Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash.



Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt.

Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.



Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/ shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size.

WARNING!







A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.

A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you.



A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possi bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)



A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal inju ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.



A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision.

You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together.



A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection.

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced immedi ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.


SAFETY 135

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.

Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

Positioning The Lap Belt

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automat ically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.

4


136 SAFETY

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best.

Adjustable Anchorage

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position.

NOTE:

The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.

WARNING!



Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse.

You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.



Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.



Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.



Always make all seat belt height adjustments when the vehicle is stationary.

First Row Center Seat Belt Operating

Instructions (Regular Cab Only)

The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only) features a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded.

The latch plate and regular latch plate can then be stored out of the way in the seat for added

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137 convenience to open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front seats when the seat is not occupied.

1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate from its stowed position on the seat.

Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle

2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the seat.

3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head restraint.

4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”

5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap.

6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.

SAFETY 137

9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle.

10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position.

4

Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue

Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected


138 SAFETY

WARNING!



If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision.



When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.

First Row Center Lap Belt Operating

Instructions — If Equipped

The center seating position for the Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To buckle the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click." To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull.

To remove slack, pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back and upright in the seat, then adjust the seat belt as tightly as is comfortable.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage

(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat

Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.

WARNING!



ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi cally required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the

Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the

Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.



Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt

Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the

Seat Belt Extender when not needed.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.

Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.

Seat Belt Pretensioner — If Equipped

3500 Models Only

The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of


SAFETY 139 a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision.

Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE:

These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the

Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.

A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature — If

Equipped

3500 Models Only

The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an Energy Management feature that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors

(ALR) — If Equipped

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be equipped with a Switchable

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child

Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section of this manual.

The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position.

Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

Locations

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

Locations


If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the

ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.

4


140 SAFETY

Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children

12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

WARNING!







How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.

This indicates the seat belt is now in the

Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

WARNING!



The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service

Manual.





Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.

Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.

S

UPPLEMENTAL

R

ESTRAINT

S

YSTEMS

(SRS)

Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.

The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller

(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air

Bag System Components:

Air Bag System Components



Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)




















Steering Wheel and Column

Instrument Panel

Knee Impact Bolsters

Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

Seat Belt Buckle Switch

Supplemental Side Air Bags — If Equipped

Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped

Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped



The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the

ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning

Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning

Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.



The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.





The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval.

The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit tently or remains on while driving.

NOTE:

If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant

Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled.

In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to protect you in a collision.

If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.

SAFETY 141

Front Air Bags

This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger.

The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel.

The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or

“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.

4

Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations

1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags

2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters


142 SAFETY

WARNING!



Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front air bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.







Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag

Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags.

This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/ or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced

Front Air Bags.

WARNING!



No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli sion severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)



Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manu ally. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating.



Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.

Front Air Bag Operation

Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.


On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.


The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.

WARNING!



Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way.



Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags

(SABs) — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with


(SABs). If your vehicle is equipped with


(SABs), please refer to the information below.

SAFETY 143


(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS

AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

The SABs (if equipped with SABs) may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

4


144 SAFETY

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.

The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs) — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with


(SABICs). If your vehicle is equipped with


(SABICs), please refer to the information below.


(SABICs) are located above the side windows.

The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS

AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)

Label Location

SABICs (if equipped with SABICs) may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.

The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs (if equipped with SABICs) may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events.

WARNING!



Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the

SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions.



In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.

Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.

Side Impacts

The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145 impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment.

The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes.

SAFETY 145

WARNING!



Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.



Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protec tion in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side

Air Bag. To get the best protection from the

Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!



Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)



Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.



Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision.

The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions,

Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have

Side Air Bags.

NOTE:

Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

Rollover Events (If Equipped With Rollover

Sensing)

Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners (if equipped) are designed to activate in certain rollover events (if equipped with rollover sensing). The Occupant Restraint Controller

(ORC) determines whether deployment in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.

4


146 SAFETY

The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy the Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.

Air Bag System Components

NOTE:

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni tors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System

Components listed below:





Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)












Steering Wheel and Column

Instrument Panel


Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

Seat Belt Buckle Switch







Supplemental Side Air Bags — If Equipped

Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped

Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped

If A Deployment Occurs

The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

NOTE:

Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur:





The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not perma nent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.

As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by- product of the process that gener ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla tion. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.

For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.

If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant

Restraint Controller System serviced as well.

NOTE:





Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte rior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately.


Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the

Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:











Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).

Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped).

Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power.

Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or for

15 minutes from the intervention of the

Enhanced Accident Response System.

Unlock the power door locks.

Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these other functions in response to the

Enhanced Accident Response System:





Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the

HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula tion Door

Cut off battery power to the:



Engine



Electric Motor (if equipped)



Electric power steering



Brake booster



Electric park brake



Automatic transmission gear selector



Horn



Front wiper



Headlamp washer pump

NOTE:

After an accident, remember to place the igni tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the system by following the procedure described below. If you have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.

SAFETY 147

Enhanced Accident Response System

Reset Procedure

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident

Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from ignition

START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!



Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

(Continued)

4


148 SAFETY

WARNING!

(Continued)



It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.



Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden tally or may not function properly if modifica tions are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/ tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an authorized dealer.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:





How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;





How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforce ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

C

HILD

R

ESTRAINTS

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.

According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.


SAFETY 149

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are.

The child and others could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt.

Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint

Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.

NOTE:



For additional information, refer to http:// www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–327–4236



Canadian residents should refer to Transport

Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/ child-car-seat-safety.html

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Infants and Toddlers

Small Children

Larger Children

Children Too Large for Child Restraints

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age

Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint

Children who are at least two years old or who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint

Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt

Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster seat

Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child

Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point

Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle

4


150 SAFETY

Infant And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat.

WARNING!







WARNING!

Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your child may be more severely injured as a result.


Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.

Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.

Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!





Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.



When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or

LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.

In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.

SAFETY 151

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple

5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between the neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not the stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

4

If the answer to any of these questions was

“no”, then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/ shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.


152 SAFETY

A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type

Combined Weight of the Child + Child

Restraint

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below

LATCH – Lower

Anchors Only

Seat Belt Only

LATCH – Lower

Anchors + Top Tether

Anchor

Seat Belt + Top

Tether Anchor

Rear-Facing Child

Restraint

Rear-Facing Child

Restraint

Forward-Facing Child

Restraint

Forward-Facing Child

Restraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

More than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

More than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

X X

X

X X

X


Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren

(LATCH) Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The

LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some

LATCH Label

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle

SAFETY 153 seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information.

4

Regular Cab LATCH Positions

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions

Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per

Seating Position)


Crew Cab Full Bench LATCH Positions

Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per

Seating Position)



154 SAFETY

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint?

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?

Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard seating positions?

Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

No

N/A – Regular / Crew Split Rear Bench

No – Crew Full Rear Bench

No

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg).

Do not use the seat belt when you use the

LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.

Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information.

Regular Cab Front/Full Bench Rear Seat: Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position.

Split Bench Rear Seat: Use the supplied center lower anchorages to install a child restraint in the center position.

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the

LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.


SAFETY 155

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Can the rear head restraints be removed?

Yes

Yes

The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.

The head restraints can be removed in every rear seating position if they interfere with the installation of the child restraint.

Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know


Locating The LATCH Anchorages — Crew

Cab Only

The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback.

They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.

You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side

Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

Regular Cab models have tether strap anchorages behind the front center and right seats. Crew Cab models have tether strap anchorages located behind each of the rear seats.

4


156 SAFETY

Regular Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)

1 — Tether Strap Hook

2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint

3 — Tether Anchor

Crew Cab Outboard Tether Anchorage

Crew Cab Center Tether Anchorage With Head

Restraint In Raised Position

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH

Regular Cab or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear Seat:

No Lower Center LATCH Anchorages Available

WARNING!



Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This posi tion is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position.



Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint.

Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compat ible Child Restraint” for typical installation instructions.

Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat: Center LATCH

Anchorages Available

If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position.


WARNING!

Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child

Restraint” for typical installation instructions.

Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child

Restraint

If the selected seating position has a

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing

Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child Restraints

Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

SAFETY 157

How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR

(ALR) Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them.

WARNING!



Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

(Continued)

4


158 SAFETY

WARNING!

(Continued)



Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints Using The

Vehicle Seat Belt

Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!



Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.



Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic

Locking Mode” description in “Switchable

Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under

“Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seat belt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint’s belt path.

Please see the table below and the following sections for more information.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing

Child Restraints In This Vehicle

Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

Locations




SAFETY 159

Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

Locations

Cinching Latchplate — Cinching Latchplate



Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint?

Weight limit of the Child Restraint

Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat?

Yes

Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.

4


160 SAFETY

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

Can the rear head restraints be removed?

Yes

The head restraints can be removed in every rear seating position if they interfere with the installation of the child restraint.

Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know


Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint?

Yes – Cinching Latch Plate

No – ALR

In positions with cinching latch plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor.

Installing A Child Restraint With A

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR):


WARNING!







1. For Crew Cab Models

Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

For Regular Cab Models

Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. Move the vehicle seat as far rearward as possible to keep the child as far from the passenger air bag as possible.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat.


5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic

Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.

If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints


9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than

1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching

Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:


WARNING!







1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get

SAFETY 161 a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.

2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.

5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints


4


162 SAFETY

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child restraint.

If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top

Tether Anchorage

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat.

See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the head restraint and to the tether anchor directly behind the seat.

Regular Cab Trucks:

In the regular cab truck, the top tether anchorages are located behind the center and right passenger seats. There is a plastic cover over each anchorage. To attach the tether strap of the child restraint:

Regular Cab Tether Anchorages

1 — Tether Strap Hook

2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint

3 — Tether Anchor

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether strap should go between the head restraint posts underneath the head restraint. You may

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163 need to adjust the head restraint to the upward position to pass the tether strap underneath the head restraint and between its posts.

3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to the square opening in the sheet metal. Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Right Or Left Outboard Seats:

1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.

WARNING!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger

Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.

Crew Cab Trucks

The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are tether strap loops located between the rear glass and the back of the rear seat. There is a tether strap loop located behind each seating position. Follow the steps below to attach the tether strap of the child restraint.

Head Restraint In Raised Position

Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In

Raised Position

SAFETY 163

2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind the center seat.

3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the center tether strap loop.

4

Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop


164 SAFETY

4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And

Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop

NOTE:

If there are child seats in both of the outboard

(left and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks of both child seats should be connected to the center tether strap loop. This is the correct way to tether two outboard child seats.

Center Seat:

1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.

Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised

Position

2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind either the right or left outboard seat.

3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the right or left outboard tether strap loop.

Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop

4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And

Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop


Installing Three Child Restraints:

1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat. Route the tether straps following the directions for right and left seating positions, above.

2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap loop, but do not tighten the straps yet.

3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. Route the tether strap following the directions for the center seating position, above.

4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop.

5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions, tightening the right and left tether straps before the center tether strap.

Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown

WARNING!





An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap.

If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seat backs as you remove slack in the strap.

T

RANSPORTING

P

ETS

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown

SAFETY 165 about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

SAFETY TIPS

T

RANSPORTING

P

ASSENGERS

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE

CARGO AREA.

WARNING!






It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.



Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.



Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

4


166 SAFETY

E

XHAUST

G

AS

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you.

To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:



Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.



If you are required to drive with the trunk/ liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control

BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO

NOT use the recirculation mode.



If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

S

AFETY

C

HECKS

Y

OU

S

HOULD

M

AKE

I

NSIDE

T

HE

V

EHICLE

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.

Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.


The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first placed in ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.

Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in

“Safety” for further information.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.


Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:



ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)



ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR

MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.



ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of your vehicle.



ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s side floor area. To check for inter ference, with the vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the accel erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk.



ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the passenger’s side floor area.

(Continued)

SAFETY 167

WARNING!

(Continued)



ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle control.



NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the position of the floor mat and may cause interference with the accel erator, brake, or clutch pedals.



If the vehicle carpet has been removed and re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.

Fully depress each pedal to check for inter ference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.



It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check your floor mat has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.

4


168 SAFETY

P

ERIODIC

S

AFETY

C

HECKS

Y

OU

S

HOULD

M

AKE

O

UTSIDE

T

HE

V

EHICLE

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.

Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.

Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.

Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.


169

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE — GAS ENGINE

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.

The starter should not be operated for more than 10-second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such intervals will protect the starter from overheating.

WARNING!



When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.





(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)



Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil dren, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.




A

UTOMATIC

T

RANSMISSION

Start the engine with the transmission in the

PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range.

NOTE:





This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be pressed to shift out of PARK.

If equipped with an 8-speed transmission, starting the vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible unless the Manual Park Release has been activated. For the Manual Park Release operation refer to “Manual Park Release” in

“In Case Of Emergency” for further informa tion.

T

IP

S

TART

F

EATURE

Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition switch briefly to the START position and release it. The starter motor will continue to run and will automatically disengage when the engine is running.

K

EYLESS

E

NTER

-N-G

O

— I

GNITION

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in the passenger compartment.

5


170 STARTING AND OPERATING

N

ORMAL

S

TARTING

U

SING

ENGINE

START/STOP B

UTTON

To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE

START/STOP Button

1. The transmission must be in PARK.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.

3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after

10 seconds.

4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the

ENGINE START/STOP button again.

NOTE:

Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/

STOP Button

1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.

2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.

3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the

ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph

(8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode until the gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF mode.

4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the

ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle speed above 5 mph

(8 km/h), the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.

NOTE:

If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the

ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine will shut off and the ignition will remain in the ACC position. If vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark. See AutoPark section for further details.

ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With

Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or

NEUTRAL Position)

The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:

OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition modes without starting the vehicle and use the accessories, follow these directions:

1. Start with the ignition in the OFF mode.

2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place the ignition to the ACC mode.

3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to place the ignition to the RUN mode.

4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF mode.

AutoPark — Rotary Shifter and 8-Speed

Transmission Only

AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in placing the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following pages occur. It is a backup system and should not be relied upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.


The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are outlined on the following pages.

WARNING!



Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A

VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in the Instrument Cluster Display and near the gear selector. If the "P" indi cator is blinking, your vehicle is not in

PARK. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.



AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle into PARK. It is a backup system and should not be relied upon as the primary method by which the driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.

If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.

AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:





Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed transmission

Vehicle is not in PARK





Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less

Ignition switched from RUN to ACC

NOTE:

For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the engine will turn off and the ignition switch will change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the igni tion switches to OFF automatically, unless the driver turns the ignition switch OFF.

If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may AutoPark.

AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:



Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed transmission






Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less





Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled

Driver’s door is ajar



Brake pedal is not depressed

The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then

Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.

STARTING AND OPERATING 171

NOTE:

In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in the instrument cluster, causing the

“AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Shift to Gear” to not be seen. In these cases, the shifter must be returned to “P” to select desired gear.

If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may AutoPark.

AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.

The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to

Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph

(1.9 km/h).

WARNING!

If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph

(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.

5



4WD LOW — If Equipped

AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in 4WD LOW.

The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in the instrument cluster.

Additional customer warnings will be given when all of these conditions are met:








Driver’s door is ajar

Vehicle is in 4WD LOW range

The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into PARK or the driver’s door is closed.

ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by looking for the “P” in the instrument cluster display and near the shifter.

As an added precaution, always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.

If Engine Fails To Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the “Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while the engine is cranking. This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.

The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

WARNING!



Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury.



Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.



If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to

“Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of

Emergency” for further information.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.

If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not have enough power to continue running when the ignition button/key is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key once the engine is running smoothly.

If the engine shows no sign of starting after a

10 second period of engine cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor, wait 10 to

15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

C

OLD

W

EATHER

O

PERATION

(B

ELOW

–22°F O

R

−30°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.


A

FTER

S

TARTING

The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will decrease as the engine warms up.

STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

The starter should not be operated for more than 25-second intervals. Waiting a few minutes between such intervals will protect the starter from overheating.

WARNING!



Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death.



When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)



Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured.

Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

A

UTOMATIC

T

RANSMISSION

Start the engine with the transmission in the

NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range.

Tip Start Feature

Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition switch briefly to the START position and release it. The starter motor will continue to run and will automatically disengage when the engine is running.


K

EYLESS

E

NTER

-N-G

O

— I

GNITION

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in the passenger compartment.

Normal Starting

Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button

1. The transmission must be in PARK or

NEUTRAL.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.

3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 25 seconds.

4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, remove your foot from the brake pedal and push the

ENGINE START/STOP button again.

5



NOTE:





Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

Under cold weather conditions, the engine may not immediately crank if the "Wait to

Start" telltale is illuminated. This is normal operation. For vehicles equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go, the vehicle will automat ically crank when the "Wait to Start" time has elapsed. See the section "Starting Procedure

Engine Manifold Air Temperature 0°F to

66°F (18° C to 19°C)" for more information.

To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/

STOP Button

1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.

2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.

3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the

ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once, the instrument cluster will display a

“Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.

4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once will turn the engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode.

5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two seconds (or three short pushes in a row) to turn the engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF mode) if the engine is turned off when the transmission is not in PARK.

NOTE:

If the ignition is left in the ACC or ON/RUN

(engine not running) mode and the transmis sion is in PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition return to the OFF mode.

ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With

Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or

NEUTRAL Position)

The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, RUN. To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:

1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position:

2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change the ignition to the ACC position.

3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to change the ignition to the

RUN position.

4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF position.

Keyless Enter-N-Go Starting Procedure —

Engine Manifold Air Temperature 0°F To

66°F (–18°C to 19°C)

NOTE:

The temperature displayed in the instrument cluster does not necessarily reflect the engine manifold air temperature. Refer to “Instrument



When engine temperatures fall below 66°F

(19°C) the “Wait To Start” telltale will remain on indicating the intake air heater system is active.


Follow the steps in the “Normal Starting” procedure except:

1. Pushing the engine start button with the driver’s foot on the brake will move the ignition from OFF or ACC to RUN, and will illuminate the "Wait to Start" telltale. The engine will not immediately crank, this is normal operation.

2. The “Wait to Start" telltale will remain on for a period of time that varies depending on the engine temperature.

3. While the "Wait to Start" telltale is on, the instrument cluster will additionally display a gauge or bar whose initial length represents the full "Wait to Start" time period. Its length will decrease until it disappears when the

"Wait to Start" time has elapsed.

CAUTION!

If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains on, DO NOT START the engine before you drain the water from the fuel filters to avoid engine damage. Refer to “Draining Fuel/

Water Separator Filter” in “Servicing And


4. After the engine “Wait to Start” telltale goes off, the engine will automatically crank.

CAUTION!

Do not crank engine for more than 25 seconds at a time or starter motor damage may result.

Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait at least two minutes for the starter to cool before repeating start procedure.

5. After engine start-up, check to see that there is oil pressure.

6. Release the parking brake and drive.

NOTE:







Engine idle speed will automatically increase to 1,000 RPM and engage the Variable

Geometry Turbocharger at low coolant temperatures to improve engine warm-up.

The engine will not automatically crank after the engine "Wait to Start" telltale goes off if a door or the hood is ajar.

If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left ON for more than two minutes after the

“Wait to Start” telltale goes out, reset the intake air heater by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position for at least 5 seconds and

STARTING AND OPERATING 175 then back ON. Repeat steps 1 through 7 of

“Keyless Enter-N-Go Starting Procedure –

Engine Manifold Air Temperature Below 66°F

(19°C).”

E

XTREME

C

OLD

W

EATHER

The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine is equipped with several features designed to assist cold weather starting and operation:



The engine block heater is a resistance heater installed in the water jacket of the engine just above and behind the oil filter. It requires a 110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

NOTE:

The engine block heater cord is a factory installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are available from your authorized

Mopar dealer.



A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter hous ings aid in preventing fuel gelling. It is controlled by a built-in thermostat.



An intake air heater system both improves engine starting and reduces the amount of white smoke generated by a warming engine.

5



N

ORMAL

S

TARTING

P

ROCEDURE

—

E

NGINE

M

ANIFOLD

A

IR

T

EMPERATURE

A

BOVE

66°F (19°C)

Observe the instrument panel cluster lights when starting the engine.

1. Always apply the parking brake.

2. Shift into PARK for an automatic transmission.

3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position and watch the instrument panel cluster lights.

CAUTION!




4. Place the ignition switch in the START position and crank the engine. Do not press the accelerator during starting.

CAUTION!



5. Check that the oil pressure warning light has turned off.

6. Release the parking brake.

S

TARTING

P

ROCEDURE

— E

NGINE

M

ANIFOLD

A

IR

T

EMPERATURE

0°F T

O

66°F (–18°C

TO

19°C)

NOTE:

The temperature displayed in the instrument cluster does not necessarily reflect the engine manifold air temperature. Refer to “Instrument



When engine temperatures fall below 66°F

(19°C) the “Wait To Start” telltale will remain on indicating the intake air heater system is active.

Follow the steps in the “Normal Starting” procedure except:

1. The “Wait to Start” telltale will remain on for a period of time that varies depending on the engine temperature.

2. While the “Wait to Start” telltale is on, the instrument cluster will additionally display a gauge or bar whose initial length represents the full “Wait to Start” time period. Its length will decrease until it disappears when the

“Wait to Start” time has elapsed.

CAUTION!




3. After the “Wait to Start” telltale goes off, place the ignition switch in the START position. Do not press the accelerator during starting.


CAUTION!



4. After engine start-up, check that the oil pressure warning light has turned off.

5. Release the parking brake and drive.

NOTE:







Automatic equipped vehicles with optional

Keyless Enter-N-Go – If the ENGINE START/

STOP button is pushed once while in park with the ignition off and driver’s foot on the brake pedal, the vehicle will automatically crank and start after the “Wait to Start” time has elapsed. If it is desired to abort the start process before it completes, the driver’s foot should be fully removed from the brake pedal prior to pushing the start button again in order for the ignition to move directly to off.




“Wait To Start” telltale goes out, reset the intake air heater by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position for at least five seconds and then back ON. Repeat steps

1 through 5 of “Starting Procedure – Engine

Manifold Air Temperature Below 66°F

(19°C).”

S

TARTING

P

ROCEDURE

— E

NGINE

M

ANIFOLD

A

IR

T

EMPERATURE

B

ELOW

0°F (-18°C)

In extremely cold weather below 0°F (-18°C) it may be beneficial to cycle the intake air heater twice before attempting to start the engine. This can be accomplished by turning the ignition OFF for at least five seconds and then back ON after the “Wait to Start” telltale has turned off, but before the engine is started. However, excessive cycling of the intake air heater will result in damage to the heater elements or reduced battery voltage.

NOTE:

If multiple pre-heat cycles are used before starting, additional engine run time may be required to maintain battery state of charge at a satisfactory level.


1. If the engine stalls after the initial start, the ignition must be turned to the OFF position for at least five seconds and then to the ON position to recycle the intake air heater.

NOTE:

Excessive white smoke and poor engine perfor mance will result if intake air heater are not recycled.

2. Heat generated by the intake air heater dissipates rapidly in a cold engine. If more than two minutes pass between the time the “Wait to Start” telltale turns off and the engine is started, recycle the intake air heater by turning the ignition switch to the

OFF position for at least five seconds and then back ON.

3. If the vehicle is driven and vehicle speed exceeds 19 mph (31 km/h) before the intake air heater post-heat (after start) cycle is complete, the intake air heater will shut off.

4. If the engine is cranked for more than

10 seconds, the post-heat cycle will turn off.

NOTE:





5







When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of fuel or the fuel gels at low temperatures, air is pulled into the fuel system. If your engine has run out of fuel, refer to “Priming If The

Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel” in “Servicing



“Wait to Start” telltale goes out, reset the intake air heater by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position for at least five seconds and then back ON. Repeat steps 1 through 5 of “Starting Procedure – Engine Manifold Air

Temperature Below 66°F (19°C).”

S

TARTING

F

LUIDS

WARNING!

Starting fluids or flammable liquids must never be used in the Cummins diesel engine

(see Warning label). Never pour diesel fuel, flammable liquid, starting fluids (ether) into the air cleaner canister, air intake piping, or turbocharger inlet in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire and explosion causing serious personal injury and engine damage.

The engine is equipped with an automatic electric air preheating system. If the instructions in this manual are followed, the engine should start in all conditions.

WARNING!



Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death.



When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key fob and lock your vehicle.




Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat tended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/

RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE

Observe the following when the engine is operating.





All message center lights are off.

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.





Engine oil pressure is above 10 psi (69 kPa) at idle.

Voltmeter operation:

The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at various engine temperatures. This cycling operation is caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold heater system. The number of cycles and the length of the cycling operation is controlled by the engine control module.

Post-heat operation can run for several minutes, and then the electrical system and voltmeter needle will stabilize.

The cycling action will cause temporary dimming of the headlamps, interior lamps, and also a noticeable reduction in blower motor speed.



C

OLD

W

EATHER

P

RECAUTIONS

Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F (0°C) may require special considerations. The following charts suggest these options:

Fuel Operating Range

NOTE:

Use “Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) Fuels” ONLY.

5

Fuel Operating Range Chart

*No. 1 ULSD Fuel should only be used where extended arctic conditions (0°F/-18°C) exist”.



NOTE:





Use of Climatized ULSD or Number 1 ULSD

Fuel results in a noticeable decrease in fuel economy.

Climatized ULSD Fuel is a blend of Number

2 ULSD and Number 1 ULSD Fuels which reduces the temperature at which wax crys tals form in fuel.









The fuel grade should be clearly marked on the pump at the fuel station.

The engine requires the use of “ULSD Fuel”.

Use of incorrect fuel could result in engine and exhaust system damage. Refer to “Fuel

Requirements” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.

If climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel is not available, and you are operating below

(20°F/-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions,

Mopar Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling

(see Fuel Operating Range Chart).

Under some circumstances increased engine noise may be audible in the seconds following a cold start. This is most likely to occur when using fuel that isn't blended for the ambient temperature present. This may occur on an unseasonably cold day or when a truck is fueled in a warmer climate and driven to a colder climate. The noise can typically be prevented by using Mopar Premium Diesel

Fuel Treatment as recommended (see Fuel

Operating Range Chart).

Engine Oil Usage

Refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And

Maintenance” for the correct engine oil viscosity.

Winter Front Cover Usage

A Winter front or cold weather cover is to be used in ambient temperatures below 32°F

(0°C), especially during extended idle conditions. This cover is equipped with four flaps for managing total grille opening in varying ambient temperatures. If a Winter front or cold weather cover is to be used the flaps should be left in the full open position to allow air flow to the charge air cooler and automatic transmission oil cooler. When ambient temperatures drop below 0°F (-17°C) the four flaps need to be closed. A suitable cold weather cover is available from your Mopar dealer.

Battery Blanket Usage

A battery loses 60% of its cranking power as the battery temperature decreases to 0°F (-18°C).

For the same decrease in temperature, the engine requires twice as much power to crank at the same RPM. The use of 120 Volts AC powered battery blankets will greatly increase starting capability at low temperatures. Suitable battery blankets are available from an authorized Mopar dealer.

Engine Warm-Up

Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold. When starting a cold engine, bring the engine up to operating speed slowly to allow the oil pressure to stabilize as the engine warms up.

NOTE:

High-speed, no-load running of a cold engine can result in excessive white smoke and poor engine performance. No-load engine speeds should be kept under 1,000 RPM during the warm-up period, especially in cold ambient temperature conditions.

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine warm up protection feature that may limit engine performance after cold starting at low ambient temperatures. The length of time engine speed is limited is dependent upon engine coolant temperature. Engine speed may be briefly limited to 1,000 RPM after starting with coolant temperature below freezing conditions, and

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181 may be limited to 1,000 RPM for up to approximately two minutes under more severe cold conditions.

NOTE:

If ambient temperatures are low and the coolant temperature is below 180°F (82°C), the engine idle speed will slowly increase to

1,000 RPM after two minutes of idle, if the following conditions are met:





Foot is off brake pedal and throttle pedal.

Automatic transmission is in PARK.







Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).

Applying the throttle will cancel fast idle.

Operating the exhaust brake at idle will greatly improve warm up rate and will help keep the engine close to operating tempera ture during extended idle.

E

NGINE

I

DLING

Avoid prolonged idling, long periods of idling may be harmful to your engine because combustion chamber temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not burn completely.

Incomplete combustion allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings, engine valves, and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.

If the engine is allowed to idle or the truck is driven on low engine speed drive cycles for more than two hours, the system will automatically enter an emissions operating mode that will increase the engine idle speed to

900 RPM (1,050 RPM for Chassis Cab). While in this mode, which is designed to help maintain the Diesel Particulate Filter, the engine idle speed will return to normal when the brake pedal is applied. A small change in engine tone or a slight change in engine performance while accelerating may also be noticeable at speeds below 20 mph (32 kmh). This operating mode may last for up to an hour of idle time, or around

20 minutes of driving time.

Your truck may have been ordered with an optional voltage monitoring idle up feature. If a load is placed on the electrical system while the truck is in park, this feature will attempt to maintain normal system voltage by automatically increasing engine idle speed. You may notice several consecutive increases in idle speed, up to a maximum of 1,450 RPM, as the system will attempt to utilize the smallest increase in idle speed necessary to maintain normal system voltage. The idle speed will

STARTING AND OPERATING 181 return to normal when either the electrical load is removed, or when the brake pedal is applied.

NOTE:

For instrument cluster display messages related to the vehicle's exhaust system, refer to

“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To

Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor mation.

Idle-Up Feature

The driver-controlled high idle speed feature will help increase cylinder temperatures and provide additional cab heat, however, excessive idling may still cause the exhaust aftertreatment system to not properly regenerate. Extended periods of idle time should be avoided.

The Idle-Up feature uses the Speed Control switches to increase engine idle speed and quickly warm the vehicle's interior.

1. With the transmission in PARK, the parking brake applied, and the engine running, turn on the speed control, then push the

SET switch.

2. The engine RPM will go up to 1,100 RPM. To increase the RPM, push and hold the

ACCEL/RESUME switch and the idle speed

5


182 STARTING AND OPERATING will increase to approximately 1,500 RPM.

To decrease the RPM, push and hold the

DECEL switch and the idle speed will decrease to approximately 1,100 RPM.

3. To cancel the Idle–Up feature, either push the CANCEL switch, push the ON/OFF switch, or press the brake pedal.

N

OISE

Diesel engines can create noises that may seem as a concern. The nature of a diesel engine is compression ignition where compressed air and fuel are mixed and ignited.

Weather, Barometric Pressure, Altitude and

Temperature will affect how fuel is ignited in the engine. Engine’s will sound different from day to day or previous model years. Clicking, ticking, or

Driving Condition

Stop and Go

Stop and Go

Highway Speeds

City Traffic

Highway Speeds

Uphill Grade

Load

Empty

Medium

Medium

Maximum GCWR

Maximum GCWR

Maximum GCWR light knocking is normal and will change from day to day, as the engine breaks in, and can vary with changes in ambient temperature, this is normal. Diesel equipped vehicles also have an exhaust aftertreatment system to reduce emissions utilizing a Diesel Particulate Filter

(DPF) and a Selective Reduction Catalyst (SCR).

The SCR reduces Nox using the Diesel Exhaust

Fluid (DEF) system. DEF is injected directly into the SCR through an dosing module. This process will create a clicking sound and at times, will make noise even with the vehicle shut off. This is normal as the DEF dosing module is purging DEF. Fuel pump noise may increase during low speed/light load conditions when ambient temperature is above 100°F

(38°C), and when fuel tank level is below 10%.

This is a normal condition of the fuel system and controls strategy. If at any time the check engine light is on, please visit an authorized dealer.

S

TOPPING

T

HE

E

NGINE

Idle the engine a few minutes before routine shutdown. After full load operation, idle the engine three to five minutes before shutting it down. This idle period will allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat away from the combustion chamber, bearings, internal components, and turbocharger. This is especially important for turbocharged, charge air-cooled engines. Refer to the following chart for proper engine shutdown:

Turbocharger Temperature

Cool

-

Warm

-

-

Hot

Idle Time (min.) Before Engine

Shutdown

Less than One

One

Two

Three

Four

Five


I

DLE

S

HUTDOWN

This feature can be enabled so that the truck will automatically shutdown when the truck has been idling for a set period of time when the engine is at operating temperature. Idle time can be set in 5 minute increments between

5 and 60 minutes. See an authorized dealer to enable this feature.

NOTE:

The idle shut down timer is disabled while the

PTO is active.

P

ROGRAMMABLE

M

AXIMUM

V

EHICLE

S

PEED

This feature allows the owner to set a maximum vehicle speed for the vehicle. The 2500 and

3500 Series maximum vehicle speed can be set between 40 mph to 87 mph (64 km/h to

140 km/h). The 4500/5500 Series maximum vehicle speed can be set between 40 mph to

85 mph (64 km/h to 136 km/h). See an authorized dealer to enable this feature.

NOTE:

DO NOT set the maximum vehicle speed to a value greater than what the vehicle tires are rated for.

O

PERATING

P

RECAUTIONS

Avoid Overheating The Engine

The temperature of the engine coolant

(antifreeze: a mixture of 50% ethylene-glycol and 50% water) must not exceed the normal range of the temperature gauge 240°F

(116°C) with a 21 psi (145 kPa) coolant pressure cap.

Usually the engine coolant (antifreeze) temperature indicated during operation will be to the left of center in the normal range of the gauge.

Avoid Low Coolant Temperature Operation

Continual operation at low engine coolant

(antifreeze) temperature below the normal range on the gauge 140°F (60°C) can be harmful to the engine. Low engine coolant

(antifreeze) temperature can cause incomplete combustion which allows carbon and varnish to form on piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase, diluting the lubricating oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.


C

OOLING

S

YSTEM

T

IPS

To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating in high ambient temperature conditions, take the following actions:









City Driving — When stopped, shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

Highway Driving — Reduce your speed.

Up Steep Hills — Select a lower transmission gear.

Air Conditioning — Turn it off temporarily.

Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil

Pressure

When the engine is at normal operating temperature, the minimum oil pressures required are:

Idle 700 to 800 RPM

Full speed and load

10 psi (69 kPa)

30 psi (207 kPa)

5

CAUTION!

If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings, shut the engine off immediately.

Failure to do so could result in immediate and severe engine damage.



Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed

Parts

All engine failures give some warning before the parts fail. Be on the alert for changes in performance, sounds, and visual evidence that the engine requires service. Some important clues are:













Engine misfiring or vibrating severely.

Sudden loss of power.

Unusual engine noises.

Fuel, oil or coolant leaks.

Sudden change, outside the normal oper ating range, in the engine operating tempera ture.

Excessive smoke.



Oil pressure drop.

D

IESEL

P

ARTICULATE

F

ILTER

(DPF)

M

ANUAL

R

EGENERATION

- I

F

E

QUIPPED

On equipped chassis cabs, a manual regeneration can be enable through the instrument cluster. The manual regeneration will allow the DPF to complete a regeneration, lowering the soot level without having to drive the vehicle. The vehicle must be in park to access this feature, and the fuel level must be over 12.5% full. A message displaying the time left on the regeneration will appear on the instrument cluster, and the instrument cluster will display the soot level. Refer to “Instrument

Cluster Display” in “Getting to Know Your


ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

Gas Engine Only

The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille by the right front tow hook.

It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for storage when not in use for the Winter months. During Winter months, remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on the c-clip.

The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the

110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution.

Diesel Engine Only

The engine block heater warms engine coolant and permits quicker starts in cold weather.

Connect the heater cord to a ground-fault interrupter protected 110–115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.

The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood to the right side and can be located just behind the grille near the headlamp.

NOTE:

The engine block heater cord is a factory installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are available from an authorized

Mopar dealer.

The block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the coolant.


WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the

110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution.

NOTE:

The block heater will require 110 Volts AC and

6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.

Block Heater Usage

For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), engine block heater usage is recommended.

For ambient temperatures below –20°F

(-29°C), engine block heater usage is required.

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —

GAS ENGINE

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles

(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical

Specifications”.

CAUTION!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight

Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result.

NOTE:

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera tion. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.

Please check your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during the break in period. Add oil as required.


ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —

DIESEL ENGINE

The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine does not require a break-in period due to its construction.

Normal operation is allowed, providing the following recommendations are followed:





Warm up the engine before placing it under load.

Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged periods.









Use the appropriate transmission gear to prevent engine lugging.

Observe vehicle oil pressure and tempera ture indicators.

Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.

Vary throttle position at highway speeds when carrying or towing significant weight.

NOTE:

Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or no load operation will extend the time before the engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy and power may be seen at this time.

For additional vehicle break-in requirements, refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And

Operating” of the Owner’s Manual.

5



Because of the construction of the Cummins®

Turbo Diesel engine, engine run-in is enhanced by loaded operating conditions which allow the engine parts to achieve final finish and fit during the first 6,000 miles (10,000 km).

DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE (ENGINE

BRAKING)

The purpose of the exhaust brake (engine braking) feature is to supply negative (braking) torque from the engine. Typically, the engine braking is used for, but not limited to, vehicle towing applications where vehicle braking can be achieved by the internal engine power, thereby sparing the mechanical brakes of the vehicle.

Benefits of the exhaust brake are:



Vehicle driving control.







Reduced brake fade.

Longer brake life.

Faster cab warm-up.

The exhaust brake feature will only function when the driver toggles it on by pushing the exhaust brake button until the “Exhaust Brake

Indicator” is illuminated. Normal (Full Strength) exhaust brake mode is indicated by a yellow

“Exhaust Brake Indicator”.

WARNING!

Do not use the exhaust brake feature when driving in icy or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control, which may cause an accident possibly resulting in personal injury or death.

Exhaust Brake Switch

Once the "Exhaust Brake Indicator” is illuminated and the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h); the exhaust brake will automatically operate when the driver removes pressure from the accelerator pedal. Exhaust braking is most effective when the engine RPM is higher. The automatic transmission will downshift more aggressively in TOW/HAUL mode when the exhaust brake is enabled to increase brake performance.

CAUTION!

Use of aftermarket exhaust brakes is not recommended and could lead to engine damage

NOTE:

For optimum braking power it is recommended to use the exhaust brake while in TOW/HAUL mode.

The exhaust brake feature can also be used to reduce the engine warm up time. To use the exhaust brake as a warm-up device, the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 5 mph

(8 km/h), the "Exhaust Brake Indicator" must be on, and the coolant temperature must be below

180°F (82°C) and ambient temperature below

60°F (16°C).


Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake

Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake technology delivers smoother, less aggressive exhaust braking characteristics during downhill descents. Although it can apply full exhaust braking force if needed, Automatic “Smart”

Exhaust Brake may not apply obvious braking if the vehicle speed is not increasing. Automatic

“Smart” Exhaust Brake is intended to maintain vehicle speed, while Full Exhaust Brake is intended to reduce vehicle speed.

Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake can be enabled by pushing the exhaust brake button

(on the center stack) again anytime after the normal Full Exhaust Brake has been turned on.

The “Exhaust Brake Indicator” in the instrument cluster display will change from Yellow to Green when Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake is enabled. Pushing the exhaust brake button again will toggle the exhaust brake mode to off.

PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.

The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the parking brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.

Parking Brake Release

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will illuminate.

NOTE:



When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake

Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle.




This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.

The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.

WARNING!



Never use the PARK position as a substi tute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.



Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured.

(Continued)

5



WARNING!

(Continued)



Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil dren, and do not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/

RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.



Be sure the parking brake is fully disen gaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision.



Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.

CAUTION!

If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING!



It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or

NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel erate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.



The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to

PARK, and verify that the transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, and the PARK position is properly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)



Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine

OFF, and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when the ignition is in the OFF mode) the trans mission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.



When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.



Never use the PARK position as a substi tute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.

(Continued)


WARNING!

(Continued)



Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the trans mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.




Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat tended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.



Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil dren), and do not leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!





Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,

NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.



Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

NOTE:

You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK.

I

GNITION

P

ARK

I

NTERLOCK

This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park

Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the

OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode.

NOTE:

The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the

STARTING AND OPERATING 189 engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC mode) before exiting the vehicle.

B

RAKE

/T

RANSMISSION

S

HIFT

I

NTERLOCK

S

YSTEM

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake

Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI) system that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. For vehicles with

8-speed transmission, to shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from

NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. For vehicles with 6-speed transmission, to shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.

The BTSI will timeout if brake pedal is pressed for three minutes or longer continuously while in park. It can be reset by releasing the brake for more then three seconds, then reapplying the brake pedal or cycling the ignition.

5



S

IX

–S

PEED

A

UTOMATIC

T

RANSMISSION

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

Chassis Cab models (with automatic transmission) may use either the AS66RC or

AS69RC transmission (which are equipped with a Power Take-Off (PTO) access cover on the side of the transmission case).

The transmission gear position display (located in the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. The gear selector is mounted on the right side of the steering column. You must press the brake pedal to move the gear selector out of PARK refer to

“Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section. To drive, move the gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.

Pull the gear selector toward you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of

PARK.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.

The transmission gear selector has only PARK,

REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions.

Manual downshifts can be made using the

Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control.

Pushing the ERS (-/+) switches (on the steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear, and will display that gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to "Electronic Range Select

(ERS) Operation" in this section for further information. Some models will display both the selected gear limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.

Gear Ranges

Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE:

After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK (P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use

PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

NOTE:

On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position.

When exiting the vehicle, always:









Apply the parking brake.

Shift the transmission into PARK.

Turn the engine off.

Remove the key fob.


WARNING!






Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the trans mission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.





(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)



Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine

OFF, and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when the ignition is in the OFF mode), the trans mission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.



When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

(Continued)


WARNING!

(Continued)







Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil dren), and do not leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

5

CAUTION!



Before moving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must turn the igni tion to the ON/RUN mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result.

(Continued)



CAUTION!

(Continued)



DO NOT race the engine when shifting from

PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK position:



When shifting into PARK, pull the gear selector toward you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it stops.





Release the gear selector and make sure it is fully seated in the PARK gate.

Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).



With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward.

Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into

PARK if you must exit the vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in

NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in

“Starting And Operating” and “Towing A

Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.

DRIVE (D)

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive FIRST, SECOND, and THIRD gears, direct FOURTH gear and overdrive FIFTH and SIXTH gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs

(such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select

(ERS) shift control refer to “Electronic Range

Select (ERS) Operation” in this section for further information to select a lower gear range.

Under these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating.

If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger of overheating, the “Transmission

Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down.


NOTE:

Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a significant addi tional heat load on the cooling system. Down shifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to

NEUTRAL (when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this excess heat generation.

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section.

On trucks with AS66RC or AS69RC transmission, FIFTH and SIXTH gears may be inhibited briefly on cold starts below 41°F

(5°C), and during very cold temperatures (-4°F

[-20°C] or below), operation may briefly be limited to third gear only. During this condition, the ability of the vehicle to accelerate under heavily loaded conditions may be reduced. In all cases, normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp

Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in THIRD gear (for

AS66RC/AS69RC transmission) regardless of which forward gear is selected. If an AS66RC/

AS69RC equipped truck enters Limp Home

Mode at highway speeds, it will initially engage

FIFTH gear, until the vehicle slows to a speed where THIRD gear can be engaged. PARK,

REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:


1. Stop the vehicle.


3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.

4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.

NOTE:

Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. An autho rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.

Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation

The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (FOURTH gear), the transmission will not shift above FOURTH gear, but will shift through the lower gears normally.

5



You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-) switch will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping

(-) or (+) will change the top available gear.

Electronic Range Select

1 — GEAR + Switch

2 — GEAR – Switch

To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the ERS

(+) switch until the gear limit display disappears from the instrument cluster.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.

NOTE:

To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration (engine braking), simply push and hold the ERS (-) switch. The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.

CAUTION!

When using ERS for engine braking while descending steep grades, be careful not to overspeed the engine. Apply the brakes as needed to prevent engine overspeed.

Overdrive Operation

The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive (FIFTH and

SIXTH gears). The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:













The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.

The transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature.

The engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature.

Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.

The TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.

The driver is not heavily pressing the acceler ator.

Torque Converter Clutch

A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.

NOTE:



The torque converter clutch will not engage, until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm (usually after 1 to 3 miles

(2 to 5 km) of driving). Because engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmis -


 sion is not shifting properly when cold. This is normal. Using the Electronic Range Select

(ERS) shift control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of

Overdrive.

If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission. This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission.

The torque converter will refill within five seconds after starting the engine.

When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode

When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, push the TOW/

HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When operating in

TOW/HAUL mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission will automatically downshift (for engine braking) when the throttle is closed and/or during steady braking maneuvers.

TOW/HAUL Switch

The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/

HAUL mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores normal operation. Normal operation is always the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.

WARNING!

Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when driving in icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control, which may cause an accident possibly resulting in personal injury or death.


E

IGHT

-S

PEED

A

UTOMATIC

T

RANSMISSION

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic gear selector located on the instrument panel. The transmission gear range

(PRND) is displayed both above the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector.

You must press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds).

To shift past multiple gear ranges at once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the appropriate detent. Select the

DRIVE range for normal driving.

NOTE:

In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector position and the actual transmission gear (for example, driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator will blink continu ously until the selector is returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be completed.

5



The electronically-controlled transmission adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental and road conditions.

The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles

(kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.

The transmission gear selector has only PARK,

REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions.

Manual downshifts can be made using the

Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control.

Pressing the GEAR -/GEAR + switches (on the steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear, and will display that gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to “Electronic

Range Select (ERS) Operation” in this section for further information. Some models will display both the selected gear limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.

Electronic Transmission Gear Selector

Gear Ranges

Do not depress the accelerator pedal when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE:

After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK (P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use

PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

NOTE:

On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position.

When exiting the vehicle, always:



Apply the parking brake.







Shift the transmission into PARK.

Turn the engine off.

Remove the key fob.

WARNING!




(Continued)


WARNING!

(Continued)



Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the transmission gear selector out of

PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before exiting the vehicle.









(Continued)


WARNING!

(Continued)



Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the igni tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.



When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.





(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)



Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil dren), and do not leave the ignition in the

ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!



DO NOT race the engine when shifting from

PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain.



Before moving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the brake pedal.

Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK position:





Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is not blinking.

With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will not move out of PARK.

5



REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward.

Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running.

Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in

NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in

“Starting And Operating” and “Towing A

Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information.

DRIVE (D)

This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs

(such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL mode or use the

Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control refer to "Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation" in this section for further information to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F

[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp

Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the engine may stall.

In some situations, the transmission may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions may be necessary.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:

NOTE:

In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates the transmission may not re-engage after engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired location (preferably, at an authorized dealer).


1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift the transmission to

NEUTRAL.

3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine turns off.

4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.

NOTE:

Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. An autho rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.


Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation

The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (FOURTH gear), the transmission will not shift above FOURTH gear (except to prevent engine overspeed), but will shift through the lower gears normally.

You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed. When the transmission gear selector is in DRIVE, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears. Tapping the GEAR – switch (on the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the GEAR – or GEAR + switch will change the top available gear.

1 — GEAR + Switch

2 — GEAR – Switch

ERS Control

To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the

GEAR + switch until the gear limit display disappears from the instrument cluster.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury.

5



When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode

When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, push the TOW/

HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting.

TOW/HAUL Switch

The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/

HAUL mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores normal operation. Normal operation is always the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.

WARNING!

Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when driving in icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control, which may cause an accident possibly resulting in personal injury or death.

AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED

There can be up to six auxiliary switches located in the lower switch bank of the instrument panel which can be used to power various electronic devices and PTO (Power Take Off) – If Equipped.

If Power Take Off is equipped, it will take the place of the sixth Auxiliary switch. Connections to the switches are found under the hood in the connectors attached to the auxiliary Power

Distribution Center.

You have the ability to configure the functionality of the auxiliary switches via the instrument cluster display. All switches can now be configured for setting the switch type operation to latching or momentary, power source of either battery or ignition, and ability to hold last state across key cycles.

NOTE:

Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition.

For further information on using the auxiliary switches, please refer to the Ram Body Builders

Guide by accessing https:// www.ramtrucks.com/body-builders-guide.html and choosing the appropriate links.

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF

EQUIPPED

Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted transfer case. Refer to the operating instructions for your transfer case, located in this section for further information.

E

LECTRONICALLY

S

HIFTED

T

RANSFER

C

ASE

(E

IGHT

-S

PEED

T

RANSMISSION

) —

I

F

E

QUIPPED

This is an electronically shifted transfer case and is operated by the 4WD Control Switch

(Transfer Case Switch), which is located on the instrument panel.


Four-Position Transfer Case

This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode positions:





Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)

Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH)





Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)

N (Neutral)

For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below:

2WD

Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.

4WD HIGH

Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range provides torque to the front driveshaft (engages four-wheel drive) which allows front and rear wheels to spin at the same speed. This provides additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

4WD LOW

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque (increased torque over 4WD

HIGH) to the front driveshaft, allowing front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h) in this range.

N (Neutral)

N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain.

To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in this section for further information.


WARNING!



You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case N (NEUTRAL) posi tion disengages both the front and rear drive shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the trans mission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.





5



This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD) for normal street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads. Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.

When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by pushing the desired position on the 4WD control switch.

Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific shifting instructions.

The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

Driving in the 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.

NOTE:

The transfer case Neutral button is located in the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer case Neutral position is to be used for recreational towing only. Refer to

“Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Oper ating” for further information.

Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights

The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights

(4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection. When you select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights will do the following:

If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:

1. The current position indicator light will turn off.

2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.

3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain on.

If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions

Are Not Met:

1. The indicator light for the current position will remain on.

2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.

3. The transfer case will not shift.

NOTE:

Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met. To retry the selection, push the current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the “Shifting Proce dure” for your transfer case, located in this section.

The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronically shifted four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required.

WARNING!

Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD

Warning Light” is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal injury or death.

NOTE:

Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to driveline components.


When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4WD HIGH positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

Shifting Procedure

NOTE:





If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift. The position indi cator light for the previous position will remain on and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met.

If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met, the current position indicator light will turn off, the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.

When the shift is complete, the position indi cator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain on.

2WD To 4WD HIGH

Push the desired position on the 4WD control switch to shift the transfer case. Shifts between

2WD and 4WD HIGH can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/ disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either running or off. This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.

NOTE:

The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD/4WD HIGH if the front and/or rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light will remain on. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.


2WD Or 4WD HIGH To 4WD LOW

NOTE:

When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occu pants.

Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use either of the following procedures:

Preferred Procedure

1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).

2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

3. While still rolling, push the desired position on the transfer case control switch.

4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

Alternate Procedure

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

5



3. Push the desired position on the transfer case control switch.


NOTE:



If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alter nate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift, then the desired posi tion indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is on, until all requirements have been met.



The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON position, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

E

LECTRONICALLY

S

HIFTED

T

RANSFER

C

ASE

(S

IX

S

PEED

T

RANSMISSION

) — I

F

E

QUIPPED

The electronically shifted transfer case is operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer

Case Switch), which is located on the instrument panel.

Four-Position/On-Demand Transfer Case

This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode positions:





Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)

Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH)





Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)

N (Neutral)


2WD

Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.

4WD HIGH

Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

4WD LOW

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph

(40 km/h).

N (Neutral)


To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in this section for further information.


WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.

This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal street and highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced roads.

When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control

Switch to the desired position.

Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific shifting instructions.

The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

Driving in the 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.

NOTE:

The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control

Switch. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only. Refer to

“Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Oper ating” for further information.

Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights

The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights

(4WD and 4WD LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection. When you select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights will do the following:

If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:

1. The current position indicator light will turn off.

2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.

3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain on.


If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions

Are Not Met:

1. The indicator light for the current position will remain on.

2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.

3. The transfer case will not shift.

NOTE:

Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn the control switch back to the current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the "Shifting Procedure" for your transfer case, located in this section.

The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronically shifted four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required.

5



WARNING!

Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD

Warning Light” is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal injury.

NOTE:

Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to driveline components.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4WD HIGH positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain.


Shifting Procedure

NOTE:



If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift. The position indi cator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met. To retry a shift: return the control switch back to the original position, make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.



If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met, the current position indicator light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.

When the shift is complete, the position indi cator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

2WD To 4WD HIGH

Push the desired position on the 4WD control switch to shift the transfer case. Shifts between

2WD and 4WD HIGH can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/ disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either running or off. This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.

NOTE:

The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD/4WD HIGH if the front and/or rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light will remain on. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.


2WD Or 4WD HIGH To 4WD LOW

NOTE:

When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occu pants.

Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use either of the following procedures:

Preferred Procedure

1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).

2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

3. While still rolling, push the desired position on the transfer case control switch.


Alternate Procedure

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

3. Push the desired position on the transfer case control switch.


NOTE:



If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alter nate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift, then the desired posi tion indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is on, until all requirements have been met.



The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON position, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

M

ANUALLY

S

HIFTED

T

RANSFER

C

ASE

—

I

F

E

QUIPPED

The transfer case provides four mode positions:









Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H)

Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4H)

N (Neutral)

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L)



2H

Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.

4H

Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

N (Neutral)


To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in


4L

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

5



This transfer case is intended to be driven in the

2H position for normal street and highway conditions such as dry, hard surfaced roads.

When additional traction is required, the 4H and

4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.

This is accomplished by simply moving the gear selector to the desired positions once the appropriate speed and gear requirements are met, refer to “Shifting Procedure – Manually

Shifted Transfer Case” in this section for further information.

The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry, hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.

The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is in four-wheel drive and that the front and rear driveshafts are locked together.

This light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L position. There is no light for the 2H or Neutral positions on some models.

When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the

2H or 4H positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause damage to the drivetrain.

NOTE:

Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to driveline components.


NOTE:

Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.

Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H)

Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.

Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4H)

Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.


N (Neutral)

Neutral — This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle.

Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And


Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L)

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

CAUTION!

Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating the vehicle on dry pavement. Driveline hardware damage can result.

Shifting Procedure — Manually Shifted

Transfer Case

2H To 4H

Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion, shifts can be made up to 55 mph

(88 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever.

2H Or 4H To 4L

NOTE:

When shifting into or out of 4L some gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.

With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to

5 km/h), shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to

5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in transfer case Neutral.

NOTE:





Pausing in transfer case Neutral in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may require shutting the engine off to avoid gear clash while completing the shift. If diffi culty occurs, shift the transmission into

Neutral, hold your foot on the brake, and turn the engine OFF. Complete the range shift to the desired mode.

Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped, however diffi -


 culty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling

2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).

Do not attempt to shift into or out of 4L while the transmission is in gear.

Transfer Case Position Indicator Light

The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving.

LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL

The limited-slip differential provides additional traction on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when there is a difference between the traction characteristics of the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs similarly to a conventional differential.

On slippery surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better traction.

5



The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction. When starting with only one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight momentary application of the parking brake may be necessary to gain maximum traction.

WARNING!

On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose control of the vehicle.

Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn.

POWER TAKE OFF (PTO) OPERATION — IF

EQUIPPED

This vehicle when equipped with PTO Prep and the AS66RC/AS69RC automatic six-speed, will allow for an aftermarket upfit with a transmission driven PTO (power take off). The customer will have the ability to operate the PTO in either a “stationary”, “mobile” or “remote” mode. The vehicles will be factory set to the

“stationary” mode. To select a different mode, or to change any other PTO setting, you will need to enter the commercial vehicle menu on the instrument cluster screen. Details of the

PTO selection modes and further PTO information is available at the Ram Truck

Bodybuilders web site: https:// www.ramtrucks.com/body-builders-guide.html

POWER STEERING

H

YDRAULIC

P

OWER

S

TEERING

The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost.

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.

NOTE:





Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system.

Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system.

CAUTION!

Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur.


Power Steering Fluid Check

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Check fluid level when the engine is cold and off.

Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.

WARNING!

Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill.

Use only manufacturer's recommended power steering fluid.

spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to “Fluids

And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.

SPEED CONTROL

When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than

20 mph (32 km/h), or 25 mph (40 km/h), depending on the powertrain used.

The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components.

Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any

Speed Control Buttons

1 — On/Off Button

2 — CANCEL

3 — RES (+)

4 — SET (-)


NOTE:

In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed

Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed

Control system can be reactivated by pushing the Speed Control on/off button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

T

O

A

CTIVATE

Push the on/off button to activate the Speed

Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off button a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use.

WARNING!

Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.

5



T

O

S

ET

A D

ESIRED

S

PEED

Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

NOTE:

The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the

SET (-) button.

T

O

V

ARY

T

HE

S

PEED

S

ETTING

To Increase Speed

When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button.

The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings (if equipped). Refer to “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)



Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse quent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph.



If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)





Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse quent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.

If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

To Decrease Speed

When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.

The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings (if equipped). Refer to “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)



Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse quent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph.



If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.






Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse quent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.

If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established.

T

O

A

CCELERATE

F

OR

P

ASSING

Press the accelerator as you would normally.

When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Using Speed Control On Hills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed.

NOTE:

The Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.


On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without

Speed Control.

WARNING!

Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed.

Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

T

O

R

ESUME

S

PEED

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES

(+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

T

O

D

EACTIVATE

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the

CANCEL button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed

Control without erasing the set speed from memory.

Pushing the on/off button, or placing the ignition in the OFF position, erases the set speed from memory.

The following conditions will also deactivate the

Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory:









Vehicle parking brake is applied

Stability event occurs

Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE

Engine overspeed occurs

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF

EQUIPPED

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving convenience provided by cruise control while traveling on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed

Control function performs differently. Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.

ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.

NOTE:



If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.




If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,

ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate

(not to exceed the original set speed) auto matically to maintain a preset following distance, while matching the speed of the vehicle ahead.

The Cruise Control system has two control modes:





Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main taining an appropriate distance between vehicles.

Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to “Normal

(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section.

NOTE:

Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode selected.

You can change the mode by using the Cruise

Control buttons. The two control modes function differently. Always confirm which mode is selected.

5



WARNING!



Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve nience system. It is not a substitute for active driver involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.



The ACC system:





Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).

Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon adverse sight distance conditions.



Does not always fully recognize complex driving conditions, which can result in wrong or missing distance warnings.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)



Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle for approximately two seconds in the stop position. At this point, there will be an “ACC may cancel soon” chime and warning to the driver.

When ACC is cancelled, the system will release the brakes and the driver must take over braking. The system can be resumed when the target vehicle drives off by releasing the brake and pushing the resume button on the steering wheel.

You should switch off the ACC system:



When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex driving situ ations (i.e., in highway construction zones).



When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp; when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.





When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.

When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a constant speed.

A

O

DAPTIVE

C

PERATION

RUISE

C

ONTROL

(ACC)

The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the steering wheel) operate the ACC system.

Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons

1 — Adaptive Cruise Control On/Off Button

2 — Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control On/Off

Button

3 — CANCEL

4 — Distance Button

5 — RES (+)

6 — SET (-)

NOTE:

Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica tions to the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward

Collision Warning System.



A

CTIVATING

A

DAPTIVE

C

RUISE

C

ONTROL

(ACC)

You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).

The minimum set speed for the ACC system is

20 mph (32 km/h).

When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the instrument cluster display will read

“ACC Ready.”

When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Off.”

NOTE:

You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:





When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.

When you apply the brakes.











When the parking brake is applied.

When the automatic transmission is in PARK,

REVERSE or NEUTRAL.

When the vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.

When the brakes are overheated.

When the driver door is open at low speed.





When the driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speed.

When Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Full

Off mode is active.

T

O

A

CTIVATE

/D

EACTIVATE

Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control

(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”


To turn the system off, push and release the

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will show

“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”


WARNING!

Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave the system off when you are not using it.

T

O

S

ET

A D

ESIRED

ACC S

PEED

When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the SET (-) button and release. The instrument cluster display will show the set speed.

5



If the system is set when the vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is set when the vehicle speed is above

20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current speed of the vehicle.

NOTE:

ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after the ACC has been set. If you do not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:



The message “ACC DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the instrument cluster display.



The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be determined by the position of the accelerator pedal.

T

O

C

ANCEL

The following conditions cancel the system:



The brake pedal is applied.





The CANCEL button is pushed.

An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.



















The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.

The Electronic Stability Control/Traction

Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.

The vehicle parking brake is applied.

Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.

Driver door is opened at low speeds.

A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.

The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.

The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).

The trailer brake is applied manually (if equipped).

T

O

T

URN

O

FF

The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory if:







The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is pushed.

The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/ off button is pushed.

The ignition is placed in the OFF position.



You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.

T

O

R

ESUME

If there is a set speed in memory push the RES

(+) button and then remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display will display the last set speed.

NOTE:





While in ACC mode when the vehicle comes to a complete stop longer than two seconds, the system will cancel. The driver will have to apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.

ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity.

WARNING!

The Resume function should only be used if traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

T

O

V

ARY

T

HE

S

PEED

S

ETTING

To Increase Speed

While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by pushing the RES (+) button.


The speed increment shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric

(km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)






If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.







If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.

To Decrease Speed

While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by pushing the SET (-) button.

The speed decrement shown is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric

(km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)






If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.







If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.

NOTE:



When you override and push the RES (+) button or SET (-) button, the new set speed will be the current speed of the vehicle.








When you use the SET (-) button to decel erate, if the engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system will automatically slow the vehicle.

The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop when following the vehicle in front.

If your vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill, your vehicle will release the brakes two seconds after coming to a complete stop.

The ACC system maintains set speed when driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to main tain set speed. When driving uphill and down hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds normal range

(over heated).

5

S

ETTING

T

HE

F

OLLOWING

D

ISTANCE

I

N

ACC

The specified following distance for ACC can be set by varying the distance setting between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars



(medium) and one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the instrument cluster display.

Distance Settings

1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)

2 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)

3 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)

4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)

The system automatically defaults to the longest distance setting. To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Button and release. Each time the button is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar. Once the shortest setting is reached, if the button is pushed again it will reset to the default setting

(longest).

If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the same lane, the instrument cluster displays the ACC Set With

Target Indicator Light, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set speed.

The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:





The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set speed.

The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the sensor.





The distance setting is changed.

The system disengages. (Refer to “Activate/

Deactivate” in this section).

The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if necessary.

NOTE:

The brake lights will illuminate whenever the

ACC system applies the brakes.

A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking capacity.

Brake Alert

NOTE:

The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a warning for the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean that the

Forward Collision Warning system is applying the brakes autonomously.

Trailer Detect — If Equipped

When a trailer is detected, the ACC system automatically defaults to the longest setting

(four bars). The setting can be overridden by pushing the Distance Button on the steering wheel.


O

VERTAKE

A

ID

When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on the left hand side.

ACC O

PERATION

A

T

S

TOP

In the event that the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the need for any driver action.

If the vehicle ahead does not start moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime. The driver must now manually operate the vehicle's accelerator and brakes.

While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver door is opened, the ACC system will cancel and the brakes will release. Driver intervention will be required at this moment.

WARNING!

When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.

Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury.

A

DAPTIVE

C

RUISE

C

ONTROL

(ACC)

M

ENU

The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC system settings. The instrument cluster display is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The information it displays depends on ACC system status.

Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button (located on the steering wheel) until one of the following appears in the instrument cluster display:



When ACC is deactivated, the display will read

“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”


When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”

Adaptive Cruise Control Set

When the RES (+) or the SET(-) button (located on the steering wheel) is pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.”

When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument cluster display.

The ACC screen may display once again if any of the following ACC activity occurs:











System Cancel

Driver Override

System Off

ACC Proximity Warning

ACC Unavailable Warning

The instrument cluster display will return to the last display selected after five seconds of no ACC display activity

5



D

ISPLAY

W

ARNINGS

A

ND

M

AINTENANCE

“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of

Vehicle” Warning

The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar

Sensor” warning will display and a chime will sound when conditions temporarily limit system performance.

This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will display

“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar

Sensor” and the system will deactivate.

The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar

Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow).

The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.

NOTE:

If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar

Sensor” warning is active, Normal (Fixed Speed)

Cruise Control is still available. For additional information refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed)

Cruise Control Mode” in this section.

If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located in the camera in the center of the windshield, on the forward side of the rearview mirror.

To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is important to note the following maintenance items:







Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully clear the windshield.

Do not remove any screws from the sensor.

Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and require a sensor realignment.

Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an

ACC system failure or malfunction.

When the condition that deactivated the system is no longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by simply reactivating it.

NOTE:





If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front

Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently

(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your authorized dealer.

Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.

“Clean Front Windshield” Warning

The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean

Front Windshield” warning will display and a chime will sound when conditions temporarily limit system performance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield, driving directly into the sun and fog

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221 on the inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will show “ACC/FCW

Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance.

The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean

Front Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.

If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should examine the windshield and the camera located on the back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.

When the condition that created limited functionality is no longer present, the system will return to full functionality.

NOTE:

If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean

Front Windshield” message occurs frequently

(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the windshield and forward facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.

Service ACC/FCW Warning

If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service

Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service

Required”, there may be an internal system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.

P

RECAUTIONS

W

HILE

D

RIVING

W

ITH

ACC

In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to intervene.

NOTE:



Aftermarket add-ons such as snow plows, lift kits, and brush/grille bars can hinder module performance. Ensure the radar/camera has no obstructions in the field of view.








Height modifications can limit module perfor mance and functionality.

Do not put stickers or easy passes over the camera/radar field of view.

Any modifications to the vehicle that may obstruct the field of view of the radar/camera are not recommended.

Cleaning Instructions

Dust and dirt can accumulate on the cover and block the camera lens. Clean the camera lens with a soft microfiber cloth, being careful not to damage or scratch the module.

Towing A Trailer

ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only with an Integrated Trailer Brake Controller.

Aftermarket trailer brake controllers will not activate the trailer brakes when ACC is braking.

Offset Driving

ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.

5



The offset vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly.

Offset Driving Condition Example

Turns And Bends

When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume your original set speed. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.

NOTE:

On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.

Turn Or Bend Example

Using ACC On Hills

When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.

Lane Changing

ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane.

There may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Lane Changing Example

ACC Hill Example


Narrow Vehicles

Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.

Narrow Vehicle Example

Stationary Objects And Vehicles

ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.

Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example

G

ENERAL

I

NFORMATION

















NOTE:


5



N

ORMAL

(F

IXED

S

PEED

) C

RUISE

C

ONTROL

M

ODE

In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a

Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The

Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Speed Control can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph

(32 km/h).

To change between the different control modes, push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button which turns the ACC on and the Normal

(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off. Pushing of the

Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to) the

Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.

WARNING!

In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode, the system will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

Always be aware which mode is selected.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise

Control on. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the

RES (+) or SET (-) button and release.

Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has been set a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET

TO MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating what speed was set. This light will turn on when the system is turned on via the on/off control. It turns green when the cruise control is set.

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the

RES (+) button.

The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings. Refer to

”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To

Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed increment shown is dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric

(km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph)






If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.








If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.

To Decrease Speed

When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the

SET (-) button.

The driver's preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings. Refer to

”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To

Know Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric

(km/h) units:

U.S. Speed (mph)






If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.







If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the button is released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the instrument cluster display.

To Cancel

The following conditions will cancel the Normal

(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearing the memory:





The brake pedal is applied.

The CANCEL button is pushed.







The Electronic Stability Control/Traction

Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.

The vehicle parking brake is applied.

The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).






The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position.

The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES

(+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Turn Off

The system will turn off and erase the set speed in memory if:









The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/ off button is pushed.

The ignition is placed in the OFF position.

You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.

The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is pushed.

PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF

EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up (e.g. during a parking

5


226 STARTING AND OPERATING maneuver). Refer to “ParkSense System Usage

Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system and recommendations.

ParkSense will retain the last system state

(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense Rear Park Assist can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE. If

ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately

7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the system's operating speed, a warning will appear within the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).

P

ARK

S

ENSE

S

ENSORS

For the 3500, 4500 and 5500 Chassis Cab vehicles, the rear ParkSense sensors are shipped loose. Please refer to the Ram Body

Builder’s Guide for more information.

The four ParkSense sensors are to be located in the rear fascia/bumper, and monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.

The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to

79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/ bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

NOTE:

If equipped as a dually, the ParkSense system has six rear sensors to assist in detection around the dually flares.

P

ARK

S

ENSE

W

ARNING

D

ISPLAY

The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.



P

ARK

S

ENSE

D

ISPLAY

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will turn on indicating the system status.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more of the rear regions (left/center/right) based on the object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an object is detected in one or more of the rear regions, the display will show a single solid arc in these regions and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.

Single 1/2 Second Tone


Slow Tone

Slow Tone

Fast Tone

Fast Tone


Continuous Tone

5



The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

WARNING ALERTS

Rear Distance

(inches/cm)

Greater than

79 inches

(200 cm)

79-59 inches

(200-150 cm)

59-47 inches

(150-120 cm)

47-39 inches

(120-100 cm)

39-25 inches

(100-65 cm)

25-12 inches

(65-30 cm)

Less than

12 inches

(30 cm)

Audible Alert

Chime

Arcs-Left

Arcs-Center

Arcs-Right

Radio Volume

Reduced

None

None

None

None

No

Single 1/2

Second Tone

None

6th Solid

None

Yes

Slow

None

5th Solid

None

Yes

Slow

None

4th Solid

None

Yes

Fast

None

3rd Flashing

None

Yes

Fast

2nd Flashing

2nd Flashing

2nd Flashing

Yes

Continuous

1st Flashing

1st Flashing

1st Flashing

Yes

NOTE:

ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

Adjustable Chime Volume Settings

The rear chime volume settings are programmable through the Uconnect system.


The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high. The factory default volume is medium.

E

NABLING

A

ND

D

ISABLING

P

ARK

S

ENSE

ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch.

When the gear selector is moved to

REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show the vehicle graphic with “Off” over the arcs for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

NOTE:

The ParkSense system will automatically disable when the system detects that a trailer with trailer brakes has been connected to the

Integrated Trailer Brake Module. The instru ment cluster display will show an “Off” message over the arcs if the ParkSense system is off, or a “Trailer” message if the system is on, for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.


The ParkSense switch LED will be on when

ParkSense is disabled or defective. The

ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system is enabled.

If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system is disabled or requires service, the

ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.

S

ERVICE

T

HE

P

ARK

S

ENSE

R

EAR

P

ARK

A

SSIST

S

YSTEM

During vehicle start up, when the Rear

ParkSense System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will show the "Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service

Required" or the "Rear ParkSense Unavailable

Wipe Sensors" message.

When the gear selector is moved into REVERSE, a vehicle graphic will show in the instrument cluster display, along with the display overlay

“Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Sensors.” If the system needs service, the display overlay will read “Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service

Required” Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate.

If "Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Sensors" appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.

If "Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service

Required" appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.

C

LEANING

T

HE

P

ARK

S

ENSE

S

YSTEM

Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.

Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

P

ARK

S

ENSE

S

YSTEM

U

SAGE

P

RECAUTIONS

NOTE:





Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park -

Sense system operating properly.

Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra tions could affect the performance of Park -

Sense.










When you move the gear selector into

REVERSE with ParkSense turned off, the instrument cluster display will show "Off" on the vehicle graphic arcs for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.

Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them.

The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working prop erly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.

Ensure the ParkSense system is off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed on the fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the

“Wipe Sensors” message or providing false alerts.

5



WARNING!



Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.



Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.

Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indica tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

CAUTION!



ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.



The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.

PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST

The ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear, and/or front fascia/bumper, and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver).

Refer to “ParkSense System Usage

Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system and recommendations.

ParkSense will retain the last system state

(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these gear selector positions, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph

(11 km/h) or above. A warning will appear in the instrument cluster display when the vehicle is in

REVERSE, indicating the vehicle is above

ParkSense operating speed. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately

6 mph (9 km/h).

P

ARK

S

ENSE

S

ENSORS

For the 3500, 4500 and 5500 Chassis Cab vehicles, the rear ParkSense sensors are shipped loose. Please refer to the Ram Body

Builder’s Guide for more information.

The four ParkSense sensors are to be located in the rear fascia/bumper, and monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.




79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/ bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

NOTE:

If equipped as a dually, the ParkSense system has six rear sensors to assist in detection around the dually flares.

The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.


47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/ bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.

P

ARK

S

ENSE

W

ARNING

D

ISPLAY

The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument



P

ARK

S

ENSE

D

ISPLAY

The warning display will turn on indicating the system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in one or more of the rear regions (left/center/right) based on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.

Single 1/2 Second Tone

Slow Tone

5



Slow Tone For Rear Only

Fast Tone For Rear Only

Fast Tone

If an obstacle is detected in one or more of the rear regions (left/center/right), the display will show a single arc in the left, center, or rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.

Continuous Tone



The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:

WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR

Rear Distance (inches/cm)

Greater than

79 inches

(200 cm)

79-59 inches

(200-150 cm)

59-47 inches

(150-120 cm)

47-39 inches

(120-100 cm)

39-25 inches

(100-65 cm)

25-12 inches

(65-30 cm)

Less than

12 inches

(30 cm)

Audible Alert Chime

Arcs-Left

Arcs-Center

Arcs-Right

Radio Volume Reduced

None

None

None

None

No

Single 1/2

Second Tone

None

6th Solid

None

Yes

Slow

None

5th Solid

None

Yes

Slow

None

4th Solid

None

Yes

Fast Fast

None 2nd Flashing

3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing

None 2nd Flashing

Yes Yes

Continuous

1st Flashing

1st Flashing

1st Flashing

Yes

5

Front Distance (inches/cm)

Audible Alert Chime

Arcs-Left

Arcs-Center

Arcs-Right

Radio Volume Reduced

Greater than

47 inches (120 cm)

None

None

None

None

No

WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT

47-39 inches

(120-100 cm)

None

None

4th Solid

None

No

39-25 inches

(100-65 cm)

None

None

3rd Flashing

None

No

NOTE:

ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

25-12 inches

(65-30 cm)

Fast

2nd Flashing

2nd Flashing

2nd Flashing

Yes

Less than 12 inches

(30 cm)

Continuous

1st Flashing

1st Flashing

1st Flashing

Yes



Front Park Assist Audible Alerts

ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied.

Adjustable Chime Volume Settings

The Front and Rear chime volume settings are programmable through the Uconnect system.


The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high. The factory default volume is medium.

E

NABLING

A

ND

D

ISABLING

F

RONT

A

ND

/O

R

R

EAR

P

ARK

S

ENSE

Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Front ParkSense switch.

Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Rear ParkSense switch.

When the gear selector is moved to

REVERSE and the Front or Rear system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show a vehicle graphic with an “Off” message overlay over the system that is off (Front or Rear system). This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be off when the Front or Rear system is enabled. If the Front or Rear

ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the

LED will be on.

S

ERVICE

T

HE

P

ARK

S

ENSE

F

RONT

/

R

EAR

P

ARK

A

SSIST

S

YSTEM

During vehicle start up, when the Front/Rear

ParkSense System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will show the "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable

Service Required" or the "Front/Rear

ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Sensors" message.

When the gear selector is moved into REVERSE, a vehicle graphic will show in the instrument cluster display, along with the display overlay

“Wipe Sensors.” If the system needs service, the display overlay will read “Service.” Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate.

If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe

Sensors" appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.

If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service

Required" appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer.

C

LEANING

T

HE

P

ARK

S

ENSE

S

YSTEM

Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.

Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.

P

ARK

S

ENSE

S

YSTEM

U

SAGE

P

RECAUTIONS

NOTE:





Ensure that the front and rear bumpers are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly.

Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra tions could affect the performance of Park -

Sense.










When you move the gear selector to the

REVERSE position and Front or Rear Park -

Sense is turned off, the instrument cluster display will show "Off" on the vehicle graphic arcs. This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.

Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them.

The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working prop erly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/ bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.

Ensure the ParkSense system is off if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed on the fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the

“Wipe Front/Rear Sensors” message or providing false alerts.

WARNING!



Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.



Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.

Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indica tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.


CAUTION!



ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity.



The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.

LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED

L

ANE

S

ENSE

O

PERATION

The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph

(180 km/h). It uses a forward looking camera to detect lane markings and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries.

When both lane markings are detected and the driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane while no turn signal has been applied OR the driver departs the lane on the opposite side of the applied turn signal (if the left turn signal is

5


236 STARTING AND OPERATING applied and the vehicle departs to the right), the

LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries. The LaneSense system will also provide a visual warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.

The driver may manually override the haptic warning by applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.

When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver unintentionally drifts across that lane marking (no turn signal applied), the

LaneSense system provides a visual warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver to remain within the lane.

When only a single lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.

NOTE:

When operating conditions have been met, the

LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and provides an audible and visual warning to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.

T

URNING

L

ANE

The LaneSense button is located on the switch panel below the Uconnect display.

S

ENSE

O

N

O

R

O

FF

NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch

Uconnect Display screen, the LaneSense button is located above the display.

To turn the LaneSense system on, push the

LaneSense button (LED turns off). A

“LaneSense On” message is shown in the instrument cluster display.

Lane Sense On Message

To turn the LaneSense system off, push the

LaneSense button again (LED turns on).

NOTE:

The LaneSense system will retain the last system state (on or off) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/

RUN position.

L

ANE

S

ENSE

W

ARNING

M

ESSAGE

The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift condition through the instrument cluster display.

When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.

System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale


Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected





When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane -

Sense Telltale is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display if an uninten tional lane departure occurs on the left side.

When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane depar ture situation, the visual warning in the instrument cluster display will show the left lane line flashing yellow (on/off). The Lane -

Sense telltale changes from solid white to flashing yellow.

NOTE:

The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for a right lane departure when only the right lane marking has been detected.

Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines

Detected



When the LaneSense system is on, and both the lane markings have been detected, the system is "armed" to provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster display and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an uninten tional lane departure occurs. The lane lines turn from gray to white and the LaneSense telltale is solid green.




When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left lane line turns solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes from solid green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.

For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.

5

Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With Yellow

Telltale

Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With Green Telltale



Lane Approached (Solid Yellow Lane Line) With Solid

Yellow Telltale

When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane depar ture situation, the left lane line flashes yellow

(on/off). The LaneSense telltale changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane boundary.



For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.

Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With

Flashing Yellow Telltale

NOTE:

The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for a right lane departure.

C

HANGING

L

ANE

S

ENSE

S

TATUS

The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity (Low/Medium/High) of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity (Early/

Medium/Late) that you can configure through the Uconnect system screen. Refer to


NOTE:







When enabled the system operates above

37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph

(180 km/h).

Use of the turn signal suppresses the warn ings.

The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control

System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward

Collision Warning, etc.).

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA

Your vehicle may be equipped with the

ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into

REVERSE or whenever it is initiated through the

"Backup Camera" button in the "Controls" menu. Whenever the gear selector is put into

REVERSE, the image will be displayed in the rearview mirror display (if equipped) or

Uconnect screen (if equipped). If the image is displayed in the Uconnect screen, a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings” will display across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.

NOTE:

For the 3500, 4500, and 5500 Chassis Cab vehicles, the Rear Backup Camera is shipped loose and not installed. Please refer to the Ram

Body Builder’s Guide for more information.

Manual Activation Of The Rear View

Camera:

1. Press the "Controls" button located on the bottom of the Uconnect display.

2. Press the "Backup Camera" icon to turn the

Rear View Camera system on.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE

(with Camera delay turned off), the rear Camera mode is exited and the previous screen appears again.


(with Camera delay turned on), the rear Camera image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting to another gear, unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or the touchscreen button “X” to disable display of the Rear View

Camera image is pressed.


Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated through the "Backup Camera" button in the "Controls" menu, and the vehicle speed is greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a display timer for the image is initiated. The image will continue to be displayed until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds.

NOTE:



If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph

(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be displayed continuously until deactivated via the touchscreen button "X", the transmis sion is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.



The touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the camera image is made available ONLY when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.

Cargo Camera Icons — If Equipped

Backup Camera Touchscreen Button

Cargo Camera Touchscreen Button

AUX Camera Touchscreen Button

If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button is made available to indicate the current active Camera image being displayed whenever the Rear View Camera image is displayed.

If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button to switch the display to Cargo Camera image is made available whenever the Rear

View Camera image is displayed.

A touchscreen button "X" to disable display of the camera image is made available when the vehicle is not in REVERSE gear.

When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the backup camera image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. The active guidelines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.

NOTE:

For further information about how to access and change the programmable features of the

ParkView Rear Backup Camera, refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia.”


A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:

Zones

Red

Yellow

Green

Distance To The Rear

Of The Vehicle

0 - 1 ft

(0 - 30 cm)

1 ft - 6.5 ft

(30 cm - 2m)

6.5 ft or greater

(2 m or greater)

5

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up

Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up.

Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.



CAUTION!



To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.



To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.

NOTE:

If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

Zoom View

When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear selector position,

Zoom View is available. By pressing the

“magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the display screen, the image will zoom in to four times the standard view. Pressing the icon a second time will return the view to the standard

Backup Camera display.

When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view will display the standard Backup

Camera view. If the vehicle is then returned to

REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will automatically resume.

Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).

If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or

REVERSE.

NOTE:





If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or

REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavail able and the icon will appear gray.

While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.

AUX C

AMERA

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two

AUX Cameras, which display a rearview image from the trailer on the touchscreen.

Activation

The AUX Camera is activated by first pressing the Backup Camera, Cargo Camera (if equipped), or Surround View Camera (if equipped) button on the touchscreen, followed by the AUX button located in the upper left corner of the rearview display. The AUX camera can also be activated when the vehicle is in

REVERSE by pressing the AUX button.

If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can switch between each camera by pressing the

AUX1 or AUX2 buttons on the Trailer Camera display.

AUX1 Camera Button

AUX2 Camera Button

Deactivation

The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the

“X” in the upper right corner of the touchscreen.

This will return the display back to the previously displayed screen.


NOTE:







If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX

Camera is connected, the touchscreen will display a blue screen along with the message

“Camera System Unavailable.” The screen can be exited out by pressing the “X” in the upper right hand corner. This will return the display back to the previously displayed screen.

Zoom View is not available with the AUX

Camera feature.

The display will always default to the Trailer

Camera display (AUX 1).

SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — IF

EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with the

Surround View Camera system that allows you to see an on-screen image of the surroundings and top view of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or manually activated via the Uconnect system. The top view of the vehicle will show which doors are open.

The image will be displayed on the touchscreen display along with a caution note “Check Entire

Surroundings” across the top of the screen.

After five seconds, this note will disappear. The

Surround View Camera system is comprised of three sequential cameras located in the front grille and side mirrors, in addition to a fourth

Rear Back Up Camera.

NOTE:





For the 3500, 4500, and 5500 Chassis Cab vehicles, the Rear Backup Camera is shipped loose and not installed. Please refer to the

Ram Body Builder’s Guide for more informa tion.

The Surround View Camera system has programmable settings that may be selected through the Uconnect system. Refer to


When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the rear camera view and top view is the default view of the system (Automatic Activation).


(with camera delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is placed in the OFF position. There is a touchscreen button “X” to disable the display of the camera image.



(with camera delay turned off), the surround view camera mode is exited and the last known screen appears again.

Modes Of Operation

Standard Backup Camera view can be manually activated by selecting “Backup Camera” through the Controls menu within the Uconnect system.

Refer to “Parkview Rear Back Up Camera” in this chapter for more information on activation conditions.

Top View

The Top view will show in the Uconnect system with Rear view and Front view in a split view display. There are integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front and rear of the vehicle.

The arcs will change color from yellow to red corresponding the distance zones to the oncoming object.

The fifth button of the ParkSense Camera View screen will change based on vehicle options. If not equipped with a Cargo Camera or Trailer

Reverse Guidance, the Backup Camera soft button will be displayed. If equipped with a

Cargo Camera but no Trailer Reverse Guidance, the Cargo Camera soft button will be displayed.

5



If equipped with both a Cargo Camera and

Trailer Reverse Guidance, the Cargo/Trailer

Reverse Guidance soft button will be displayed.

ParkSense Camera View

NOTE:





Front tires will display on the image when the tires are turned.

Due to wide angle cameras in mirrors, the image will appear distorted.





Top view will show which doors are open.

Open front doors will cancel outside image.

Rear View

This is the Default view of the system in REVERSE and is always paired with the Top View of the vehicle with optional active guidelines for the projected path when enabled.

Rear Cross Path View

Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key will give the driver a wider angle view of the rear camera system. The Top view will be disabled when this is selected.

Front View

The Front view will show you what is immediately in front of the vehicle and is always paired with the Top view of the vehicle.

Front Cross Path View

Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key will give the driver a wider angle view of the front camera system. The Top view will be disabled when this is selected.

Rear View Camera

Pressing the Backup Camera soft key will provide a full screen rear view with

Zoom View.

NOTE:

If the Backup Camera view was selected through the Surround View screen, exiting out of the Rear View Camera screen will return to the

Surround View screen. If the Backup Camera was manually activated through the Controls menu of the Uconnect system, exiting out of the display screen will return to the Controls menu.

Cargo Camera

Pressing the Cargo Camera soft key will provide a full screen view of the cargo area.

NOTE:

If the Cargo Camera view was selected through the Surround View screen, exiting out of the

Cargo Camera screen will return to the

Surround View screen. If the Cargo Camera was manually activated through the Controls menu of the Uconnect system, exiting out of the display screen will return to the Controls menu.

Trailer Reverse Guidance

Pressing the Trailer Reverse

Guidance soft key will provide a full screen view of the cargo area and trailer.

Pressing the Left & Right Tow Mirror

Split Screen View button within the

Trailer Reverse Guidance screen will display a split screen to allow the driver to see both sides of the trailer at the same time. This view allows the driver to pan left/right to better frame the trailer in the image.


NOTE:

Trailer Reverse Guidance can only be selected through the Surround View screen; exiting out of the Trailer Reverse Guidance screen will return to the Surround View screen.

Zoom View

When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear selector position,



Backup Camera display.

When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view will display the standard Backup




Zoom View is available until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).

NOTE:




REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavail able and the icon will appear grey.



While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.

Deactivation

The system is deactivated in the following conditions if it was activated automatically:






(with camera delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be displayed for up to

10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is placed in the OFF position. There is a touch screen button “X” to disable the display of the camera image.


(with camera delay turned off), the surround view camera mode is exited and the last known screen appears again.


The system is deactivated in the following conditions if it was activated manually from the

Uconnect controls menu via the Surround View button, Backup Camera button, Cargo Camera button or Forward Facing Camera button:





The "X" button on the display is pressed

Vehicle is shifted into PARK





Ignition is placed in the OFF position

Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for

10 seconds

NOTE:

If the Surround View Camera, Cargo Camera,

Backup Camera, or Forward Facing Camera is activated manually, and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, deactivation methods for auto matic activation are assumed.

The camera delay system is turned off manually through the Uconnect Settings. Refer to


5



NOTE:



If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lenses.



If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see an authorized dealer.

Cargo Camera Zoom View

When the Cargo Camera image is being displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear selector position,



Cargo Camera display.

When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view will display the standard Cargo




Zoom View is available until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).

NOTE:






REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavail able and the icon will appear grey.

While in Zoom View, the dynamic centerline will not be visible.

Forward Facing Camera With Tire Lines — If

Equipped

The Forward Facing Camera displays a front view image of the road ahead, along with tire lines to guide the driver when driving on narrow roads. Tire Lines can be activated/deactivated through the Uconnect Settings.

Activation

The Forward Facing Camera can be activated by pressing the Forward Camera soft button on the touchscreen.

Once activated, the camera image will remain on as long as the vehicle speed is below 8 mph

(13 km/h) and the vehicle is not in 4WD Low.

Deactivation

The Forward Facing Camera is deactivated in the following conditions:









The vehicle is not in 4WD Low and the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h) for 10 seconds.

The “X” button on the display is pressed.

Vehicle is shifted into PARK.

Ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE:

If the vehicle is in 4WD Low, the Forward Facing

Camera image will be displayed until the “X” button is pressed or the ignition is placed in the

OFF position. If the vehicle goes out of 4WD

Low, then the regular deactivation conditions listed above are applied.

Trailer Reverse Guidance — If Equipped

The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature assists the driver in backing up a trailer by providing adjustable camera views of the trailer and surrounding area. The cameras are mounted on the side mirrors and the images will be displayed side-by-side on the touchscreen. Left

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245 and right camera images are swapped and mirrored on the touchscreen to show the equivalent area behind the vehicle as though the driver is using the side mirrors.

Activation

The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature can be activated by pressing the Trailer Reverse

Guidance button on the Backup/Cargo Camera

Display.

Deactivation


(with camera delay turned on), the camera image will continue to be displayed for up to

10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds

8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into

PARK or the ignition is placed in the OFF position. There is a touch screen button “X” to disable the display of the camera image.

If Trailer Reverse Guidance is selected through manually activated Surround View, Backup

Camera, or Cargo Camera, the following deactivation conditions apply:









The “X” button on the display is pressed

The vehicle is shifted into PARK

The ignition is placed in the OFF position

The vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for 10 seconds

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Surround View Camera.

Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up.

Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!





To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should only be used as a parking aid. The

Surround View camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.

To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using Surround View to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using Surround View.


NOTE:

If the vehicle is not equipped with a Pickup Box:



The bottom wedge of the Top View will be displayed in black.







The Rear Cross Path soft button will be greyed out.

The guidelines will not be overlaid on Top

View/Rear View and Full Screen of Backup

Camera view.

Black video will be displayed for the right side of the Top and Rear View, and full screen of the Backup Camera View when the Rear View

Camera is not connected.

AUX C

AMERA

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two

AUX Cameras, which display a rearview image from the trailer on the touchscreen.

Activation

The AUX Camera is activated by first pressing the Backup Camera, Cargo Camera (if equipped), or Surround View Camera (if equipped) button on the touchscreen, followed by the AUX button located in the upper left corner of the rearview display. The AUX camera can also be activated when the vehicle is in

REVERSE by pressing the AUX button.

5



If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can switch between each camera by pressing the

AUX1 or AUX2 buttons on the Trailer Camera display.

AUX1 Camera Button

AUX2 Camera Button

Deactivation

The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the

“X” in the upper right corner of the touchscreen.

This will return the display back to the previously displayed screen.

NOTE:



If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX

Camera is connected, the touchscreen will display a blue screen along with the message

“Camera System Unavailable.” The screen can be exited out by pressing the “X” in the upper right hand corner. This will return the display back to the previously displayed screen.





Zoom View is not available with the AUX

Camera feature.

The display will always default to the Trailer

Camera display (AUX 1).

ENGINE RUNAWAY

Diesel engine runaway is a rare condition affecting diesel engines, where the engine consumes its own lubrication oil and runs at higher and higher RPM until it overspeeds to a point where it destroys itself due to either mechanical failure or engine seizure through lack of lubrication.

WARNING!

In case of engine runaway due to flammable fumes from fuel spills or turbocharger oil leaks being sucked into the engine, do the following to help avoid personal injury and/or vehicle damage:



Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.



Using a CO2 or dry chemical type fire extin guisher, direct the spray from the fire extin guisher into the grille on the passenger side so that the spray enters the engine air intake.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)

The inlet for the engine air intake is located behind the passenger side headlamp and receives air through the grille.

REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GAS ENGINE

CAUTION!



Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap (fuel filler cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly-fitted aftermarket cap can cause the MIL

(Malfunction Indicator Light) to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system.



A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the

MIL to turn on.



To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not

“top off” the fuel tank after filling.

NOTE:

When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.


WARNING!



Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled.



Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.

NOTE:

Tighten the gas cap a quarter turn until you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened.

If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the

Malfunction Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.

WARNING!

A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle.

You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling.

L

OOSE

F

UEL

F

ILLER

C

AP

M

ESSAGE

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a loose gASCAP indicator will display in the instrument cluster telltale display area. Refer to “Instrument Cluster

Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument

Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the RIGHT button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.

REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE

CAUTION!

To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not

“top off” the fuel tank after filling.

NOTE:



When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.



Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a

“clicking” sound. This is an indication that the fuel filler cap is properly tightened.




Make sure that the fuel filler cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.

WARNING!

A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle.

You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling.

F

UEL

F

ILLER

C

AP

If the fuel filler cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.

WARNING!



Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel filler cap is removed or the tank filled.



Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running.

5

CAUTION!

Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system.



A

VOID

U

SING

C

ONTAMINATED

F

UEL

Fuel that is contaminated by water or dirt can cause severe damage to the engine fuel system. Proper maintenance of the engine fuel filter and fuel tank is essential. Refer to “Dealer

Service” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.

B

ULK

F

UEL

S

TORAGE

— D

IESEL

F

UEL

If you store quantities of fuel, good maintenance of the stored fuel is also essential. Fuel contaminated with water will promote the growth of “microbes.” These microbes form “slime” that will clog the fuel filtration system and lines. Drain condensation from the supply tank and change the line filter on a regular basis.

NOTE:

When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of fuel, air is pulled into the fuel system.

If the vehicle will not start, refer to “Priming If

The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel” in “Servicing


WARNING!

Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious injury or death.

D

IESEL

E

XHAUST

F

LUID

Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective

Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system to meet the very stringent diesel emissions standards required by the Environmental Protection

Agency.

The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels of NOx (oxides of nitrogen emitted from engines) that are harmful to our health and the environment to a near-zero level. A small quantity of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is injected into the exhaust upstream of a catalyst where, when vaporized, it converts smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two natural components of the air we breathe.

You can operate with the comfort that your vehicle is contributing to a cleaner, healthier world environment for this and generations to come.

System Overview

This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust

Fluid (DEF) injection system and a Selective

Catalytic Reduction (SCR) catalyst to meet the emission requirements.

The DEF injection system consists of the following components:





DEF tank

DEF pump













DEF injector

Electronically-heated DEF lines

DEF control module

NOx sensors

Temperature sensors

SCR catalyst



UQS Sensor


“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for system messages and warnings.

NOTE:



Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection system. You may occasionally hear an audible clicking noise. This is normal opera tion.



The DEF pump will run for a period of time after engine shutdown to purge the DEF system. This is normal operation.


D

IESEL

E

XHAUST

F

LUID

S

TORAGE

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very stable product with a long shelf life. If DEF is kept in temperatures between 10° and 90°F

(-12° and 32°C), it will last a minimum of one year.

DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest temperatures. For example, DEF may freeze at temperatures at or below 12°F (-11°C). The system has been designed to operate in this environment.

NOTE:

When working with DEF, it is important to know that:





Any containers or parts that come into contact with DEF must be DEF compatible

(plastic or stainless steel). Copper, brass, aluminum, iron or non-stainless steel should be avoided as they are subject to corrosion by DEF.

If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up completely.

A

DDING

D

IESEL

E

XHAUST

F

LUID

(DEF)

The DEF gauge (located on the instrument cluster) will display the level of DEF remaining in the tank. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” and

“Instrument Cluster Descriptions” in “Getting To

Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

NOTE:







Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load, etc.) will effect the amount of DEF that is used in your vehicle.

Another factor is that outside temperature can affect DEF consumption. In cold condi tions, 12°F (-11°C) and below, the DEF gauge needle can stay on a fixed position and may not move for extended periods of time.

This is a normal function of the system.

There is an electric heater inside the DEF tank that automatically works when neces sary. And if the DEF supply does freeze, the truck will operate normally until it thaws.


DEF Fill Procedure

NOTE:

Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical

Specifications” for the correct fluid type.

1. Remove cap from DEF tank (located on drivers side of the vehicle or in fuel door).

DEF Filler Cap And Fuel Fill Chassis Cab Models

1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location

2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location

2. Insert DEF fill adapter/nozzle into DEF tank filler neck.

5



NOTE:







The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds to update after adding a gallon or more of




DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF line heater will possibly warm up the DEF fluid and allow the gauge to update after a period of run time. Under very cold conditions, it is possible that the gauge may not reflect the new fill level for several drives.

Excessive overfilling of the DEF tank can result in a MIL lamp/fault code and inaccu rate level readings.

CAUTION!



To avoid DEF spillage, and possible damage to the DEF tank from overfilling, do not “top off” the DEF tank after filling.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

(Continued)



DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below

12ºF (-11ºC). The DEF system is designed to work in temperatures below the DEF freezing point, however, if the tank is over filled and freezes, the system could be damaged.



When DEF is spilled, clean the area imme diately with water and use an absorbent material to soak up the spills on the ground.



Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is accidentally added to the diesel fuel tank as it can result in severe damage to your engine, including but not limited to failure of the fuel pump and injectors.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

(Continued)



Never add anything other than DEF to the tank – especially any form of hydrocarbon such as diesel fuel, fuel system additives, gasoline, or any other petroleum-based product. Even a very small amount of these, less than 100 parts per million or less than

1 oz. per 78 gallons (295 liters) will contam inate the entire DEF system and will require replacement. If owners use a container, funnel or nozzle when refilling the tank, it should either be new or one that is has only been used for adding DEF. Mopar provides an attachable nozzle with its DEF for this purpose.

3. Stop filling the DEF tank immediately when any of the following happen: DEF stops flowing from the fill bottle into the DEF tank,

DEF splashes out the filler neck, or a DEF pump nozzle automatically shuts off.

4. Reinstall cap onto DEF tank.


Filling The Def Tank In Cold Climates

Since DEF will begin to freeze at 12°F (-11°C), your vehicle is equipped with an automatic DEF heating system. This allows the DEF injection system to operate properly at temperatures below 12°F (-11°C). If your vehicle is not in operation for an extended period of time with temperatures below 12°F (-11°C), the DEF in the tank may freeze. If the tank is overfilled and freezes, it could be damaged. Therefore, do not overfill the DEF tank.

Extra care should be taken when filling with portable containers to avoid overfilling. Note the level of the DEF gauge in your instrument cluster. You may safely add a maximum of

2 gallons (7.5 liters) of DEF from portable containers when your DEF gauge is reading

½ full.

VEHICLE LOADING

G

ROSS

V

EHICLE

W

EIGHT

R

ATING

(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so

GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.

P

AYLOAD

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.

G

ROSS

A

XLE

W

EIGHT

R

ATING

(GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).

Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.

T

IRE

S

IZE

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.

Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.


R

IM

S

IZE

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.

I

NFLATION

P

RESSURE

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full

GAWR.

C

URB

W

EIGHT

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added.

L

OADING

The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined

5


252 STARTING AND OPERATING separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axles.

Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axle has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met.

Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate.

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the

GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.

If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles.

This could cause you to lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle.

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.

To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

C

OMMON

T

OWING

D

EFINITIONS

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.

Refer to “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And


Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition.

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.

The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

WARNING!

If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs

(2,267 kg) or more, it is recommended to use a weight- distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard weight- carrying hitch, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to

“Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.


WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.

Tongue Weight (TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

Trailer Frontal Area

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.


The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.

If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.

Weight-Carrying Hitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers.

Weight-Distributing Hitch

A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars.

They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control, thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer Sway Control

(TSC) and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue


Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR requirements.

WARNING!



An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling, stability and braking performance and could result in a collision.



Weight distributing systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers.

Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.

5

Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)



With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)

Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch

(Incorrect)

Recommended Distribution Hitch Adjustment

1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer (do not connect the trailer).

2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is height H1.

front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/

2+H1 (about 1/2 the difference between

H2 and H1 above normal ride height [H1]).

6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and weight distributing hitch to confirm manufacturers’ recommendations have been met.

Measuring Height (H)

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight distribution bars connected.

4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the fender to ground, this is height H2.

5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars per the manufacturers’ recommendations so that the height of the

Measurement

Example

H1

H2

H2-H1

(H2-H1)/2

(H2-H1)/2 + H1

Example 2500/

3500 Height (mm)

1,030

1,058

28

14

1,044

NOTE:

For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with TOW/HAUL mode engaged.

Fifth-Wheel Hitch

The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin.


Your truck may be equipped with a fifth wheel hitch option. Refer to the separately provided fifth wheel hitch safety, care, assembly, and operating instructions.

Gooseneck Hitch

The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed.


T

RAILER

H

ITCH

T

YPE AND

M

AXIMUM

T

RAILER

W

EIGHT

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Class

Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards

Class I - Light Duty

Class II - Medium Duty

Class III - Heavy Duty

Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty

2,000 lbs (907 kg)

3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)

5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)

10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)

Fifth Wheel/Gooseneck Greater than 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)

Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

5



T

RAILER

T

OWING

W

EIGHTS

(M

AXIMUM

T

RAILER

W

EIGHT

R

ATINGS

)

NOTE:

For trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website addresses:

 ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/



 ramtruck.ca (Canada) rambodybuilder.com

T

RAILER

A

ND

T

ONGUE

W

EIGHT

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.

Weight Distribution

CAUTION!

Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the

GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.

Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:







The tongue weight of the trailer.

The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle.

The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE:

Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.

T

OWING

R

EQUIREMENTS

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended.

CAUTION!



Do not tow a trailer at all during the first

500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged.



Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over

50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

Perform the maintenance listed in the

“Scheduled Servicing”. Refer to “Scheduled

Servicing” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.


WARNING!



Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a colli sion.



When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over loading can cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.



Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)



Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels.





GCWR must not be exceeded.

Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded:



GVWR



GTW



GAWR



Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.

Towing Requirements — Tires





Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.

Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing while using a full size spare tire.










Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And

Maintenance” for proper tire inflation proce dures.

Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.

Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to

“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper inspection procedure.

When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in

“Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes





Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inad equate braking and possible personal injury.

An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When

5



 towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.

Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).

WARNING!



Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over load your brake system and cause it to fail.

You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident.



Towing any trailer will increase your stop ping distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.

Failure to do so could result in an accident.

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs

(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

Integrated Trailer Brake Module — If

Equipped

Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer

Brake Module (ITBM) for Electric and Electric

Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes.

NOTE:

This module has been designed and verified with electric trailer brakes and new EOH systems. Some previous EOH systems may not be compatible with ITBM.

Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)

1 — GAIN - Adjustment Button

2 — GAIN + Adjustment Button

3 — Manual Brake Control Lever

The user interface consists of the following:

Manual Brake Control Lever

Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to activate power to the trailer's electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle's brakes. If the manual brake control lever is activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.

The trailer and the vehicle’s stop lamps will come on when braking normally with the vehicle brake pedal. Only the trailer stop lamps will come on when the manual brake control lever is applied.

Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light

This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.

If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or sliding the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN setting for

10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status

Indicator Light” will not be displayed.

If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the

Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the

“Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light” will flash.


GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)

Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control power output to the trailer brakes in

0.5 increments. The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).

GAIN

The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control for the specific towing condition and should be changed as towing conditions change. Changes to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and weather.

Adjusting GAIN

NOTE:

This should only be performed in a traffic free environment at speeds of approximately

20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).

1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition, functioning normally and properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if necessary.

2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to the trailer manufacturer's instructions.

3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged in, the trailer connected message should appear in the instrument cluster display (if the connection is not recognized by the ITBM, braking functions will not be available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and the correct type of trailer must be selected from the instrument cluster display options.

4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.


5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter “TRAILER TOW”.

6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the

Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen.

7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer

Brake Type appears on the screen.

8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed of

20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual brake control lever completely.

9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the

GAIN setting.

Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.

5



Type of Trailer Brakes

Load

Light Electric

Electric Trailer Brakes

*Under 10,000 lbs

(4,536 kg)

Heavy Electric

Electric Trailer Brakes

*Above 10,000 lbs

(4,536 kg)

Light EOH

Electric over Hydraulic

Trailer Brakes

*Under 10,000 lbs

(4,536 kg)

Heavy EOH

Electric over Hydraulic

Trailer Brakes

*Above 10,000 lbs

(4,536 kg)

* The suggested selection depends and may change depending on the customer preferences for braking performance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and road state may also affect the selection.

Display Messages

The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument cluster display. Display messages, along with a single chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is determined in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or on the trailer. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in


Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping distance or trailer instability which could result in personal injury.

WARNING!

CAUTION!

Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping distance or trailer instability which could result in damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.

NOTE:





An aftermarket controller may be available for use with trailers with air or EOH trailer brake systems. To determine the type of brakes on your trailer and the availability of controllers, check with your trailer manufac turer or dealer.

Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may cause damage to the electrical system and electronic modules of the vehicle. See an authorized dealer if an aftermarket module is to be installed.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And

Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.

NOTE:

Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustrations.


NOTE:





Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the vehicle before launching a boat (or any other device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect) into water.

Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.

Four-Pin Connector

1 — Ground

2 — Park

3 — Left Stop/Turn

4 — Right Stop/Turn

Seven-Pin Connector

1 — Battery

2 — Backup Lamps

3 — Right Stop/Turn

4 — Electric Brakes

5 — Ground

6 — Left Stop/Turn

7 — Running Lamps

T

OWING

T

IPS

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic.

Automatic Transmission

The DRIVE range can be selected when towing.

The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing.


However, if frequent shifting does occur while in

DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range Select

(ERS) shift control).

NOTE:

Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear range (using the ERS shift control) while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking.

Six-Speed Automatic Transmission Only

When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at low speeds (20 mph [32 km/h] or below), holding your vehicle in FIRST gear (using the

ERS shift control) can help to avoid transmission overheating.

If you regularly tow a trailer for more than

45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) as specified for "police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing." Refer to the

“Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance intervals.

5



NOTE:

Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing (Six-speed automatic only).

Tow/Haul Mode

To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control) on more severe grades.

Speed Control — If Equipped







Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

When using the Speed Control, if you experi ence speed drops greater than 10 mph

(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.

Use Speed Control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.

Cooling System

To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:

City Driving



In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.

Highway Driving





Reduce speed.

Temporarily turn off air conditioning.

SNOWPLOW — IF EQUIPPED

Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory installed option. These packages include components necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.

NOTE:

Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recommended that the owner/installer obtain and follow the recommendations contained within the current Body Builders Guide. See an authorized dealer, installer or snowplow manu facturer for this information. There are unique electrical systems that must be connected to properly ensure operator safety and prevent overloading vehicle systems.

WARNING!

Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely affect performance of the airbag system in a collision. Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described earlier in this manual.

CAUTION!

The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exterior lamps are not properly installed.

B

EFORE

P

LOWING









Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid level.

Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tightness.

Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear. The cutting edge should be

¼ to ½ inches (6 cm to 1.2 cm) above ground in snow plowing position.

Check that snowplow lighting is connected and functioning properly.


S

NOWPLOW

P

REP

P

ACKAGE

M

ODEL

A

VAILABILITY

For Information about snowplow applications visit www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current

Body Builders Guide.

1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck should not exceed two.

2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the

Rear GAWR should never be exceeded.

3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of options or passengers, etc.

The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers, options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross Vehicle Weight

(GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR) ratings.

These weights are specified on the Safety

Compliance Certification Label on the driver's side door opening.

NOTE:

Detach the snowplow when transporting passengers.

Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifications at the factory without consideration for the weight of the plow. Front end toe-in should be checked and reset if necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow season. This will help prevent uneven tire wear.

The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is parked.

Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equipment following the recommendations provided by the specific snowplow manufacturer.

O

VER

T

HE

R

OAD

O

PERATION

W

ITH

S

NOWPLOW

A

TTACHED

The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures. Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade completely and position it as low as road or surface conditions permit. Do not exceed

40 mph (64 km/h). The operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance and allow adequate passing clearance.

O

PERATING

T

IPS

Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph

(32 km/h) should be maximum operating speed. The operator should be familiar with the area and surface to be cleaned. Reduce speed

STARTING AND OPERATING 263 and use extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.

G

ENERAL

M

AINTENANCE

Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the plow manufacturer's instructions.

Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery terminals clean and free of corrosion.

When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drivetrain damage, the following precautions should be observed.







Operate with transfer case in 4L when plowing small or congested areas where speeds are not likely to exceed 15 mph

(24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in 4HI.

Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4L range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended periods of time to avoid transmission overheating.

Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a practice of stepping on the brake pedal while shifting the transmission.

5



RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

T

OWING

T

HIS

V

EHICLE

B

EHIND

A

NOTHER

V

EHICLE

Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground

Flat Tow

Dolly Tow

On Trailer

NOTE:

When towing your vehicle, always follow appli cable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for addi tional details.

R

ECREATIONAL

T

OWING

— T

WO

-W

HEEL

D

RIVE

M

ODELS

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.

Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are

OFF the ground. This may be accomplished

NONE

Two-Wheel Drive Models

NOT ALLOWED

Front

Rear

ALL

NOT ALLOWED

OK

OK using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:

1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.

3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place automatic transmission in PARK.

4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.

5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position and remove the key fob.

Four-Wheel Drive Models

See Instructions



Automatic transmission in PARK





Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)

Tow in forward direction

NOT ALLOWED

NOT ALLOWED

OK

6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.

CAUTION!



Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission damage.

Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.



Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid may leak from the transmission, causing damage to internal parts.


R

ECREATIONAL

T

OWING

—

F

OUR

-W

HEEL

D

RIVE

M

ODELS

NOTE:

Both the manual shift and electronically shifted transfer cases must be shifted into N (Neutral) for recreational towing. Automatic transmis sions must be shifted into PARK for recreational towing. Refer to the following for the proper transfer case N (Neutral) shifting procedure for your vehicle.

CAUTION!



DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with only one set of wheels on the ground

(front or rear) will cause severe transmis sion and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the ground, or

OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).



Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

(Continued)



Before recreational towing, the transfer case must be in NEUTRAL. To be certain the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL, perform the procedure outlined under “Shifting Into

NEUTRAL”. Internal transmission damage will result, if the transfer case is not in

NEUTRAL during towing.



The transmission must be placed in PARK for recreational towing.





Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmis sion and/or transfer case damage.

Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case, causing damage to internal parts.



Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.

Shifting Into N (Neutral)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing.


WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK

(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.

5

CAUTION!

It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in

NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground, with the engine running.

Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.

3. Press and hold the brake pedal.



4. Shift the transfer case into N (Neutral):



With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case lever into N (Neutral).



With electronically shifted transfer case, push and hold the transfer case N

(Neutral) button. Some models have a small, recessed "N" button (at the center of the transfer case switches) that must be pressed using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Other models have a rect angular N (Neutral) switch, below the rotary transfer case control knob. The N

(Neutral) indicator light will blink while the shift is in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to N

(Neutral) is complete. After the shift is completed and the N (Neutral) light stays on, release the N (Neutral) button.


6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.

7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.

8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with automatic transmission in DRIVE.

9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly apply the parking brake. Turn off the engine.

For vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until the engine shuts off.


11. Place the ignition in the OFF mode, and remove the key fob.

12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar.


NOTE:

With electronically shifted transfer case:





Steps 2 through 3 are requirements that must be met before pushing the N (Neutral) button, and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met before pushing the

N (Neutral) button or are no longer met during the shift, the N (Neutral) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the N (Neutral) button is released.

The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to take place and for the position indi cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is

 not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.

Shifting Out Of N (Neutral)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage:

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.


4. Start the engine, and shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.



With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case lever to the desired posi tion.



With electronically shifted transfer case with rotary selector switch, push and hold the transfer case N (Neutral) button until the N (Neutral) indicator light turns off.

After the N (Neutral) indicator light turns off, release the N (Neutral) button. After

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267 the N (Neutral) button has been released, the transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch.



With electronically shifted transfer case with push-button selector switch, push and hold the switch for the desired transfer case position, until the N

(Neutral) indicator light turns off and the desired position indicator light turns on.

NOTE:

When shifting the transfer case out of N

(Neutral), turning the engine off is not required, but may be helpful to avoid gear clash. With

8-speed automatic transmission, the engine must remain running, since turning the engine off will shift the transmission to PARK (and the transmission must be in NEUTRAL for the transfer case to shift out of NEUTRAL).

5. Turn the engine off. Shift automatic transmission into PARK. On 8-speed transmissions the shifter will automatically select PARK when the engine is turned off.

6. Release the brake pedal.

7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.

8. Start the engine.



11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.

NOTE:

With electronically shifted transfer case:



Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be met before pushing the button to shift out of

N (Neutral), and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met before pushing the button or are no longer met during the shift, the N (Neutral) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the button is released.





The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to take place and for the position indi cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met.


DRIVING TIPS

D

RIVING

O

N

S

LIPPERY

S

URFACES

Acceleration

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction

(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).

D

RIVING

T

HROUGH

W

ATER

Driving through water more than a few inches/ centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

5



Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!

Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.

Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

Shallow Standing Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Warnings and Cautions before doing so.

WARNING!



Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)



Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.



Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.



CAUTION!

Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.



Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water.



Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

(Continued)



Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids

(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.



Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.


269

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

Hazard Warning Flashers Switch

The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located on the upper switch bank just below the radio.

NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch

Uconnect display, the Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located above the display.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning

Flashers. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard

Warning Flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE:

With extended use the Hazard Warning

Flashers may wear down your battery.

ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

NOTE:

Depending on the vehicles trim level, the over head console may vary.

Assist And SOS Buttons

1 — ASSIST Button

2 — SOS Button

6


270 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Assist And SOS Buttons

1 — ASSIST Button

2 — SOS Button

If equipped, the overhead console contains an

ASSIST and a SOS button.

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use the features and applications when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

NOTE:



Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.



The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func tion if you are connected to an operable LTE

(voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other

Uconnect services will only be operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active and you are connected to an operable LTE

(voice/data) or 4G (data) network.

ASSIST Call

The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers:





Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Addi tional fees may apply for roadside assis tance.

SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –

In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.



Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other vehicle issues.

SOS Call

1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console.

NOTE:

In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS

Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button on the overhead console or press the cancellation button on the Device Screen.

Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the overhead console.

2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and

SOS buttons on the overhead console will turn green once a connection to a SOS operator has been made.

3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a SOS operator:



Indication that the occupant placed a

SOS Call.



The vehicle brand.



The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.


4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed.

WARNING!


NOTE:






Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to deter mine if additional help is needed. Once the

SOS operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt to remain connected with the

SOS operator until the SOS operator termi nates the connection.

5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.



WARNING!

If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger

(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emergency Services

Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.



Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable network and GPS antennas. You could prevent operable network and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable network and

GPS signal reception is required for the SOS

Call system to function properly.

(Continued)

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 271

WARNING!

(Continued)



The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter ference that can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment

(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY

POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING

DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE

UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND

SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT

OPERATE.



Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you.

6



SOS Call System Limitations

Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call system capabilities.

SOS or other emergency line operators in

Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.

If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:







The overhead console light located within the

ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illuminate red.

The Device Screen will display the following message: “Vehicle device requires service.

Please contact an authorized dealer.”

An In-Vehicle Audio message will state

“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact an authorized dealer.”

WARNING!



Ignoring the overhead console light could mean you will not have SOS Call services. If the overhead console light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the SOS

Call system immediately.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)



The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag

Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the Occupant

Restraint Control system immediately.

Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.

These include, but are not limited to, the following factors:





The ignition is in the OFF position.

The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.









The SOS Call system software and/or hard ware are damaged during a crash.

The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.

LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or

Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed.

Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.









Operator error by the SOS operator.

LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network congestion.

Weather.

Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.

WARNING!


NOTE:






Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s

LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/ data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/


 data) or 4G (data) network connection and a

GPS signal is required for the SOS Call system to function properly.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.

G

ENERAL

I

NFORMATION

















NOTE:


6



BULB REPLACEMENT

R

EPLACEMENT

B

ULBS

All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.

Interior Bulbs

Bulb Name

Overhead Console Lamps

Dome Lamp

NOTE:

For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.

Exterior Bulbs

Bulb Name

Low Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp)

High Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp)

Low & High Beam (LED Reflector Headlamp)

Low & High Beam (LED Projector Headlamp)

Turn Signal / Front Position (Halogen Reflector Headlamp)

Turn Signal / Front Position (LED Headlamps)

Front Side Marker (Halogen Reflector Headlamp)

Front Side Marker (LED Headlamps)

Front Fog Lamps (Halogen Reflector Headlamp)

Bulb Number

TS 212–9

7679

Bulb Number

H11LL

9005LL

LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)


7444NA


W5W


H11LL


Bulb Name

Front Fog Lamps (LED Headlamps)

Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror)

Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)

Cab Roof Marker Lamps

Box Off Tail Lamps – Stop/Turn/Tail/License Plate

Box Off Tail Lamps – Back Up

R

EPLACING

E

XTERIOR

B

ULBS

Base Quad: Low Beam Headlamp, High

Beam Headlamp, Front Park And Turn — If

Equipped

Low Beam

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.

3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the access hole in the


Exterior Bulbs

Bulb Number



921

194NA

1157

1156 front of the wheel house splash shield.

Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this access hole.

4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house splash shield and disengage the bulb access cover by rotating counterclockwise.

6

Splash Shield Access Cover Bulb Access Cover



5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness connector from the low beam bulb.

CAUTION!



Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.



Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring.

6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.

7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.

8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new bulb and covers.

High Beam

1. Open the hood.


Bulb Access Cover

3. Look under the hood and behind the headlamp to find the high beam bulb access cover.

4. Reach behind the headlamp and disengage the access cover by rotating counter clockwise.

5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness connector from the high beam bulb.

CAUTION!




(Continued)

CAUTION!

(Continued)



Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring.

6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter turn to unlock the bulb from the lamp.



Outer Park And Turn

1. Open the hood.




3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield.

Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this access hole.

Splash Shield Access Cover

4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house splash shield and disengage the side marker socket by rotating counterclockwise a quarter turn.

Park And Turn Socket


6. Separate the bulb from the socket without twisting.


Fog Lamps — If Equipped

1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to access the back of the front fog lamp housing.

2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector from the fog lamp bulb.

Fog Lamp Bulb

3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter turn to unlock the bulb from the housing.


6

CAUTION!




Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)

With Cargo Lamp

1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to the body as shown.

CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations

2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wiring harness to the body.

3. Turn the desired bulb socket a quarter turn and remove the socket and bulb from housing.

4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.

CAUTION!




Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps



Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop

Lamp

5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and housing.

Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped

1. Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp.

Removing Rear Screw From Clearance Lamp

2. Rotate the bulb socket a quarter turn and pull it from the lamp assembly.

Removing Bulb Socket From Clearance Lamp

3. Pull the bulb straight from it's socket and replace.

CHMSL Connector Location


FUSES

WARNING!



When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.



Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged.



If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.



If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, trans mission system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer.

G

ENERAL

I

NFORMATION

The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current.

When a device does not work, you must check the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.

Also, please be aware that when using power outlets for extended periods of time with the engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.


P

OWER

D

ISTRIBUTION

C

ENTER

The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.

Blade Fuses

1 — Fuse Element

2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element

3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element (blown fuse)

Power Distribution Center Location

6



Cavity

F12

F13

F14

F15

F09

F09

F10

F11

F16

F17

F19

F20

F05

F06

F07

F08

F01

F02

F03

F04

Cartridge Fuse

–

60 Amp Yellow

60 Amp Yellow

50 Amp Red

40 Amp Green

40 Amp Green

40 Amp Green

20 Amp Blue

40 Amp Green

30 Amp Pink

40 Amp Green

40 Amp Green

40 Amp Green

40 Amp Green

40 Amp Green

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

Micro Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Description

Spare

ABS Pump Motor (HD Only)

Rad Fan – If Equipped

400W Inverter – If Equipped

Compressor For Air Suspension – If Equipped

Steering Torque Overlay Module (STOM)

Starter Solenoid

NOX Sensor – If Equipped

Diesel / Fuel Heater – If Equipped

Gas / Brake Vacuum Pump – If Equipped

CBC #2 / Ext Lights

Brake System Module (ECU and Valves)

CBC #3 / Pwr Locks

Blower Motor

CBC #4 / Ext Lights

Power Side Steps — If Equipped

Smart-Bar Module – If Equipped

Winch Control Module – If Equipped

Diesel SCR Feed– If Equipped

Passenger Door Module


F30

F31

F32

F33

F34

F35

F36

F37

F38

F39

Cavity

F24

F25

F26

F27

F21

F22

F22

F23

F28

F29

Cartridge Fuse

30 Amp Pink

20 Amp Blue

25 Amp White

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

—

—

20 Amp Blue

20 Amp Blue

30 Amp Pink

–

–

20 Amp Blue

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

30 Amp Pink

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Micro Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–


Description

Drive Train Control Module

Gas / ECM– If Equipped

Diesel PCM – If Equipped

CBC #1 / Int Light

Driver Door Module

Front Wiper

Spare

Spare

Trailer Tow Backup Lights – If Equipped

Trailer Tow Parking Lights – If Equipped

Trailer Tow Receptacle / Trailer Tow (Separate E-Brake) /

Trailer Tow

Spare

Spare

Trans Control Module – If Equipped

Vehicle System Interface Module #2 – If Equipped

Sunroof – If Equipped

Electric Back Light – If Equipped

Diesel Frame / Fuel Heater #2– If Equipped

Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If Equipped

Spare

6



Cavity

F44

F46

F47

F48

F40

F41

F42

F43

F49

F50

F51

F52

F53

F54

F55

F56

F57

F58

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Cartridge Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Micro Fuse

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

20 Amp Yellow

15 Amp Blue

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

–

–

10 Amp Red

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

5 Amp Tan

20 Amp Yellow

20 Amp Yellow

–

10 Amp Red

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

Description

Ventilated Seats – If Equipped

Active Grille Shutter / Active Air Dam – If Equipped

Horn

Heated Steering Wheel – If Equipped

Diagnostic Port

Upfitters Relay Coil – If Equipped

Spare

Spare

IP Cluster / CSG

Air Suspension Control Module – If Equipped

Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition Node Module,

Radio Frequency Hub Module / Electric Steering Column

Lock - If Equipped

Battery Sensor

Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights - If Equipped

Non Memory Adjustable Pedals - If Equipped

Spare

Fuel Vapor Blocker Valve - If Equipped

TCM / PCM / Solenoid Trans Pressure SW (RFE Trans Only)

– If Equipped

Bed Lighting (LED) – If Equipped


F65

F70

F71

F72

F73

F66

F67

F68

F69

F74

F75

F76

F77

Cavity

F60

F61

F62

F63

F64

Cartridge Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Micro Fuse

—

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

20 Amp Yellow

25 Amp Clear

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

15 Amp Blue

30 Amp Green

25 Amp Clear

—

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red


Description

Spare

NH3 Sensor / PM Sensor – If Equipped

Air Conditioning Clutch

Ignition Coils / CAPS

Fuel Injectors / Powertrain Control Module / SRV – If

Equipped

MOD Inverter (Wake Up) / Power Port / USB IP / WCPM –

If Equipped

Sunroof / USB Rear– If Equipped

CDM / UCI Port / USB Front

AEB RACAM HTR – If Equipped

SCR Module 12 Volt– If Equipped

Fuel Pump Motor / K09 RLY Coil Feed – If Equipped

Amplifier / Active Noise Cancellation – If Equipped

Spare

Fuel Transfer Pump – If Equipped

Backup Alarm – If Equipped

ATMM / Coil-SCR Module RLY – If Equipped

Electronic Stability Control — If Equipped

Drivetrain Control Module / Front Axle Disconnect

Module / TCM/ STOM

6



Cavity

F78

F83

F84

F85

F86

F79

F80

F81

F82

F87

F88

F90/F91

F92

F93

F94

F95

Cartridge Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Micro Fuse

15 Amp Blue

15 Amp Blue

10 Amp Red

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

–

15 Amp Blue

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

15 Amp Blue

20 Amp Yellow

–

–

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

Description

Engine Control Module / Powertrain Control Module / AEB

RACM MOD / Feed To AUX PDC Relay Coils/ HRLS

ID / Clearance Lights

Overhead Console / Assist / 911 – If Equipped

Trailer Tow Right Turn / Stop Lights - If Equipped

Steering Column Control Module / Cruise Control

Spare

ASBM / HVAC / ICS / Rear Heated Seat Switches

Airbag Module

Airbag Module

Air Suspension / ITBM / Steering Column Control Module

/ MOD Gateway CAN-C Trailer TPM

Instrument Panel Cluster

Power Outlet / Batt

Power Outlet / Acc

Spare

Spare

Shift-By-Wire / Transfer Case Switch / Module TPM

Trailer / Module Gateway Can-C Trailer TPM

Rearview Camera / Park Assist / CHMSL Camera / Blind

Spot Sensor / Surround View Camera



Cavity

F96

F97

F98

F99

F100

F101

F102

F103

F104

Cartridge Fuse

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

CAUTION!



When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.

(Continued)

Micro Fuse

10 Amp Red

20 Amp Yellow

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

10 Amp Red

20 Amp Yellow

20 Amp Yellow

10 Amp Red

20 Amp Yellow

CAUTION!

(Continued)



When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

Description

Trailer Camera – If Equipped

Front Heated Seat Passenger – If Equipped

Front Heated Seat Driver – If Equipped

HVAC / In-Car Temperature Sensor / CSG MOD

Upfitters Box Feed– If Equipped

Rear Heated Seat Right — If Equipped

Rear Heated Seat Left / Run RLY #3 Coil — If Equipped

HeadLamp AFLS — If Equipped

UCI Port / USB Rear

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

WARNING!



Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.

(Continued)

6



WARNING!

(Continued)



Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.

Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.



Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack.



The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.

The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

4500/5500 M

ODELS

These vehicles do not come equipped with a jack.

NOTE:

Jacking and tire changing on 4500/5500 models should be performed by an authorized dealer, or knowledgeable service personnel with the appropriate heavy duty equipment, like a tire service company.

P

REPARATIONS

F

OR

J

ACKING

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.

Avoid ice or slippery areas.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel.

2. Place the gear selector into PARK. On four-wheel drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.

3. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Turn the ignition OFF.

6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if the driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.

Wheel Blocked

NOTE:

Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

J

ACKING

I

NSTRUCTIONS

4500 A

ND

5500 S

ERIES

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:



Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle.



Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.

(Continued)


WARNING!

(Continued)



Apply the parking brake firmly and set the transmission in PARK.



Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised.



Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack.



Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack.



Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift.



Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.



If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic.



To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground.

Jack Warning Label

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the

Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.

1. If equipped, remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.

2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the lug nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.

3. When changing the front wheel, assemble the jack driver to the jack and connect the jack driver to the extension tube. Place the jack under the axle as close to the tire as

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 287 possible with the jack driver extending to the front. Connect the extension tubes and lug wrench.

Front Jacking Locations

When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack driver to the jack and connect the jack driver to the extension tubes. Securely place the jack under the sway bar bracket

(unless both tires are flat on one side, then place jack under shock bracket) facing for ward in vehicle. Connect the extension tubes and lug wrench.

6



Rear Jacking Location

Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required.

NOTE:

If the jack will not lower by turning the dial

(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack driver in order to lower the jack.

4. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire.

5. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off.

Install the spare wheel and lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel on Single Rear-Wheel (SRW) models.

On Dual Rear-Wheel models (DRW) the lug nuts are a two-piece assembly with a flat face. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.

6. Using the lug wrench, finish tightening the nuts using a crisscross pattern. For the proper lug nut torque specifications refer to

“Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in

“Technical Specifications.” If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service station.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided.

7. Install wheel center cap (if equipped) and remove wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.

8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the jack will not lower by turning the dial

(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack driver in order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.

9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.

10. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.


Dual Rear Wheels

Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the inner and outer wheels. Align these slots when assembling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the inner wheel.

The tires of both dual wheels must be completely off the ground when tightening to ensure wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping.

Dual wheel models require a special heavy-duty lug nut tightening adapter (included with the vehicle) to correctly tighten the lug nuts. Also, when it is necessary to remove and install dual rear wheels, use a proper vehicle lifting device.

NOTE:

When installing a spare tire (if equipped) as part of a dual rear wheel end combination, the tire diameter of the two individual tires must be compared. If there is a significant difference, the larger tire should be installed in a front loca tion. The correct direction of rotation for dual tire installations must also be observed.

It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued to specifications at all times. Torque wheel stud nuts to specifications at each lubrication interval.

Refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.

Wheel Nuts

All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is especially important during the first few hundred miles/ kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set. All wheel nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel. The wheel nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque. Tighten the wheel nuts to final torque in increments. Progress around the bolt circle, tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel nut just previously tightened until final torque is achieved.

Refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications” for further information.

T

O

S

TOW

T

HE

F

LAT

O

R

S

PARE

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

Refer to Upfitters Body Builder’s Guide for information on stowing your spare tire (if equipped).


H

UB

C

APS

/W

HEEL

C

OVERS

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground.

CAUTION!

Use extreme caution when removing the front and rear wheel covers. Damage can occur to the center cap and/or the wheel if screwdriver type tools are used. A pulling motion, not a pry off motion, is recommended to remove the caps.

For 3500 Single Rear-Wheel (SRW) models, use the flat end of the lug wrench to hook and pull off the hub cap. Find the opening in the hub cap, insert the lug wrench, and pull off the cap. If you need to pry against the wheel, protect the wheel surface.

6



Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Hub Cap

On 3500 models with Dual Rear-Wheels (DRW), you must first remove the hub caps—use the procedure noted for the single rear wheel. For the wheel covers (wheel skins), insert the flat end of the lug wrench between the outer edge of the wheel cover and the wheel. Pry against the wheel to remove the wheel cover. Repeat this procedure around the wheel until the cover pops off.

JUMP STARTING

If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Wheel Cover

CAUTION!



Use a pulling motion to remove the hub cap. Do not use a twisting motion when removing the hub cap, damage to the hub cap; finish may occur.



The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two pull off notches. Make sure that the hook of the jack handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch before attempting to pull off.

Replace the wheel covers using a rubber mallet to ease the installation. Align the wheel cover vent holes to the wheel vent holes. Tap on the wheel cover as needed to firmly seat it evenly around the wheel.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur.

NOTE:

When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer's operating instruc tions and precautions.


P

REPARATIONS

F

OR

J

UMP

S

TART

The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.

NOTE:

The positive(+) battery post may be covered with a protective cap if equipped. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive(+) battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive post which has a positive (+) symbol on or around the post.

Positive (+) Battery Post

WARNING!



Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.



Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.



Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery.

1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition OFF.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables’ reach, apply the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.


WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.

J

UMP

S

TARTING

P

ROCEDURE

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

NOTE:

Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive post.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

6



3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground. A

“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as an accessory bracket or large bolt. The ground must be away from the battery and the fuel injection system.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery.

The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.

CAUTION!

Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses on the positive battery terminal. The resulting electrical current will blow the fuse.

6. Once the engine is started, follow the disconnected procedure below.

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative

(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.

If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.





On the highways — slow down.

In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.

NOTE:

There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:



If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.

The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.





You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6–SPEED

TRANSMISSION

If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:

1. Turn the engine OFF.


3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.

4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port (ringed circle) on the bottom of the steering column, and push and hold the override release lever up.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.

Gear Selector Override Access Port Location

Gear Selector Override Access Port

Engaging The Access Port

6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.

7. The vehicle may then be started in

NEUTRAL.

6



MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 – SPEED

TRANSMISSION

WARNING!

Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking brake before activating the

Manual Park Release. In addition, you should be seated in the driver’s seat with your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activating the

Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual

Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by the parking brake, or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.

Activating the Manual Park Release on an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.

To push or tow the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is available.

Manual Park Release Cover

Manual Park Release Pull Strap

Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park

Release:


2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the Manual Park Release access cover, which is just above the parking brake release handle, below and to the left of the steering column.

3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

4. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push the Manual Park Release lever locking tab

(just below the middle of the lever) upwards.

5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever rearward, until it locks in place pointing towards the driver's seat.

Release the locking tab and verify that the

Manual Park Release lever is locked in the released position.

6. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed. Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle.

To Reset The Manual Park Release:

1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the lever.

2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward to its original position, until the locking tab snaps into place to secure the lever.


3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever is locked in its stowed position.

4. Re-install the access cover.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and

REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.

NOTE:



For trucks equipped with an 8–speed trans mission, shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at wheel speeds of

5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the trans mission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.



Push the ESC OFF switch, to place the Elec tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in

“Partial Off” mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control

System” in “Safety” for further information.

Once the vehicle has been freed, push the

ESC OFF switch again to restore “ESC On” mode.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.


CAUTION!



Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.



When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.



Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission over heating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph

(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).

6



TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.

Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground 2WD Models

Flat Tow

Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow

Flatbed

NONE

Front

Rear

ALL

If transmission is operable:





Transmission in NEUTRAL

30 mph (48 km/h) max speed





15 miles (24 km) max distance

(6–speed transmission)

30 miles (48 km) max distance

(8–speed transmission)

OK

BEST METHOD

4WD Models

See instructions in “Recreational

Towing” under “Starting And

Operating”







Auto Transmission in PARK

Transfer Case in NEUTRAL

Tow in forward direction

NOT ALLOWED

NOT ALLOWED

BEST METHOD

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.

Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.

If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to “Manual Park

Release” or “Gear Selector Override” in this section for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.

CAUTION!



Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur.



When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen sion components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.


T

WO

-W

HEEL

D

RIVE

M

ODELS

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with the rear wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:







The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section for instructions on shifting the 8–speed trans mission to NEUTRAL when the engine is off.

The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph

(48 km/h).

The towing distance must not exceed

15 miles (24 km) for 6–speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for 8–speed transmis sion.

If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph

(48 km/h) or farther than 15 miles (24 km) for

6–speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for

8–speed transmission, tow with the rear wheels

OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly, or

(when using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 297 to hold the front wheels in the straight position) with rear wheels raised and the front wheels ON the ground.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/ or transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New


F

OUR

-W

HEEL

D

RIVE

M

ODELS

The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in

NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK.

Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And

Operating” for further information and detailed instructions.

CAUTION!



Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the remaining wheels are on the ground).

Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.



Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmis sion and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

E

MERGENCY

T

OW

H

OOKS

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks.

6

Emergency Tow Hooks



NOTE:

For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle.

WARNING!



Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.



Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen gaged, causing serious injury.

CAUTION!

Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your vehicle.

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

(EARS)

This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced

Accident Response System.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in

“Safety” for further information on the

Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function.

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in

“Safety” for further information on the Event

Data Recorder (EDR).


299

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING — GAS ENGINE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle.

Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating

Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,

600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next

500 miles (805 km).

An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under



Gas Engines:

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km),

12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

Severe Duty:

Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or

350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated predominately at idle or very low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:











Check engine oil level.

Check windshield washer fluid level.

Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear.

Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, power steering and automatic transmission (six-speed only), and fill as needed.

Check function of all interior and exterior lights.

M

AINTENANCE

P

LAN

Required Maintenance

Refer to the maintenance plan on the following pages for required maintenance. More frequent maintenance may be needed in severe conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip driving. In some extreme conditions, additional maintenance not specified in the maintenance schedule may be required.

7


300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:



Change oil and filter.









Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.

Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.

Inspect exhaust system.

Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace air cleaner filter, if necessary.









Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.

Inspect the CV/Universal joints.

Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick.

Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.





Inspect front end, and lubricate — If equipped with serviceable fittings.

Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty conditions.

NOTE:

Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.


SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

Or Years: 2

Or Kilometers:

Additional Inspections


Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary.

Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces. If gear oil leakage is suspected, check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing, change axle fluid.

Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function.

Additional Maintenance

Replace engine air filter.

Replace spark plugs.

1

Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or

150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first.

Change the automatic transmission fluid (AS66RC

Transmission Only).

X

X

X

X

3

X

X

X

4

X

X

X

X

5 6

X X

X

X

X

X

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

7



Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7

Or Kilometers:

Change the automatic transmission fluid and sump filter (AS66RC Transmission Only).

Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

Change the transfer case fluid.

Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.

X

1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.

WARNING!



You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

(Continued)

X

X

WARNING!

(Continued)



Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an acci dent.

8 9

X

10 11 12 13 14 15

X

X

X

X

X

H

EAVY

D

UTY

U

SE

O

F

T

HE

V

EHICLE

Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or

350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.


SCHEDULED SERVICING — DIESEL ENGINE

CAUTION!

Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle.

Required Maintenance Intervals

Refer to the maintenance plan on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.

More frequent maintenance may be needed in severe conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip driving. In some extreme conditions, additional maintenance not specified in the maintenance schedule may be required.

At Each Stop For Fuel

Check the engine oil level at least 30 minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.

Once A Month



Inspect the batteries, and clean and tighten the terminals as required.



Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, and automatic trans mission, and add as needed.

At Each Oil Change







Change the engine oil filter.

Inspect the exhaust system.

Inspect engine air filter cleaner. Replace the air filter cleaner, if necessary.










Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.

Inspect front end, and lubricate — If equipped with serviceable fittings.

Inspect and replace the Evaporative System

Fresh Air Filter as necessary, replacement may be more frequent if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty conditions.

Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.

NOTE:

Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge pivot joints twice a year to prevent prema ture wear.


O

IL

C

HANGE

I

NDICATOR

S

YSTEM

—

C

UMMINS

D

IESEL

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. This system will alert you when it is time to change your engine oil by displaying the words “Oil Change Due” in your instrument cluster display. The oil change reminder will remind the owner to change the engine oil every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or

500 hours, whichever comes first, except for the

Chassis Cab models configured with optional

B20 capability that are using greater than 5% levels of biodiesel, which are 12,500 miles

(20,000 km) or 400 hours, whichever comes first. Failure to change the engine oil per the maintenance schedule can result in internal engine damage.

An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under



7



Replace the engine oil and oil filter every

15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months, or sooner if prompted by the oil change indicator system. Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 15,000 miles

(24,000 km) or 12 months, whichever comes first.

NOTE:



Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months or 500 Hours, whichever comes first.



Replace the engine oil and oil filter every

12,500 miles (20,000 km) or 400 hours, whichever comes first when running greater than 5% levels of biodiesel (Chassis Cab models configured with optional B20 capa bility).

If Chassis Cab models configured with optional

B20 capability are operated with greater than

5% levels of biodiesel, the oil change interval must not exceed 12,500 miles (20,000 km) or

400 hours, whichever comes first under any circumstances. See the Fuel Requirements section for more information regarding operation with biodiesel blend (B6-B20) fuel meeting ASTM specification D-7467.

P

ERFORM

S

ERVICE

I

NDICATOR

—

C

UMMINS

D

IESEL

Your vehicle will require emissions maintenance at a set interval. To help remind you when this maintenance is due, the instrument cluster will display “Perform

Service”. When the “Perform Service” message is displayed on the instrument cluster it is necessary to have the emissions maintenance performed. Emissions maintenance may include replacing the Closed Crankcase

Ventilation (CCV) filter element. The procedure for clearing and resetting the “Perform Service” indicator message is located in the appropriate

Service Information.



M

AINTENANCE

P

LAN

— C

UMMINS

D

IESEL

E

NGINE

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first):

Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120

Or Kilometers:

Change engine oil every

15,000 miles (24,000 km) or

12 months or 500 hours or sooner if prompted by the oil change indicator system, whichever comes first.

1

Additional Inspections

Check the Diesel Exhaust Fluid

(DEF) tank, refill if necessary.

X

Rotate the tires.

X


X

Inspect front end, and lubricate

— If equipped with serviceable fittings.

Inspect engine air filter, replace if necessary.

2

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

7





Or Months:

Or Kilometers:

Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.

Inspect the brake linings.

Inspect and adjust parking brake.

Inspect drive belt; replace as necessary.

Inspect wheel bearings.

Additional Maintenance

Replace cabin air filter.

Replace engine fuel filter element.

6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X





Or Months:

Or Kilometers:

Replace chassis mounted fuel filter element.

Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces. If gear oil leakage is suspected, check the fluid level.

If using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing change the axle fluid.

3

Inspect the transfer case fluid

(4x4), change for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.

Change the transfer case fluid

(4x4).

6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120

X X

X

X X

X

X

X X

X

X X

X

X

X X

X

7





Or Months:

Or Kilometers:

Change automatic transmission fluid (AS69RC transmission only).

Change the automatic transmission fluid and sump filter (AS69RC transmission only).

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, fleet, or frequent trailer towing (68RFE transmission only).

Change automatic transmission fluid and filter(s).

Replace Crankcase Ventilation

Filter (CCV).

6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120

X X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X





Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120

Or Kilometers:

Flush and replace power steering fluid.

Flush and replace engine coolant. ***

X

X

1. Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months or 500 Hours, whichever comes first.

2. Under no circumstances should the air cleaner filter element exceed 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months, whichever comes first.

3. Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces every 20,000 miles (32,000 km). If gear oil leakage is suspected, check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing change the axle fluid every 20,000 miles (32,000 km).

Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all receipts.

WARNING!



You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.



Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.

7

CAUTION!

***The manufacturer highly recommends that all cooling system service, maintenance, and repairs be performed by an authorized dealer.



ENGINE COMPARTMENT

6.4L E

NGINE

1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap

2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

3 — Engine Oil Fill

4 — Engine Oil Dipstick

5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap

6 — Battery

7 — Air Cleaner Filter

8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap

9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap


6.7L E

NGINE


1 — Battery

2 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap

3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir

4 — Engine Oil Fill

5 — Engine Oil Dipstick

6 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick

7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap

8 — Battery

9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap

11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap


7



C

HECKING

O

IL

L

EVEL

— G

AS

E

NGINE

To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicle's engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the

SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines.

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.

C

HECKING

O

IL

L

EVEL

— D

IESEL

E

NGINE

To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicle's engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals. The best time to check the oil level is before starting the engine after it has been parked overnight. When checking oil after operating the engine, first ensure the engine is at full operating temperature, then wait for

30 minutes after engine shutdown to check the oil.

1 — ADD Range

2 — Full Mark

3 — SAFE Range

Engine Oil Dipstick

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Add oil only when the level on the dipstick is below the “ADD” mark. The total capacity from the ADD mark to the Full mark is

2 Quarts (1.9Liters).

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.

Never operate the engine with oil level below the “ADD” mark or above the upper “SAFE” mark.

A

DDING

W

ASHER

F

LUID

The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).

When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.


WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.

After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield washer solution used with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.

M

AINTENANCE

-F

REE

B

ATTERY

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

NOTE:

Replacement batteries should both be of equal capacity to prevent damage to the vehicle's charging system.

WARNING!



Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump

Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emer gency” for further information.



Battery gas is flammable and explosive.

Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other.



Battery posts, terminals, and related acces sories contain lead and lead compounds.

Wash hands after handling.


CAUTION!



It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the nega tive cable is attached to the negative post.

Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion.



If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

P

RESSURE

W

ASHING

CAUTION!

Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure washer is not recommended.

Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and connections however, the pressures generated by these machines is such that complete protection against water ingress cannot be guaranteed.

7



DEALER SERVICE

An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

E

NGINE

O

IL

Change Engine Oil — Gas Engine

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this chapter for further information.

NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km),

12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers.

Change Engine Oil — Diesel Engine

Refer to the “Scheduled Servicing” for the proper maintenance intervals.

Engine Oil Selection — Gas Engine

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS-12633.

NOTE:

Hemi engines (6.4L) at times can tick right after startup and then quiet down after approxi mately 30 seconds. This is normal and will not harm the engine. This characteristic can be caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the vehicle is started then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon restarting, you may experi ence a ticking sound. Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused for an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or extended idling. If the engine continues to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on, see the nearest authorized dealer

Engine Oil Selection — Diesel Engine

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API CK-4 certified and meet the requirements of FCA US LLC. Use Mopar or an equivalent oil meeting FCA Material Standard

MS-10902. Products meeting Cummins CES

20081 may also be used. The identification of these engine oils are typically located on the back of the oil container.

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine

Oil Identification Symbol — Gas Engine

This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American

Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API

Certified engine oils.


This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,

5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine.



American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine

Oil Identification Symbol — Diesel Engine

This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American

Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API

Certified engine oils.

Oils with a high ash content may produce damaging deposits on cylinder head valves and/or aftertreatment system damage. A maximum sulfated ash content of 1.00 mass % is recommended for all oil used in the engine.

The same oil change interval is to be followed for synthetic oil as for petroleum based oil. Also, synthetic oil must meet the same performance specifications as petroleum oil.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine.



Engine Oil Viscosity — Gas Engine

Use Mopar SAE 0W-40 engine oil approved to

FCA Material Standard MS-12633 such as

Pennzoil Ultra equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

Engine Oil Viscosity — Diesel Engine

In ambient temperatures above 0°F (-18°C), we recommend you use SAE 10W-30 engine oil such as Mopar, Shell Rotella and Shell Rimula that meets FCA Material Standard MS-10902 and the API CK-4 engine oil category is required.

Products meeting Cummins CES 20081 may

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315 also be used. The identification of these engine oils is typically located on the back of the oil container.

In ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), we recommend you use SAE 5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as Mopar, Shell Rotella and

Shell Rimula that meets FCA Material Standard

MS-10902 and the API CK-4 engine oil category is required.

CAUTION!

Failure to use SAE 5W-40 synthetic engine oil in ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C) could result in severe engine damage.

Engine oil not designated by the FCA or

Cummins Material Standards and API CK-4 should not be used, as engine and exhaust system durability may be compromised. The

7


316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in

“Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.

Synthetic Engine Oils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.

Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.

Materials Added To Engine Oil

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil

Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

E

NGINE

O

IL

F

ILTER

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to ensure most efficient service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended.

E

NGINE

A

IR

C

LEANER

F

ILTER

Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper maintenance intervals.

NOTE:

Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions” maintenance interval if applicable.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.

Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to ensure most efficient service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And

Replacement — Gas Engine

Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should change your air cleaner filter.


Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal

1. With suitable tool fully loosen (six) fasteners on air cleaner filter.

Air Cleaner Filter

1 — Fasteners

2 — Air Hose Clamp

3 — Air Cleaner Cover

2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.

3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing assembly.


Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and

Replacement — Diesel Engine

Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should change your air cleaner filter.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal

1. Remove the screws from the air cleaner cover.

Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly

1 — Air Cleaner Cover


Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation

NOTE:

Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present before replacing the air filter element.

1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface facing downward.

2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly.

3. Tighten the fasteners (six) on the air cleaner filter assembly

Air Cleaner Filter Cover

1 — Air Cleaner Filter Cover

2 — Screws

2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter.

7



3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing assembly.

Air Cleaner Filter


2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation

NOTE:

Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present before replacing the air filter element.

1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface facing downward.

2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly locating tabs.

3. Install screws to secure the air cleaner cover to the housing assembly.

A

IR

C

ONDITIONER

M

AINTENANCE

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.

Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

WARNING!





Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri cants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unap proved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs.

Refer to Warranty Information Book, for further warranty information.

The air conditioning system contains refrig erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components.



Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling

R-134a — If Equipped

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE:

Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling

R-1234yf — If Equipped

R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the

Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with a low

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319 global-warming potential. The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE:

Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.

Cabin Air Filter Replacement

Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the blower operating, the blower can contact hands and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.

The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:

1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.

2. With the glove compartment door open, remove the glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compartment door. Lift the clip out of glove compartment door and release into dash panel.


3. There are travel stops on both sides of the glove compartment. Push inward on right side of the glove compartment travel stop to disengage the stop. Then pull the right of the glove compartment outward (away from the hinge) to disengaging the right side of the compartment from the hinge. Continue by removing the left side from the hinge by slightly lowering the compartment while pulling outward until it is completely disengaged from the hinge.

Right Side Of Glove Compartment

1 — Glove Compartment Door

2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether

Glove Compartment

1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop



7



4. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the finger tabs on each end of the filter cover.

Filter Cover

1 — Finger Tabs

Filter Cover Removal

5. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing.

Cabin Air Filter

6. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter cover, press on each end until you hear an audible click.

CAUTION!

The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter.

Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often.

7. Reinstall the glove compartment on the hinges.

8. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall the glove compartment past the travel stops by pushing in on the glove compartment sides.

Glove Compartment

1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop



NOTE:

Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.

9. Reattach the glove compartment tension tether by inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment and sliding the clip away from the face of the glove compartment door.


A

CCESSORY

D

RIVE

B

ELT

I

NSPECTION

WARNING!



Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with vehicle running.



When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving fan blades.



You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a compe tent mechanic.

When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.

Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)

Conditions that would require replacement:



Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa rated from belt body)













Rib or belt wear

Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)

Belt slips

“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain correct position on pulley)

Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before new belt is installed)

Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)


Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment.

Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.

D

RAINING

F

UEL

/W

ATER

S

EPARATOR

F

ILTER

There are two fuel filter assemblies. One is located on the driver's side of the engine. The best access to this water drain valve is from under the hood. The second one is on the under body, located in front of the rear axle above the drive shaft on pick-up models. The Chassis Cab models second filter location is on the frame behind the front axle. The best access to this water drain valve is from under the vehicle.

CAUTION!



Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter when the engine is running.



Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces. Drain the filter into an appro priate container.

7



If water is detected in the water separator while the engine is running, or while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the “Water In Fuel

Indicator Light” will illuminate and an audible chime will be heard five times. At this point you should stop the engine and drain the water from both of the filters.

CAUTION!

If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” remains on, DO NOT START the engine before you drain water from the fuel filters to avoid engine damage.

If the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” comes on and a single chime is heard while you are driving, or with the ignition switch in the ON position, there may be a problem with your water separator wiring or sensor. See an authorized dealer for service.

Upon proper draining of the water from both fuel filters, the “Water In Fuel Indicator Light” will remain illuminated for approximately

10 seconds. If the water was drained while the engine was running, the “Water In Fuel Indicator

Light” may remain on for approximately three minutes.

NOTE:

Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids from your vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the envi ronment. Contact an authorized dealer, service station, or government agency for advice on recycling programs and for where used fluids and filters can be properly disposed of in your area.

Drain the fuel/water separator filters when the

“Water In Fuel Indicator Light” is ON. Within

10 minutes of vehicle shutdown, turn the engine mounted filter drain valve (located on the side of the filter assembly) counterclockwise quarter turn, and turn the under body mounted filter drain valve (located on the bottom of the filter assembly) counterclockwise wise one full turn. Then turn the ignition switch to the ON position, and allow any accumulated water to drain. Leave the drain valve open until all water and contaminants have been removed. When clean fuel is visible, close the drain valve following these guidelines:

1. Rotate the drain clockwise to close until you feel resistance from the internal seal.

2. Continue turning the drain half of a turn to properly compress the seal.

NOTE:

Over-compression of the seal due to over-tight ening of the drain will damage the seal, cause a leak, and require the entire sensor to be replaced.

3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.

The sensor drain should not be over-tightened during normal service operations to avoid internal damage and future fuel leaks. The drain should be closed and secured without the use of tools.

If more than a couple ounces/milliliters of fuel have been drained, follow the directions for

“Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel.”

E

NGINE

M

OUNTED

F

UEL

F

ILTER

R

EPLACEMENT

NOTE:



Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturer's filtration and water sepa rating requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.




The engine mounted filter housing is equipped with a No-Filter-No-Run (NFNR) feature. Engine will not run if: a. No filter is installed.

b. Inferior/Non-approved filter is used. Use of OEM filter is required to ensure vehicle will run.

Engine Mounted Fuel Filter Assembly

1 — Drain Valve

CAUTION!




(Continued)

CAUTION!

(Continued)



Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris could be introduced into the fuel filter during this action. It is best to install the filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel system.

1. Ensure engine is turned off.

2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter drain hose.

3. Open the water drain valve a quarter turn counterclockwise and completely drain fuel and water into the approved container.

4. Close the water drain valve.

5. Remove lid using a socket or strap wrench.

Rotate counterclockwise for removal.

Remove used o-ring and discard it.

6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the housing and dispose of according to your local regulations.

7. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid and housing.


8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on the filter housing and lubricate with clean engine oil.

9. Remove new filter cartridge from plastic bag and install into housing.

NOTE:

Do not remove cartridge from bag until you reach this step in order to keep cartridge clean.

10. Push down on the cartridge to ensure it is properly seated. Do not pre-fill the filter housing with fuel.

11. Install lid onto housing and tighten to

22.5 ft lbs (30.5 N.m). Do not overtighten the lid.

12. Prime the engine using the procedure in

“Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel.”

Then start the engine and confirm there are no leaks.

7



U

NDERBODY

M

OUNTED

F

UEL

F

ILTER

R

EPLACEMENT

NOTE:





Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturer's filtration and water sepa rating requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.

The underbody mounted filter housing will cause the engine not to run if: a. No filter is installed.

Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter Assembly

1 — Drain Valve

CAUTION!






Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a new fuel filter. There is a possibility debris could be introduced into the fuel filter during this action. It is best to install the filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to prime the fuel system.

1. Ensure engine is turned off.

2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter drain hose.

3. Open the water drain valve one full turn counterclockwise and completely drain fuel and water into the approved container.

4. Close the water drain valve.

5. Remove lid using a socket or strap wrench.

Rotate counterclockwise for removal.

Remove used o-ring and discard it.

6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the housing and dispose of according to your local regulations.

7. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid and housing.

8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on the filter housing and lubricate with clean engine oil.

NOTE:

Water In Fuel (WIF) sensor is re-usable. Service kit comes with new o-ring for filter canister and

WIF sensor.

P

RIMING

I

F

T

HE

E

NGINE

H

AS

R

UN

O

UT

O

F

F

UEL

WARNING!

Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious injury or death.

1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the tank, approximately 2 to 5 gal (8L to 19L).

2. Three priming cycles must be completed.

Turn ignition to the RUN position and wait approximately 30 seconds. This will activate the in tank fuel pump. Turn the ignition

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325 switch to the off position, and leave off for at least 30 seconds. Repeat this procedure three times before cranking the engine.

3. Start the engine using the “Normal Starting” procedure. Refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.

4. Once the engine starts, allow the engine to idle for a minimum of 30 seconds.

CAUTION!

Do not engage the starter motor for more than 15 seconds at a time. Allow two minutes between the cranking intervals.

NOTE:

The engine may run rough until the air is forced from all the fuel lines.

WARNING!

Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent. They can be unstable under certain conditions and be hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.

CAUTION!

Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline, the use of these fuels can cause damage to the fuel system.

NOTE:











A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel, meeting

ASTM specification D-975 may be used with your Cummins diesel engine. (Chassis Cab models not configured with B20 capability.)

A maximum blend of 20% biodiesel, meeting

ASTM specification D-7467 may be used with your Cummins diesel engine. (Pickup models and Chassis Cab models configured with

B20 capability.)

Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can negatively impact the fuel filter's ability to separate water from the fuel, resulting in high pressure fuel system corrosion or damage.

Ethanol blends are not recommended or approved for use with your Cummins diesel engine.

In addition, commercially available fuel addi tives are not necessary for the proper opera tion of your Cummins diesel engine.


I

NTERVENTION

R

EGENERATION

S

TRATEGY

— M

ESSAGE

P

ROCESS

F

LOW

The Cummins diesel engine meets all

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Heavy

Duty Diesel Engine Emissions Standards, resulting in one of the lowest emitting diesel engines ever produced.

To achieve these emissions standards, your vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art engine and exhaust system. The engine and exhaust after-treatment system work together to achieve the EPA Heavy Duty Diesel Engine

Emissions Standards. These systems are seamlessly integrated into your vehicle and managed by the Cummins Powertrain Control

Module (PCM). The PCM manages engine combustion to allow the exhaust system’s catalyst to trap and burn Particulate Matter

(PM) pollutants, with no input or interaction on your part.

If the engine is allowed to idle or the truck is driven on low engine speed drive cycles for more than two hours, the system will automatically enter an emissions operating mode that will increase the engine idle speed to

900 RPM (1,050 RPM for Chassis Cab). While in this mode, which is designed to help maintain

7


326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE the Diesel Particulate Filter, the engine idle speed will return to normal when the brake pedal is applied. A small change in engine tone or a slight change in engine performance while accelerating may also be noticeable at speeds below 20 mph (32 kmh). This operating mode may last for up to an hour of idle time, or around

20 minutes of driving time.

Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert you to additional maintenance required on your truck or engine.



WARNING!


D

IESEL

E

XHAUST

F

LUID

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) sometimes known simply by the name of its active component,

UREA—is a key component of Selective Catalytic

Reduction (SCR) systems, which help diesel vehicles meet stringent emission regulations.

DEF is a liquid reducing agent that reacts with engine exhaust in the presence of a catalyst to convert smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx) into harmless nitrogen and water vapor.


Specification” for further information.

You can receive assistance in locating DEF in the United States by calling 866-RAM-INFO

(866-726-4636). In Canada call

1–800–465–2001 (English) or

1–800–387–9983 (French)

B

ODY

L

UBRICATION

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess, oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and

Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder

Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

W

INDSHIELD

W

IPER

B

LADES

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.


NOTE:

Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.

The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected periodically, not just when wiper performance problems are experienced. This inspection should include the following points:



Wear or uneven edges







Foreign material

Hardening or cracking

Deformation or fatigue

If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.

Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

CAUTION!

Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged.

1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.

2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip up the locking tab.


3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from the arm and use one finger push the release tab toward the wiper arm.

1 — Locking Tab

2 — Wiper

3 — Release Tab

Wiper Disengaging

4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.

7

Wiper Locking Assembly

1 — Wiper

2 — Locking Tab



5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade down toward the base of the wiper arm and away from the J hook in the end of the wiper arm).

Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm

1 — Wiper

2 — Locking Tab

3 — Wiper Arm J Hook

6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.

Installing The Front Wipers

1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.

2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper locking tab open.

3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade under the locking tab.

4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm until it is latched

(engagement will be accompanied by an audible click). Fold down the latch release tab and snap it into its locked position.

5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.

E

XHAUST

S

YSTEM

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!



Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to

“Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further informa tion.





CAUTION!



The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seri ously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.



Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:







Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans mission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.

Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the vehicle.

Do not idle the engine with any ignition components disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunc tioning operating conditions.


C

OOLING

S

YSTEM

WARNING!



You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.



Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The fan starts automati cally and may start at any time, whether the engine is running or not.



When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.

7

Engine Coolant Checks

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in


330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the

A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.

Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.

DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP

WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill

NOTE:

Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant

(antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).


Selection Of Coolant


Specifications” for further information.

NOTE:





Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology

(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection. Organic Additive Technology

(OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive

Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant

(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant

(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to

MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.

Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod -



 ucts, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.

This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant

(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom mended.

Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact an authorized dealer.

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to

MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles

(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331 coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS.90032. When adding engine coolant

(antifreeze):



We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/

Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)

Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material

Standard MS.90032.



Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA

Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F

(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an authorized dealer for assistance.



Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/ engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

NOTE:



It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.






Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system, please contact a local autho rized dealer.

Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant

(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/ recovery tank if so equipped.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!



Do not open hot engine cooling system.

Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure.



Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

7



Checking Coolant Level — 6.4L Engine

The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the “MIN” and

“MAX” range on the bottle when the engine is cold.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional engine coolant

(antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.

Do not overfill.

Points To Remember

NOTE:

When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compart ment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the ther mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti freeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.



Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.









Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing.

If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi tions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.

Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant

(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum compo nents.

Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.





Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.

Do not change the thermostat for Summer or

Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis factory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

C

HARGE

A

IR

C

OOLER

— I

NTER

-C

OOLER

The charge air cooler is positioned below the radiator and the air conditioner condenser. Air enters the engine through the air cleaner and passes through the turbocharger, where it is pressurized. This pressurized air rapidly reaches high temperature. The air is then directed through a hose to the charge air cooler and through another hose to the intake manifold of the engine. The air entering the engine has been cooled by about 50° to 100°F

(10° to 38°C). This cooling process enables more efficient burning of fuel resulting in fewer emissions.

To guarantee optimum performance of the system, keep the surfaces of the charge air cooler, condenser and radiator clean and free of debris. Periodically check the hoses leading to and from the charge air cooler for cracks or loose clamps resulting in loss of pressure and reduced engine performance.


B

RAKE

S

YSTEM

In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the

“Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency.

Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder

The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure.

If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the designated marks on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing cap.

With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted.



WARNING!



Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

(Continued)


WARNING!

(Continued)



To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reser voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.



Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.

Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.



Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision.

7



A

UTOMATIC

T

RANSMISSION

Selection Of Lubricant

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.


Specifications”. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder, and

(for six-speed transmissions) will require more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical

Specifications” for fluid specifications.

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid

(ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in six-speed transmissions. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Fluid Level Check — Eight-Speed

Transmission

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools.

If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Fluid Level Check — Six-Speed

Transmission

It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is at normal operating temperature (158-176°F [70-80°C]). This normally occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips. You can read the transmission sump temperature in the instrument cluster screen refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting

To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information.



Use the following procedure to check the transmission fluid level properly:

1. Monitor the transmission temperature using the instrument cluster display, and operate the vehicle as required to reach the normal operating temperature. If the transmission is not functioning properly, or the vehicle cannot be driven, see the NOTE and CAUTION below about checking the fluid level at colder temperatures.

2. Park the vehicle on level ground.

3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60 seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of this procedure.

4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake pedal.

5. Place the gear selector momentarily into each gear position (allowing time for the transmission to fully engage in each position), ending with the transmission in

PARK.

6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated.

7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.

Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the actual level is at or above the hole. The fluid level should be between the

“HOT” (upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. If the fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level.

Do not overfill. Use ONLY the specified fluid refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in

“Technical Specifications” for fluid specifi cations. After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.

NOTE:

If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature, the fluid level should be between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick with the fluid at 60-70°F

(16-21°C). Only use the COLD region of the dipstick as a rough reference when setting the fluid level after a transmission service or fluid change. Re-check the fluid level, and adjust as required, once the transmission reaches normal operating temperature.

CAUTION!

If the fluid temperature is below 50 °F (10 °C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to warm the fluid.

8. Reinsert the dipstick. Check for leaks.

Release the parking brake.

NOTE:

If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature, the fluid level should be between the two COLD (lower) holes on the dipstick with the fluid at 68-86°F

(20-30°C). Only use the COLD region of the dipstick as a rough reference when setting the fluid level after a transmission service or fluid change. Re-check the fluid level, and adjust as required, once the transmission reaches normal operating temperature.

CAUTION!

If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to warm the fluid.

7



Fluid And Filter Changes — Eight-Speed

Transmission

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle.

Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

Fluid And Filter Changes — Six Speed

Transmission

Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance intervals.

In addition, change the fluid and filters if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.

R

EAR

A

XLE

A

ND

4

X

4 F

RONT

D

RIVING

A

XLE

F

LUID

L

EVEL

For models with 9.25 in Front Axles and 11.5 in

Rear Axles, refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in

“Servicing And Maintenance” for further information. For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons, the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.

When checking the fluid level, the vehicle should be in a level position. The fluid level at room temperature should be as follows:

3500 Front Axle: ¼ inch ± ¼ inch (6.4 mm ±

6.4 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.

3500 Rear Axle: ¼ inch ± ¼ inch (6.4 mm ±

6.4 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.

4500/5500 Front Axle: ¼ inch +/- ¼ inch

(6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.

4500/5500 Rear Axle: 1/8 inch +/- 1/8 inch

(3.2 mm +/- 3.2 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole.

Drain And Refill

On 4500/5500 vehicles, remove the lower bolt to drain the axle fluid.

4500/5500 Rear Axle Plugs

1 — 4500/5500 Rear Axle Fluid Fill Plug

2 — 4500/5500 Rear Axle Fluid Drain Plug

Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this chapter for the proper maintenance intervals.

Lubricant Selection



NOTE:

The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of differ ential components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be encountered in some off-highway types of service, will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.


Limited-Slip Differentials DO REQUIRE limited slip oil additive (friction modifiers).

NOTE:

Slight noise and mild shuddering may be evident while turning a vehicle with limited slip differential on concrete or dry pavement. These conditions should be considered normal opera tion of the limited slip differential.

T

RANSFER

C

ASE

Selection Of Lubricant

Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in

“Technical Specifications” for further information.

Fluid Level Check

This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.

Drain And Refill


N

OISE

C

ONTROL

S

YSTEM

R

EQUIRED

M

AINTENANCE

& W

ARRANTY

All vehicles built over 10,000 lbs. (4,535 kg)

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating and manufactured for sale and use in the United States are required to comply with the Federal

Government's Exterior Noise Regulations.

These vehicles can be identified by the Noise

Emission Control Label located in the operator's compartment.

Required Maintenance For Noise Control

Systems

The following maintenance services must be performed every six months or 7,500 miles

(12,000 km) whichever comes first, to ensure proper operation of the noise control systems.

In addition, inspection and service should be

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337 performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Proper maintenance of the entire vehicle will help the effectiveness of the noise control systems.

Exhaust System

Inspect the entire exhaust system for leaks and damaged parts. Devices such as hangers, clamps, and U-bolts should be tight and in good condition. Damaged components, burned or blown out mufflers, burned or rusted out exhaust pipes should be replaced according to the procedures and specifications outlined in the appropriate service manual.

Air Cleaner Assembly

Inspect air cleaner housing for proper assembly and fit. Make certain that the air cleaner is properly positioned and that the cover is tight.

Check all hoses leading to the air cleaner for tightness. The air filter element must also be clean and serviced according to the instructions outlined in the Scheduled Maintenance section of this manual.

Tampering With Noise Control System

Prohibited

Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing thereof: (1) the removal or rendering

7


338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE inoperative by any person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair, or replacement, of any device or element of design incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use, or (2) the use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has been removed or rendered inoperative by any person.

Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are the acts listed below.

EXHAUST SYSTEM



Removal or rendering inoperative exhaust system components including the muffler or tailpipe.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM





Removal or rendering inoperative the fan clutch.

Removal of the fan shroud.

AIR CLEANER



Removal of the air cleaner.





Removal of the air cleaner filter element from the air cleaner housing.

Removal of the air ducting.

Maintenance Log and Service Chart (Diesel Engines)

Noise Emission Warranty

The manufacturer warrants that this vehicle as manufactured by the manufacturer, was designed, built and equipped to conform at the time it left the manufacturer's control with all applicable U.S. EPA Noise Control Regulations.

This warranty covers this vehicle as designed, built and equipped by the manufacturer, and is not limited to any particular part, component or system of the vehicle manufactured by the manufacturer. Defects in design, assembly or in any part, component or system of the vehicle as manufactured by the manufacturer, which, at the time it left the manufacturer's control, caused noise emissions to exceed Federal standards, are covered by this warranty for the life of the vehicle.

Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log — Insert Month, Day, Year under column mileage closest to the mileage at which service was performed.

MILES

KILOMETERS

7,500

12,000

15,000

24 ,000

22,500

36,000

30,000

48,000

37,500

60,000

45,000

72,000

52,500

84,000

Exhaust systeminspect

Air cleaner assemblyinspect

60,000

96,000



Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log — Insert Month, Day, Year under column mileage closest to the mileage at which service was performed.

ODOMETER

READING

PERFORMED

BY

PERFORMED

AT

MILES

KILOMETERS

Exhaust systeminspect

Air cleaner assemblyinspect

ODOMETER

READING

PERFORMED

BY

PERFORMED

AT

67,500

108,000

75,000

120,000

82,500

132,000

90,000

144,000

97,500

156,000

105,000

168,000

112,500

180,000

120,000

192,000

7



HOISTING

A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking locations. Refer to the graphics that show jacking locations. However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be used on any other parts of the underbody.

CAUTION!

Never use a floor jack directly under the differential housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle may result.

TIRES

T

IRE

S

AFETY

I

NFORMATION

Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following information: Tire Markings, Tire

Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and

Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.

Tire Markings

Tire Markings

1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code

(TIN)

2 — Size Designation

3 — Service Description

4 — Maximum Load

5 — Maximum Pressure

6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera

-

ture Grades

NOTE:











P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on

US design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15

95H.

European — Metric tire sizing is based on

European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:

T145/80D18 103M.

High flotation tire sizing is based on US design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:

31x10.5 R15 LT.



Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or

"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or

T or S = Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)



Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

R = Construction code





"R" means radial construction, or

"D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service Description:

95 = Load Index



A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

7



EXAMPLE:

H = Speed Symbol



A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions



The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

Load Identification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:







XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

LL = Light load tire or

C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation



This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)



EXAMPLE:

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)



03 means the 3rd week

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)





01 means the year 2001

Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:

031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term

B-pillar

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Maximum Inflation Pressure

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Tire Placard

Definition

The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.

A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

7



Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

NOTE:

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side door.

Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)

Tire And Loading Information Placard


This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading

Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the

“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.

NOTE:

Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded.

For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle

Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the

Tire and Loading Information placard. The

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345 combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load

Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or

XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Metric Example For Load Limit

For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340

(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.


NOTE:





If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/ luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

7



WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous.

Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

T

IRES

— G

ENERAL

I

NFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.

Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:



Safety







Fuel Economy

Tread Wear

Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability


Safety

WARNING!



Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions.



Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.



Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.



Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.



Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.



Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.



Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:



Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.



Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.


At least once a month:





Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.

Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.

7



Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi

(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the

Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi

(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi

(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires.

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria:





The tire has not been driven on when flat.

The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).



The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load

Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to be reused.

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive

50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.

A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a

Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire condition, please replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to be reused when driven under run flat mode

14 psi (96 kPa) condition.


NOTE:

TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on a flat tire condition.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of

Emergency” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

Tire Tread

1 — Worn Tire

2 — New Tire

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.


Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to:









Driving style.

Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace ment.

Distance driven.

Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of

V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

7



NOTE:

Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed.

Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear

Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and

Loading Information placard or the Vehicle

Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall.

See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the

“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!



Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unap proved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!

(Continued)



Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision.



Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

T

IRE

T

YPES

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons

(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the

M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351 sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires — If

Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F

(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.

For more information, contact an authorized dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types.


S

PARE

T

IRES

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.

Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in

“Starting And Operating” for restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated for temporary emergency use.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire

And Wheel — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.

If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern.

7



Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and

Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph

(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped

The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.

Collapsible spare tire description example:

165/80-17 101P.

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.

WARNING!

Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph

(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.


Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel.

This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.

W

HEEL

A

ND

W

HEEL

T

RIM

C

ARE

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch.

Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353 dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing.

CAUTION!

Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car washes may damage the wheel's protective finish.


Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,

Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar

Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.

7



CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

NOTE:

If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove the water droplets from the brake components. This activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when braking.

Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or

Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels

CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.

They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY

USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT

CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.

T

IRE

C

HAINS AND

T

RACTION

D

EVICES

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following traction devices are recommended. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage.





Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer.

No other tire sizes are recommended for use with a tire chain or traction device.

Chassis Cab 3500 (Single Rear Wheel) Models





Install on rear tires only.

For LT275/70R18E tire, use of a U-class snow chain is recommended.

Chassis Cab 3500 4x2 (Dual Rear Wheel)

Models






For a LT235/80R17E tire, use of a U-class snow chain is recommended.

Chassis Cab 3500 4x4 (Dual Rear Wheel)

Models



Install on front/rear tires.



For a LT235/80R17E tire, use of a U-class snow chain is recommended.

Chassis Cab 4500/5500 Models






For a 225/70R19.5G tire, use of a U-class snow chain is recommended.

WARNING!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S,

Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.


CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions:



Because of restricted traction device clear ance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only trac tion devices in good condition are used.

Broken devices can cause serious damage.

Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage.

Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use.



Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about 0.5 mile

(0.8 km). Autosock devices do not require retightening.



Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).



Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.



Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

(Continued)



Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use.

Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).



Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

T

IRE

R

OTATION

R

ECOMMENDATIONS

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.


Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)

NOTE:

On Canadian vehicles only, if your vehicle is equipped with All-Season type tires on the front and On/Off Road type tires mounted on the rear, do not use a front to back rotation pattern.

Instead, rotate your tires side to side at the recommended intervals.

7



Dual Rear Wheels

Tire Rotation

The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set. To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all four tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires.

NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Information System (TPIS):



The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses unique sensors in the inner rear wheels to help identify them from the outer rear wheels, because of this, the inner and outer wheel locations can’t be switched.



After a tire rotation is completed, as shown below, the system can auto learn the locations of each sensor ID. Auto learning/localization

 occurs when the vehicle ignition status is changed from Off to On and speeds of greater than 5 mph (8 km/h) are obtained and remain over 5 mph (8 km/h) for at about a 15 minute period. You may need to drive for 20 minutes to account slower speeds and stops.

If the tires are rotated incorrectly, the Auto localization of the TPIS sensors will fail to locate correctly resulting in incorrect loca tions for the pressure values displayed in the

Instrument Cluster.

CAUTION!



4500/5500 Dual Rear Tires may only have one approved direction of rotation. This is to accommodate the asymmetrical design

(tread pattern) of the On/Off road tire.



When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to be remounted on the rim or installed at a different location to maintain the correct placement of the tire on the wheel relative to the tire/wheel position on the vehicle. For example, if the spare is used to replace an outer rear tire it will have to be remounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished inward. That way the tread design of asymmetrical tires will maintain proper position.

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by the National

Highway Traffic Safety Administration.

The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

T

READWEAR

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart


significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

T

RACTION

G

RADES

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

T

EMPERATURE

G

RADES

The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.


STORING THE VEHICLE

If you are storing your vehicle for more than

21 days, we recommend that you take the following steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:



Disconnect the negative cable from battery.



Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

BODYWORK

P

ROTECTION

F

ROM

A

TMOSPHERIC

A

GENTS

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the

7


358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:











Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

Stone and gravel impact.

Insects, tree sap and tar.

Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

B

ODY

A

ND

U

NDERBODY

M

AINTENANCE

Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

P

RESERVING

T

HE

B

ODYWORK

Washing







Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car

Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.

If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar

Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.

Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as

Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.



Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!



Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.



Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi

(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Special Care





If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar riage at least once a month.

It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open.





If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner.

If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired






 as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.

If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.

If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

INTERIORS

S

EATS

A

ND

F

ABRIC

P

ARTS

Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If

Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:



Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.



Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.







For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose

Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.


If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

NOTE:

If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a wet soft cloth until all residue is removed.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection.

Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).

7



P

LASTIC

A

ND

C

OATED

P

ARTS

Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

CAUTION!



Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause perma nent damage. Wipe away immediately.



Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster

Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

L

EATHER

P

ARTS

Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.

Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.

Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.

NOTE:

If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.

CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or

Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may result.

G

LASS

S

URFACES

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner.

Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.

Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.


361

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

IDENTIFICATION DATA

V

EHICLE

I

DENTIFICATION

N

UMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield.

Vehicle Identification Number

NOTE:

It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

BRAKE SYSTEM

If power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated brake applications with the engine off), the brakes will still function.

However, you will experience a substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.

If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal braking capability, the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation of the “Brake Warning

Light” and/or the “ABS Warning Light” during brake use.

H

YDRAULIC

B

RAKE

A

SSIST

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro-boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering system. You may experience some clicking or hissing noises from the hydro-boost system during hard braking conditions.

NOTE:

Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches operating temperature.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/ bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six sided (hex) deep wall socket.

T

ORQUE

S

PECIFICATIONS

Lug Nut/

Bolt

Torque

Lug Nut/

Bolt Type

**Lug

Nut/Bolt

Size

Lug Nut/

Bolt

Socket

Size

120-150

Ft-Lbs

(160-200

N·m)

130-160

Ft-Lbs

(190-220

N·m)

Cone

Flanged

M14 x

1.50

22 mm

**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/ bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.

8


362 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

NOTE:

Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted.

The lug nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are being rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and add two drops of oil at the interface between the hex and the washer.

Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt (do not insert it half way).

Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.

Oil Interface Location

Wheel Mounting Surface

Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the torques listed in the table. Go through the sequence a second time to verify that specific torque has been achieved. Retighten to specifications after 25 miles (40 km) and check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel.

8/10 Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Patterns

1 — 10 Bolt Pattern

2 — 8 Bolt Pattern

It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued to specifications at all times. Torque wheel stud nuts to specifications at each lubrication interval.

All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is especially important during the first few hundred miles/ kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set. All wheel nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel. The

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363 wheel nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque. Tighten the wheel nuts to final torque in increments. Progress around the bolt circle, tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel nut just previously tightened until final torque is achieved.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GAS ENGINE

6.4L E

NGINE

Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than 15% in this engine.

This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having a posted octane number range of 87 to 89 as specified by the

(R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.

While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern.

However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than

87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

R

EFORMULATED

G

ASOLINE

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as

“Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 363

M

ATERIALS

A

DDED

T

O

F

UEL

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.

Designated TOP TIER Detergent

Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of TOP

TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.

8



G

ASOLINE

/O

XYGENATE

B

LENDS

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or gasoline containing more than

15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the Malfunction

Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than

15% ethanol (E-15).

Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

D

O

N

OT

U

SE

E-85 I

N

N

ON

-F

LEX

F

UEL

V

EHICLES

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol

(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with

E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:











Operate in a lean mode.

OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.

Poor engine performance.

Poor cold start and cold drivability.

Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

CNG A

ND

LP F

UEL

S

YSTEM

M

ODIFICATIONS

Modifications that allow the engine to run on

Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid

Propane (LP) may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running

CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MMT I

N

G

ASOLINE

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl

(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without

MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains

MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and

California reformulated gasoline.

F

UEL

S

YSTEM

C

AUTIONS

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance:



The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by

Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.

(Continued)


CAUTION!

(Continued)



An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunc tioning and may require immediate service.

Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.



The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol.

Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsi bility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

C

ARBON

M

ONOXIDE

W

ARNINGS

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:



Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.



Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE

Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low


Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur

Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system.

For most year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM (formerly known as the American

Society for Testing and Materials) specification

D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance. If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or is required to operate at colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged periods, use climatized

No. 2 diesel fuel or dilute the No. 2 diesel fuel with 50% No. 1 diesel fuel. This will provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters.

WARNING!

Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent. They can be unstable under certain conditions and hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.

Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water.

To prevent fuel system trouble, drain the accumulated water from the fuel/water separator using the fuel/water separator drain

8


366 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS provided on both fuel filters. If you buy good quality fuel and follow the cold weather advice above, fuel conditioners should not be required in your vehicle. If available in your area, a high cetane “premium” diesel fuel may offer improved cold-starting and warm-up performance.

CAUTION!

If the “Water in Fuel Indicator Light” remains on, DO NOT START engine before you drain the water from the fuel filter(s) to avoid engine damage. Refer to “Draining Fuel/



F

UEL

S

PECIFICATIONS

The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine has been developed to take advantage of the high energy content and generally lower cost No. 2 Ultra Low

Sulfur diesel fuel or No. 2 Ultra Low Sulfur climatized diesel fuels. Experience has shown that it also operates on No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuels or other fuels within specification.

NOTE:



If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gaso line on your diesel vehicle, Do not start the





 vehicle. If you restart your vehicle you risk damaging the engine and fuel system. Please call an authorized dealer for service.

A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel meeting

ASTM specification D-975 may be used with your Cummins diesel engine. (Chassis Cab models not configured with B20 capability.)


ASTM specification D-7467 may be used with your Cummins diesel engine. (Pickup models and Chassis Cab models configured with

B20 Capability.)

In addition, commercially available fuel addi tives are not necessary for the proper opera tion of your Cummins diesel engine.

However, if seasonably adjusted fuel is not available and you are operating below 20°F

(-6°C), Mopar Premium Diesel Fuel Treat ment (or equivalent) may be beneficial to avoid fuel gelling.



No. 1 Ultra Low Sulfur diesel fuel should only be used where extended arctic conditions

(0°F or -18°C) exist.

B

IODIESEL

F

UEL

R

EQUIREMENTS

Chassis Cab Models


ASTM specification D975 may be used with your Cummins diesel engine. If operation with biodiesel blends greater than 5% but not greater than 20% (B6-B20) is desired, the truck must first be reconfigured by an authorized

Ram dealer and the provisions in the following section must be adhered to.

Pickup Models And Chassis Cab Models

Ordered With B20 Option

Your vehicle has been validated and approved for the use of biodiesel in blends up to 20%

(B20) provided that you comply with the requirements outlined below. It is important that you understand and comply with these requirements. Failure to comply with Oil Change requirements for vehicles operating on biodiesel blends up to B20 will result in premature engine wear. Such wear is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable resources typically derived from animal fat, rapeseed oil (Rapeseed Methyl Ester (RME) base), or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester (SME or

SOME) base). Biodiesel fuel has inherent limitations which require that you understand and adhere to the following requirements if you use blends of biodiesel greater then 5% but not greater than 20% (B6-B20). There are no

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367 unique restrictions for the use of B5. Use of blends greater than 20% is not approved. Use of blends greater than 20% can result in engine damage. Such damage is not covered by the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM

Standards

The quality of biodiesel fuel may vary widely.

Only fuel produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the following specifications may be blended to meet biodiesel blend (B6–B20) fuel meeting

ASTM specification D-7467:



Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification

D-975 and biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting

ASTM specification D-6751.

Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel

Within Six Months Of Manufacture

Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which can result in long term storage problems. Fuel produced to approved ASTM standards, if stored properly, provides for protection against fuel oxidation for up to six months.

Fuel Water Separation — Must Use Mopar/

Cummins Approved Fuel Filter Elements

You must use Mopar/Cummins approved fuel filter elements in both your engine mounted filter and frame mounted filter.

Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and water accelerates microbial growth. Your

Mopar/Cummins filtration system is designed to provide adequate fuel water separation capabilities.

Bio-Diesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient

Temperatures

Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient temperatures, which may pose problems for both storage and operation. Precautions can be necessary at low ambient temperatures, such as storing the fuel in a heated building or a heated storage tank, or using cold temperature additives.

Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To

Required Oil Change Interval

Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been observed with the use of biodiesel fuel. Fuel in oil must not exceed 5%. To ensure this limit is

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 367 met your oil change interval must be maintained to the following schedule:



Ram 3500/4500/5500 Chassis Cab —

12,500 Miles (20,000 km)*

(*unless otherwise notified with a oil service message)

CAUTION!



Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 12,500 miles (20,000 km) if operation occurs with greater than 5% biodiesel blends. Oil change intervals should not exceed 6 months in either case. Failure to comply with these Oil Change require ments for vehicles operating on biodiesel blends up to B20 may result in premature engine wear. Such wear is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.



B20 Biodiesel capable: The engine may suffer severe damage if operated with concentrations of Biodiesel higher than

20%.

8



FLUID CAPACITIES — GAS ENGINE

Fuel (Approximate)

Standard Rear Tank

Optional Midship Tank

Engine Oil With Filter

6.4L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified)

Cooling System

6.4L Engine (We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile

(240,000 km) Formula).

FLUID CAPACITIES — DIESEL ENGINE

Fuel (Approximate)

Standard Rear Tank

Optional Midship Tank

Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank (Approximate)

Engine Oil With Filter

6.7L Turbo Diesel Engine

Cooling System

6.7L Turbo Diesel Engine 3500 with AS69RC (Mopar Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 10 Year/

150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula)

US

52 Gallons

22 Gallons

7 Quarts

16.6 Quarts

US

52 Gallons

22 Gallons

8.7 Gallons

12 Quarts

22.5 Quarts

Metric

197 Liters

83 Liters

6.6 Liters

15.7 Liters

Metric

197 Liters

83 Liters

33 Liters

11.4 Liters

21.3 Liters



US Metric

6.7L Turbo Diesel Engine Chassis Cab 3500/4500 with AS69RC (Mopar Engine Coolant/

Antifreeze 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula)

6.7L Turbo Diesel Engine Chassis Cab 5500 with AS69RC (Mopar Engine Coolant/

Antifreeze 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula)

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — GAS ENGINE

E

NGINE

Component

Engine Coolant

Engine Oil – 6.4L Engine

Engine Oil Filter – 6.4L Engine

Spark Plugs – 6.4L Engine

Fuel Selection – 6.4L Engine

22.3 Quarts

22.8 Quarts

21.1 Liters

21.6 Liters

Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10–Year/150,000 Mile

(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).

For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of

SN. The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent Mopar engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material

Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.

We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.

We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.

89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method,

0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).

8



CAUTION!



Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology

(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic

Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant

(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant

(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho rized dealer as soon as possible.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

(Continued)



Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.



This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant

(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom mended.


C

HASSIS

Component

Automatic Transmission – Eight-Speed

Automatic Transmission – Six-Speed

Transfer Case

Front and Rear Axle Fluid

Brake Master Cylinder

Power Steering Reservoir

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — DIESEL ENGINE

E

NGINE

Component

Engine Coolant



Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.

Use only Mopar ASRC Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the proper fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.

We recommend you use Mopar Transfer Case Lubricant for Borg Warner

44-44 and 44-45.

We recommend you use SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle

Lubricant. Limited slip additive is required for limited slip axles

We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703.

We recommend you use Mopar Power Steering Fluid +4, Mopar ATF+4

Automatic Transmission Fluid.

8


We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile

(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).



Component

Engine Oil

Engine Oil Filter

Fuel Filters

Crankcase Ventilation Filter


In ambient temperatures above 0°F (-18°C), we recommend you use

10W-30 engine oil such as Mopar, Shell Rotella and Shell Rimula that meets FCA Material Standard MS-10902 and the API CK-4 engine oil category is required. Products meeting Cummins CES 20081 may also be used. The identification of these engine oils is typically located on the back of the oil container.

In ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), we recommend you use

5W-40 synthetic engine oil such as Mopar, Shell Rotella and Shell Rimula that meets FCA Material Standard MS-10902 and the API CK-4 engine oil category is required.

We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.

We recommend you use Mopar Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating

(engine mounted filter). Must meet 5 micron rating (chassis mounted filter). Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturers filtration and water separating requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.

We recommend you use Mopar CCV Filter.


Component

Fuel Selection

Diesel Exhaust Fluid



Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle.

Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur

Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of

Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system.

For most year-round service, No. 2 diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide good performance.

If climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel is not available, and you are operating below 20°F(-6°C), in sustained arctic conditions, Mopar

Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling.

This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-975. Pickup models, and Chassis Cab models configured with optional B20 capability, are additionally compatible with 20% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-7467.

Mopar Diesel Exhaust Fluid (API Certified) (DEF) or equivalent that has been API Certified to the ISO 22241 standard. Use of fluids not API

Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system damage. You can receive assistance in locating DEF in the United States by calling 866-RAM-INFO

(866-726-4636). In Canada call 1–800–465–2001 (English) or

1–800–387–9983 (French).

8



C

HASSIS

Component


Transfer Case

Front and Rear Axle Fluid

Brake Master Cylinder

MOPAR ACCESSORIES

A

UTHENTIC

A

CCESSORIES

B

Y

M

OPAR



In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain far more than expressive style, premium protection, or extreme entertainment, you also benefit from enhancing your vehicle with

EXTERIOR:

• Tubular Side Steps

INTERIOR:

• Door Sill Guards

• DOT Certified Emergency Kit

ELECTRONICS:

• Wireless Charging Kit


Only use Mopar ASRC Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the proper fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.

We recommend you use Mopar BW44–44 Transfer Case Fluid.

We recommend you use SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle

Lubricant. Limited slip additive is required for limited slip axles.

We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 and SAE J1703.

 accessories that have been thoroughly tested and factory-approved.

The following highlights just some of the many Authentic Ram Accessories by Mopar featuring a fit, finish, and functionality specif ically for your Ram.



For the full line of Authentic Ram Accessories by Mopar, visit your local dealership or online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and mopar.ca for Canadian residents.

NOTE:

All parts are subject to availability.

• Front Air Deflectors

• Leather Seats

• All-Weather Mats

• Remote Start

• Side Window Deflectors

• Console Safe

• Electronic Vehicle Tracking


375

UCONNECT SYSTEMS

For detailed information about your Uconnect

4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch or 12-inch display, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual

Supplement.

NOTE:

Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact soft ware for your vehicle.

CYBERSECURITY

Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly.

MULTIMEDIA

Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.

The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as

Uconnect software) is installed.

WARNING!



It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.



ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or

CD) into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.



As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately.

9


376 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:



FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates.



To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should:



Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com

(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca

(Canadian Residents) to learn about available Uconnect software updates.



Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,

USBs, CDs).

Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For further information, refer to “Data

Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s

Manual Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic

System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To

Know Your Instrument Panel”.

UCONNECT SETTINGS

The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the Customer Programmable Features.

Many features can vary by vehicle.

U

CONNECT

3 S

ETTINGS

Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Buttons On The

Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen

2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate, then press the Settings button on the touchscreen (if equipped) to display the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Language,

Display, Voice, Clock, Units (if equipped),

Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,

Power Side Steps (if equipped), Auto-On

Comfort (if equipped), Engine Off Options,

Suspension, Trailer Brake (if equipped), Audio,

Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM® Setup (if equipped), Restore Settings, and Clear

Personal Data.

NOTE:

Only one category may be selected at a time.

When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode.

Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting until the button is highlighted. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow or the Done button on the touchscreen or push the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu.

Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the list of available settings.

NOTE:

All settings should be changed with the ignition in the ON/RUN position.


MULTIMEDIA 377

Language

After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:

Setting Name Selectable Options

Language English Español Français

NOTE:

When the “Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English /Español /Français) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.

Display

After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available.

Setting Name

Display Mode

Display Brightness With Headlights On

Auto

-

Selectable Options

Manual

+

NOTE:

To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights On" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the

"party" or "parade" position.

Display Brightness With Headlights Off +

NOTE:

To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights Off" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position.

Touchscreen Beep On Off

Phone Pop-Ups On Off

9


378 MULTIMEDIA


Fuel Saver Display — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

The “Fuel Saver Display” feature will allow you to enable fuel saver mode and will be displayed in the instrument cluster display.

Voice

After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Voice Response Length

Show Command List

Brief

Never

Selectable Options w/Help

Long

Always

Clock

After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Set Time & Format 12 hour 24 hour

NOTE:

Within the “Set Time & Format” feature, press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select “AM” or “PM.”

Sync Time On Off


MULTIMEDIA 379

Units — If Equipped

After pressing “Units” on the touchscreen, the following will be available:

Setting Name

Units

Speed

Distance

Consumption

Pressure

Power — If Equipped

Temperature

Torque — If Equipped

US

MPG (UG) psi

HP (US)

MPH mi

°C lb-ft

Selectable Options

Metric

MPG (UK) kPa

HP (UK)

Safety/Assistance

After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped

Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If

Equipped

Lane Sense Warning — If Equipped

Lane Sense Strength — If Equipped

Front ParkSense Chime Volume — If Equipped

Rear ParkSense Chime Volume — If Equipped

Off

Near

Early

Low

Low

Low

Selectable Options

Warning Only

Mid

Med

Med

Med

Med

L/100 km

Custom km/h km bar

Kw

°F

Nm km/L

Warning Active Braking

Far

Late

High

High

High

9


380 MULTIMEDIA


Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior side-view mirrors tilt downward when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.

Surround View Camera — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

The “Surround View Camera” feature displays a complete 360 degree view of the vehicle's exterior environment while backing up.

Surround View Camera Delay — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

The “Surround View Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the 360 degree view image with guidelines for up to 10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.

Surround View Camera Guidelines — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

The “Surround View Camera Guidelines” feature allows you to see active guidelines over the Surround View camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or the Surround View button on the touchscreen is pressed. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display.

ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines — If

Equipped

On Off

NOTE:

Your vehicle may be equipped with ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines that allow you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Backup

Camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note disappears.


MULTIMEDIA 381


ParkView Backup Camera Delay — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned Off), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned On), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the Off position.

Forward Facing Camera Guidelines — If

Equipped

On Off

NOTE:

The “Forward Facing Camera Guidelines” feature is an off-road type of feature that shows the path of the tires based on the steering wheel input.

CHMSL (Center High Mounted Stop Lamp)

Camera Dynamic Centerline — If Equipped

On Off

NOTE:

When the “CHMSL Camera Dynamic Centerline” feature is selected, it will assist in backing up for trailer alignment and hook up. This feature is only available if your vehicle is equipped with Surround View Camera.

Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system automatically activates the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the wind shield.

Off Hill Start Assist — If Equipped On

NOTE:

When the “Hill Start Assist” feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system becomes active.

Tire Fill Assist — If Equipped On Off

9


382 MULTIMEDIA

Lights

After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Headlight Off Delay

Headlight Illumination On Approach — If

Equipped

0 sec

60 sec

0 sec

60 sec

30 sec

90 sec

30 sec

90 sec

NOTE:

When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on when the doors are unlocked with the key fob.

Lights w/Wipers — If Equipped On Off

Auto High Beams — If Equipped


On

On

Off

Off

NOTE:

When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.

Flash Lights w/Lock — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.

Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped On

NOTE:

When the “Steering Directed Lights” feature is selected, the headlights turn with the direction of the steering wheel.

Off


MULTIMEDIA 383


Rear Cargo Guidance Lights — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

When the “Rear Cargo Guidance Lights” feature is selected, the lights in the cargo and bed of the truck will come on either when the headlight switch is pressed, or the button on the back bed of the truck is pressed.

Doors & Locks

After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On

Selectable Options

Off

NOTE:

When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).

Auto Unlock On Exit On Off

NOTE:

When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened.

Sound Horn w/Lock — If Equipped

Remote Door Unlock — If Equipped

Off

Driver

1st Press

All

2nd Press

NOTE:

The “Remote Door Unlock” feature allows you to program your remote door locks to open “All doors” or only the “Driver door” with the first push of the key fob or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle.

9


384 MULTIMEDIA


Sound Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

When the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” feature is selected, the horn sounds when the remote start is activated.

Memory Linked To Fob — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:





The “Memory Linked To Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.

The seat returns to the memorized seat location if “Memory Linked To Fob” is set to “On” when the key fob is used to unlock the door.

Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. It automat ically unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.

Flash Lights w/Lock — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.


After pressing the Power Side Steps button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:

Setting Name

Power Side Steps Automatic

Selectable Options

Stow


MULTIMEDIA 385

Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped

After pressing the Auto-On Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:


Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &

Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped

Off Remote Start Only All Starts

NOTE:

When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C), the driver vented seat will turn on.

Engine Off Options

After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped

Selectable Options

Headlight Off Delay

Engine Off Power Delay

Auto Entry/Exit — If Equipped

On

0 sec

60 sec

0 sec

5 min

On

Off

30 sec

90 sec

45 sec

10 min

Off

9


386 MULTIMEDIA

Suspension — If Equipped

After pressing the Suspension button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Display Suspension Messages

Tire Jack Mode

All

On

Warning Only

Off

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension, while the vehicle is on a jack changing a tire.

Off Transport Mode On

NOTE:

When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing.

Wheel Alignment Mode On Off

NOTE:

The “Wheel Alignment Mode” feature prevents auto leveling of the air suspension while performing a wheel alignment service. Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be enabled. Refer to an authorized dealer for further information.


After pressing the Trailer Brake button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Trailer Select

Trailer Brake Type

Trailer 1

Light Electric

Selectable Options

Trailer 2

Heavy Electric

Trailer 3

Light Electric Over

Hydraulic (EOH)

Trailer 4

Heavy Electric Over

Hydraulic (EOH)


MULTIMEDIA 387


Trailer Name List of Trailer Names Available

NOTE:

You can select and personalize your trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are hauling. Select the trailer name from the following list: trailer, boat, car, cargo, dump, equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse, livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility, and 5th wheel.

Audio

After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Equalizer +

NOTE:

When in the “Equalizer” display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.

Selectable Options

–

Balance/Fade Front Back Left Right

NOTE:

The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the Speaker icon or use the arrows to adjust, tap the

C icon to readjust to the center.

2 3 Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1

NOTE:

The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.

Loudness — If Equipped On

NOTE:

The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.

Off

9


388 MULTIMEDIA


Surround Sound — If Equipped

NOTE:

The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode.

AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped

On

On

Off

Off

NOTE:

The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.

Auto Play On Off

Phone/Bluetooth®

After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:


Paired Phones List of Paired Phones

NOTE:

The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to “Phone Operation” in

“Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display” section for further details.


MULTIMEDIA 389

SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped

After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Tune Start

Channel Skip

On

List of Channels

Off

NOTE:

SiriusXM® can be programmed to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the Channel Skip button on the touch screen, select the channels you would like to skip.

Subscription Info Sirius ID

NOTE:

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.

2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.

Restore Settings

After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Restore Settings Yes

Selectable Options

No

NOTE:

When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit.

9


390 MULTIMEDIA

Clear Personal Data

After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:


Clear Personal Data Yes No

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or “No” to exit.

U

CONNECT

4/4C/4C NAV S

ETTINGS

Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons

On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate



Press the Apps button on the touchscreen then press the Settings button on the touchscreen to display the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Language, Display, Units, Voice, Clock,

Camera, Safety & Driving Assistance, Mirrors &

Wipers, Lights, Doors & Locks, Power Side

Steps (if equipped), Seats & Comfort (if equipped), Key Off Options, Air Suspension (if equipped), Trailer, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®

Settings, SiriusXM® Setup (if equipped), Reset,

Clear Personal Data, and System Information (if equipped).

NOTE:

Only one category may be selected at a time.

When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode.

Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or

Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the list of available settings.

NOTE:



MULTIMEDIA 391

Language




NOTE:

When the “Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English /Español /Français) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.

Display

After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Display Mode Auto Manual

NOTE:

When” Auto” or “Manual” is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Bright ness Day control even though the headlights are on.

Display Brightness With Headlights On – +

NOTE:

To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights On" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the


Display Brightness With Headlights Off – +

NOTE:

To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights Off" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position.

9


392 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name

Set Theme

Touchscreen Beep

Controls Screen Timeout — If Equipped

Fuel Saver Display in Cluster — If Equipped

On

On

On

NOTE:

When selected, the system displays fuel saver mode in the instrument cluster.

Navigation Next Turn-by-Turn Displayed — If

Equipped

On

Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster — If

Equipped

On

Selectable Options

Selectable Options

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Units

After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, you may select each unit of measurement independently displayed in the instrument cluster display, and navigation system (if equipped). The following selectable units of measurement are listed below:


Units US Metric Custom

NOTE:

When the “Custom” setting is selected, units will appear according to your personally configured settings. To configure these settings, press the

Custom bar. The following settings will appear:

Speed

Distance

MPH mi km/h km

Fuel Consumption MPG (US) MPG (UK) L/100 km km/L


MULTIMEDIA 393

Setting Name

Pressure


Temperature

Torque — If Equipped psi

HP (US)

°F lb-ft

Selectable Options kPa

HP (UK) bar

Kw

°C

Nm

Voice


Setting Name


Show Command List

Brief

Never


Detailed

Clock


Selectable Options Setting Name

Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped

Set Time Hours

Set Time Minutes

Time Format

On

–

–

12 hrs

AM

Off

+

+

24 hrs

PM

Always

9


394 MULTIMEDIA


Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped On

NOTE:

The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature allows you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar.

Off

Camera

After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:



NOTE:



NOTE:



NOTE:



MULTIMEDIA 395



NOTE:

The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to

10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.

Active Backup Camera Guidelines — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

The “Active Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.

Fixed Backup Camera Guidelines — If Equipped


Equipped

On

On

Off

Off

NOTE:




On Off

NOTE:


Cargo Camera Dynamic Centerline — If

Equipped

On Off

9


396 MULTIMEDIA

Safety & Driving Assistance

After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped Off Warning Only Warning & Braking

NOTE:

Sounds an audible warning for the driver to slow the vehicle in case of collision or sounds an audible warning and applies brakes.


Equipped

NOTE:

Sets the distance in which a Forward Collision Warning occurs.

Near Med Far

Front ParkSense Volume

Rear ParkSense Volume


Low

Low

Auto

Med

Med

Store

High

High

Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped

Hill Start Assist — If Equipped

Tire Fill Assist — If Equipped

Off

On

On

Lights

Off

Off

Lights & Chime


MULTIMEDIA 397

Mirrors & Wipers

After pressing the Mirrors & Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:



NOTE:

When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the outside side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.

Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

Automatically adjusts the wiper speed based on the amount of precipitation.

Headlights with Wipers On Off

Lights



Headlight Off Delay – +

NOTE:

When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.

Headlight Illumination On Approach – +

NOTE:

When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the key fob.

9


398 MULTIMEDIA


Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

When the “Headlights With Wipers” feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.

Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights deactivate automatically under certain conditions.

Daytime Running Lights On Off

NOTE:

When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only available if allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.

Flash Lights With Lock On Off

NOTE:

When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lamps flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.

Rear Guidance Lights w/ Cargo Lights — If

Equipped

On Off

NOTE:

When the “Rear Guidance Lights w/ Cargo Lights” feature is selected, the lights in the cargo and bed of the truck will come on either when the head light switch is pressed, or the button on the back bed of the truck is pressed.


MULTIMEDIA 399

Doors & Locks



Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).

Auto Unlock On Exit On Off

NOTE:

When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened.


NOTE:

When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob.

This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.

Sound Horn With Lock

Sound Horn With Remote Start

Off

On

1st Press

Off

2nd Press

9


400 MULTIMEDIA


1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors

NOTE:





When “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver's door unlocks on the first press of the key fob unlock button.

You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors.

When “All Doors” is programmed, all of the doors unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.





If the vehicle is programmed “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: All Doors”, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped.

With Passive Entry, if “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed pushing the handle more than once only results in the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is programmed, once the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors

(or use key fob).


NOTE:

The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.

Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob — If

Equipped

On Off

NOTE:





The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.

The seats return to the memorized seat location (if “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” is set to On) when the key fob is used to unlock the door.


MULTIMEDIA 401


After pressing the Power Side Steps button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:

Setting Name

Power Side Steps Automatic

Selectable Options

Stow

Seats & Comfort — If Equipped

After pressing the Seats & Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:


Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat &

Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped

Off Remote Start All Starts

NOTE:

When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected, the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C), the driver vented seat will turn on.

Key Off Options

After pressing the Key Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Key Off Power Delay – +

NOTE:

When the “Key Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

9


402 MULTIMEDIA


Headlight Off Delay – +

NOTE:


Auto Entry/Exit — If Equipped

Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped

On

On

Off

Off

NOTE:

When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.

Air Suspension — If Equipped




Tire Jack Mode

All

On

Warnings Only

Off

NOTE:

When the “Tire Jack Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare tire.

Transport Mode On Off

NOTE:

When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system lowers and then disables to assist with flat bed towing.


NOTE:

Before performing a wheel alignment, the “Wheel Alignment Mode” must be enabled. Refer to an authorized dealer for further information.


MULTIMEDIA 403

Trailer

After pressing the Trailer button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:

Setting Name

Trailer Trailer 1

Selectable Options

Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Trailer 4

After selecting the specific trailer, the following programmable options become available:


Use This Trailer

Braking

On

Light Electric

Light Electric

Off

Over Hydraulic Heavy Electric

Are you sure you want to delete the Tire Pressure Settings for Trailer 1?

Yes No

Number Of Axles

Heavy Electric

Over Hydraulic

Tire Pressure — If Equipped

+ -

Number Of Tires

+ -

NOTE:

After pressing Next, the Tire Pressure screen appears. The default for this option is 50 PSI (344 kPa), however the range is selectable anywhere between 25–125 PSI (172–862 kPa). Once PSI (kPa) is programmed the pairing screen appears. Tire sensors must be paired in order shown. Starting with Tire 1, deflate tire by 5 PSI (34 kPa) and wait for a horn chirp. Repeat process until complete. Do not exit the pairing screen until process is complete. If pairing has been unsuccessful, a double horn chirp will sound, and a prompt on the touchscreen will allow you to retry the procedure

“Retry” will only appear when setup fails. Each tire must be successfully paired during a single pairing process to receive the success screen.

9


404 MULTIMEDIA


Trailer Name List of Trailer Names

NOTE:


NOTE:

For further information about Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring, refer to “Auxiliary Driving Systems” in “Safety.”

Audio



Balance/Fade Front Rear Left Right

NOTE:



– Equalizer +

NOTE:

When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.

Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3

NOTE:



MULTIMEDIA 405


Surround Sound — If Equipped

NOTE:


AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped

On

On

Off

Off

NOTE:


Auto Play On Off

Phone/Bluetooth® Settings

After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster — If

Equipped

Do Not Disturb

On

List of Settings

Off

NOTE:

Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: “Auto Reply” (Both, Text, Call), “Auto Reply Message” (Custom,

Default) and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (Create Message).

Paired Phones and Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources

NOTE:

The “Paired Phones and Audio Devices” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and Audio Sources Settings system.

For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.

Smartphone Projection Manager On Off

9


406 MULTIMEDIA




Tune Start On Off

NOTE:

The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.

Channel Skip List of Channels

NOTE:

SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.

Subscription Information Sirius ID

NOTE:


1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.

2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.

SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.


MULTIMEDIA 407

Reset

After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Restore Settings to Default OK Cancel

NOTE:

When the “Restore Settings to Default” feature is selected, it resets clock, audio and other features to their default settings.

Reset App Drawer

Clear Personal Data

OK

Yes

Cancel

Cancel

Clear Personal Data

After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:


Clear Personal Data Yes No

NOTE:

When this feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets. If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or “No” to exit.

System Information — If Equipped

After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:


Software License System Software Information Screen

NOTE:

When the “Software License” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying the system software version.

9


408 MULTIMEDIA

U

CONNECT

4C NAV W

ITH

12-

INCH

D

ISPLAY

S

ETTINGS

Press the Settings button on the touchscreen to display the settings menu screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Language, Display, Units, Voice, Clock,

Camera, Safety & Driving Assistance, Mirrors &

Wipers, Lights, Doors & Locks, Seats & Comfort

(if equipped), Key Off Options, Suspension (if equipped), Trailer, Audio, Bluetooth®,

SiriusXM® Setup (if equipped), and Reset.

When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired menu.

Once in the desired menu, press and release the preferred setting until a check mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or

Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the list of available settings.

NOTE:


Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display Buttons On The

Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate




MULTIMEDIA 409

Language




NOTE:

When the “Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system. Press the Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.

Display

After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Display Brightness Mode Auto

NOTE:

Select Auto or Manual display mode and this allows adjustment of overall screen brightness.

Display Brightness Headlight ON -

Manual

+

NOTE:

To make changes to the "Display Brightness Headlight ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position.

Display Brightness Headlight OFF +

NOTE:

To make changes to the "Display Brightness Headlight OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the


Set Theme Pre-configured Themes

9


410 MULTIMEDIA

Setting Name

Touchscreen Beep

Controls Screen Time-Out — If Equipped

On

On

Fuel Saver Display — If Equipped On

NOTE:

When selected, the system displays fuel saver mode in the instrument cluster.

Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed in Cluster — If

Equipped

Phone Pop-Ups Displays In Cluster

On

On

Ready To Drive Pop-Ups — If Equipped On

Selectable Options

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Off

Units

After pressing Units on the touchscreen, the following will be available:


Units US Metric Custom

NOTE:

When the “Custom” setting is selected, units will appear according to your personally configured settings. To configure these settings, press the

Custom bar. The following settings will appear:

Speed

Distance

Fuel Consumption

Pressure


MPG (US) psi

HP (US)

MPH mi

MPG (UK) kPa

HP (UK)

L/100 km km/h km bar

Kw km/L


MULTIMEDIA 411

Setting Name

Temperature

Torque — If Equipped

°F lb-ft

Selectable Options

Voice


Setting Name


Show Command List

Brief

Always


Detailed

Clock


Selectable Options Setting Name

Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped

Set Time Hours

Set Time Minutes

Time Format

Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped

On

+

+

AM

12 hrs

On

°C

Nm

Off

–

–

PM

24 hrs

Off

Never

9


412 MULTIMEDIA

Camera

After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:



NOTE:



NOTE:



NOTE:



NOTE:

The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to

10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.


MULTIMEDIA 413


Active Backup Camera Guidelines — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

The “Active Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.

Fixed Backup Camera Guidelines — If Equipped On Off


Equipped

On Off

NOTE:




On Off

NOTE:


Cargo Camera Dynamic Centerline — If

Equipped

On Off

9


414 MULTIMEDIA

Safety & Driving Assistance

After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped Off Warning Only Warning & Active Braking

NOTE:

Sounds an audible warning for the driver to slow the vehicle in case of collision or sounds an audible warning and applies brakes.


Equipped

NOTE:

Sets the distance in which a Forward Collision Warning occurs.

Near Med Far

Front ParkSense Volume

Rear ParkSense Volume

Blind Spot Alert

Low

Low

Off

Med

Med

Lights

High

High

Lights & Chime

Power Side Step — If Equipped

Hill Start Assist — If Equipped

Tire Fill Assist — If Equipped

Auto

On

On

Store

Off

Off


MULTIMEDIA 415

Mirrors & Wipers

After pressing the Mirror & Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:



NOTE:

When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the outside side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.

Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off

NOTE:

Automatically adjusts the wiper speed based on the amount of precipitation.

Headlights with Wipers On Off

Lights



Headlight Illumination On Approach – +

NOTE:

When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the key fob.

Headlight Off Delay +

NOTE:


9


416 MULTIMEDIA


Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

When the “Headlights With Wipers” feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature.

Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights deactivate automatically under certain conditions.

Daytime Running Lights On Off

NOTE:

When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only available if allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.

Flash Lights with Lock On Off

NOTE:

When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lamps flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.

Steering Directed Lights On

NOTE:

When the “Steering Directed Lights” feature is selected, the headlights turn with the direction of the steering wheel.

Off

Rear Guidance Lights w/ Cargo Lights — If

Equipped

On Off

NOTE:

When the “Rear Guidance Lights w/ Cargo Lights” feature is selected, the lights in the cargo and bed of the truck will come on either when the head light switch is pressed, or when the button on the back bed of the truck is pressed.


MULTIMEDIA 417

Doors & Locks



Auto Door Locks

Auto Unlock On Exit

On

On

Off

Off

NOTE:

When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver's door is opened.


NOTE:

When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob.

This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.

Sound Horn With Remote Start

1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks

On

Driver Door

Off

All Doors

NOTE:



When “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver's door unlocks on the first press of the key fob unlock button.

You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors.







When “All Doors” is programmed, all of the doors unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.

If the vehicle is programmed “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: All Doors”, all doors unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door unlocks when the driver’s door is grasped.

With Passive Entry, if “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed pushing the handle more than once only results in the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is programmed, once the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors

(or use key fob).

9


418 MULTIMEDIA



NOTE:

The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.

Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob — If

Equipped

On Off

NOTE:





The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.

The seats return to the memorized seat location (if “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” is set to “On”) when the key fob is used to unlock the door.

Seats & Comfort — If Equipped

After pressing the Seats & Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:


Auto-On Driver Heated/Vented Seat & Steering

Wheel — If Equipped

Off Remote Start All Starts

NOTE:

When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Vented Seat & Steering Wheel” feature is selected, the driver's heated seat and heated steering wheel will auto matically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C), the driver vented seat will turn on.


MULTIMEDIA 419

Key Off Options

After pressing the Key Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Key Off Power Delay + –

NOTE:

When the “Key Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

Headlight Off Delay + –

NOTE:


Auto Entry/Exit — If Equipped On Off

Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off

NOTE:

When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.

Suspension — If Equipped


Setting Name


Tire Jack Mode

All

On

Selectable Options

Warning Only

Off

9


420 MULTIMEDIA


NOTE:

When the “Tire Jack Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system is disabled to assist with changing a spare tire.

Transport Mode On Off

NOTE:

When the “Transport Mode” feature is selected, the air suspension system lowers and then disables to assist with flat bed towing.


NOTE:

Before performing a wheel alignment, the “Wheel Alignment Mode” must be enabled. Refer to an authorized dealer for further information.

Trailer

After pressing the Trailer button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:

Setting Name

Trailer Trailer 1

Selectable Options

Trailer 2 Trailer 3

After selecting the specific trailer, the following programmable options become available:

Setting Name

Use This Trailer

Braking

On

Light Electric

Selectable Options

Off

Light Electric

Over Hydraulic Heavy Electric

Trailer 4

Heavy Electric

Over Hydraulic


MULTIMEDIA 421


Tire Pressure

Are you sure you want to delete the Tire Pressure Settings for Trailer 1?

Yes No

Number Of Axles

+ -

Number Of Tires

+ -

NOTE:

After pressing Next, the Tire Pressure screen appears. The default for this option is 50 PSI (344 kPa), however the range is selectable anywhere between 25–125 PSI (172–862 kPa). Once PSI (kPa) is programmed the pairing screen appears. Tire sensors must be paired in order shown. Starting with Tire 1, deflate tire by 5 PSI (34 kPa) and wait for a horn chirp. Repeat process until complete. Do not exit the pairing screen until process is complete. If pairing has been unsuccessful, a double horn chirp will sound, and a prompt on the touchscreen will allow you to retry the procedure

“Retry” will only appear when setup fails. Each tire must be successfully paired during a single pairing process to receive the success screen.

Trailer Name List of Trailer Names

NOTE:


NOTE:

For further information about Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring, refer to “Auxiliary Driving Systems” in “Safety.”

9


422 MULTIMEDIA

Audio



Balance/Fade Front Right Back Left

NOTE:



Equalizer +

NOTE:

When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings.

Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1

NOTE:


Surround Sound — If Equipped On

NOTE:


AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped On

2

–

Off

Off

NOTE:


Auto Play On Off

3


MULTIMEDIA 423

Bluetooth®

After pressing the Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:


Phone Pop-Ups Displayed in Cluster

Do Not Disturb

On

List of Settings

Off

NOTE:

Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (Both, Text, Call), Auto Reply Message (Custom, Default) and Custom Auto Reply Message (Create Message).

Paired Phones and Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources

NOTE:

The “Paired Phones and Audio Devices” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and Audio Sources Settings system.

For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.

Smartphone Device Mirroring

Enable CarPlay Projections

Automatically Display Pop-Ups in Cluster

On

On

On

Off

Off

Off

Set as Default Device

Projection Manager

On

Smartphone Device Mirroring On

Off

Smartphone Device Mirroring Off

9


424 MULTIMEDIA




Sirius All Access

Add Listener

Choose a Subscription Package

Add up to five profiles

NOTE:

The “Add Listener” feature allows you to add up to five different profiles for customizing personal music or satellite radio choices.

Listener Items

Tune Start

Listening History

On

List Of Options

Off

NOTE:

The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.

Channel Skip List of Channels

NOTE:

SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.


MULTIMEDIA 425


Subscription Information Sirius ID

NOTE:


1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.

2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online.

SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.

Reset

After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Setting Name

Reset App Drawer Yes

Selectable Options

Cancel

Restore Settings

NOTE:

When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it resets all settings to their default settings.

Clear Personal Data

Yes

Yes

Cancel

Cancel

NOTE:

When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it removes all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.

9


426 MULTIMEDIA

SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION

S

AFETY

G

UIDELINES

WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the

Uconnect features and applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an accident involving serious injury or death.

Ensure that all persons read this manual carefully before using the system. It contains instructions on how to use the system in a safe and effective manner.

Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.

Doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.

Please read and follow these safety precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury or property damage.



Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.

If prolonged viewing of the screen is required, park in a safe location and set the parking brake.





Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.

Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to the product. Return it to an authorized dealer for repair.

Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a level that still allows you to hear outside traffic and emergency vehicles.

Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System









Read all instructions in this manual carefully before using your system to ensure proper usage.

The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec tronic device. Do not let young children use the system.

Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your music or the system at loud volumes.

Exercise caution when setting the volume on the system.

Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois ture away from the system. Besides damage to the system, moisture can cause electric shocks as with any electronic device.

NOTE:

Many features of this system are speed depen dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the touchscreen features while the vehicle is in motion.

Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation

The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community. The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.


Care And Maintenance

Touchscreen



Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could scratch the touchscreen surface!





Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.

If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's precautions and directions.

UCONNECT 3.0

I

NTRODUCTION

WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the


Uconnect 3.0

MULTIMEDIA 427

1 — RADIO

Push the RADIO button on the faceplate to enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes; AM,

FM, and SXM (if equipped) can be selected by pushing the RADIO button on the faceplate until the desired tuner mode is displayed.

2 — PHONE PICK UP

Push the PHONE PICK UP button to initiate or answer a phone call, send or receive a text.

3 — PHONE HANG UP

Push the PHONE HANG UP button to end a call.

4 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL

Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to accept a highlighted selection on the screen. Rotate the

TUNE/SCROLL knob to scroll through a list or tune a radio station.

5 — SEEK UP

Push the SEEK UP button on the faceplate to tune the radio to the next listenable station or channel.

6 — PLAY/PAUSE/MUTE

Push to Play, Pause or Mute music or Mute an active phone call.

9


428 MULTIMEDIA

7 — BACK

Push the BACK button on the faceplate to return to a previous menu or screen.

8 — MENU

Push the MENU button on the faceplate to scroll between the setting submenus.

9 — AUDIO

Push the AUDIO button on the faceplate to adjust the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or

Fade.

10 — SEEK DOWN

Push the SEEK DOWN button on the faceplate to tune the radio to the previous listenable station or channel.

11 — ON/VOLUME

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.

The volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping.

Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.

12 — PRESETS 1–6

These buttons on the faceplate tune the radio to the stations that you commit to memory AM

(A, B, C), FM (A, B, C) and Satellite (A, B, C) — 15

AM, 15 FM and 15 SAT stations.

13 — MEDIA

Pushing the MEDIA button on the faceplate will allow you to switch from AM/FM/SXM modes to

Media mode (CD – if equipped, USB/iPod®/

AUX).

R

ADIO

M

ODE

Operating Radio Mode

The radio is equipped with the following modes:







FM

AM

SXM SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)

Push the RADIO button on the faceplate to enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes; AM,

FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pushing the RADIO button until the desired tuner mode is displayed.

Switching The System ON/OFF

Push the ON/OFF Volume Control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/OFF Volume Control knob a second time to turn off the radio.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

Volume Control

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.

Enter/Browse And Tune/Scroll Control

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station frequency.

When scrolling through a list, push the ENTER/

BROWSE button on the faceplate to choose a selection.

Seek Functions

SEEK UP

Push and release the SEEK UP button on the faceplate to tune the radio to the next listenable station or channel.

During a SEEK UP function, if the radio reaches the starting station after passing through the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station where it began.


SEEK DOWN

Push and release the SEEK DOWN button on the faceplate to tune the radio to the next listenable station or channel.

During a SEEK DOWN function, if the radio reaches the starting station after passing through the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station where it began.

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If

Equipped

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is SiriusXM®

Satellite Radio. This service offers over

130 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. A one-year SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription is included.

SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. SiriusXM® Satellite Radio requires a subscription, sold separately after the trial subscription included with vehicle purchase. Prices and programming are provided by SiriusXM® and are subject to change. Subscriptions governed by Terms &

Conditions available at www.siriusxm.com/ customeragreement. SiriusXM® Radio US service is only available to those at least

18 years of age in the 48 contiguous United

States, D.C., and PR. Service is available in

Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca.

Setting Presets

The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are activated by pushing any of the six

PRESET buttons on the faceplate

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit into memory, push and hold the desired numbered button on the faceplate for more than two seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep.

The Radio stores up to 18 presets in each of the

Radio modes. Push the A-B-C button on the faceplate to select the A, B or C preset list.

Audio

Push the MENU button on the Uconnect 3.0 and find the AUDIO menu within it, to enter the Audio

Menu. Turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob highlights the desired selection.

MULTIMEDIA 429

The Audio Menu shows the following options for you to customize the audio settings:









Treble, Mid, Bass, Fade And Balance — Select the desired setting to adjust, then push the

ENTER/BROWSE button. Turn the TUNE/

SCROLL knob to adjust the setting + or – 9.

Push the BACK button on the faceplate when done.

Speed Adjusted Volume (if equipped) —

Select Speed Adjusted Volume and push the

ENTER/BROWSE button. Turn the TUNE/

SCROLL knob to adjust the setting to Off, 1,

2, or 3. Push the BACK button on the face plate when done.

Loudness (if equipped) — Select Loudness and push the ENTER/BROWSE button to mark the check box on or off. Push the BACK button on the faceplate when done.

AUX Volume Offset (if equipped) — Select AUX

Volume Offset and push the ENTER/BROWSE button. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust the setting + or – 3. Push the BACK button on the faceplate when done.

Clock Setting

1. Push the MENU button at the bottom of the radio, and push the ENTER/BROWSE button for System Settings. Next, select the

9


430 MULTIMEDIA

Time and Format setting and then select

Set Time by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button.

2. Adjust the hours or minutes by turning the

TUNE/SCROLL knob, then pushing the

ENTER/BROWSE button to move to the next entry. You can also select 12 hr or 24 hr format by turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob, then pushing the ENTER/BROWSE button on the desired selection.

3. Once the time is set, press the BACK button to exit the time screen.

M

EDIA

M

ODE

Operating Media Mode

Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button on the faceplate located to the left of the display. Once in Media Mode, press the MEDIA button in order to select the desired media source.

Audio Source Selection

Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate to select the desired audio source, disc (if equipped), AUX, USB or Bluetooth® audio device.

Seek Up/Seek Down

Push and release the SEEK UP button on the faceplate for the next selection.

Push and release the SEEK DOWN button on the faceplate to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the Media is within the first three seconds of the current selection.

Fast SEEK UP

Push and hold the SEEK UP button on the faceplate and the desired mode will begin to fast forward through the current track until the button on the faceplate is released.

Fast SEEK DOWN

Push and hold the SEEK DOWN button on the faceplate and the desired mode will begin to rewind through the current track until the button on the faceplate is released.

Track Info

Push the INFO button on the faceplate to display the current track information.

Audio

Refer to “Operating Radio Mode” in “Radio

Mode” for the adjustable audio settings.

USB/iPod® Mode

USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting a USB Jump Drive or iPod® cable into the USB port, or by pushing the MEDIA button on the faceplate located to the left of the display. Once in Media Mode, push the MEDIA button and select USB/iPod®.

Inserting USB/iPod® Device

Gently insert the USB/iPod® device into the

USB port. If you insert a USB/iPod® device with the ignition ON/RUN and the radio On, the unit will switch to USB/iPod® mode and begin to play when you insert the device. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

Bluetooth® Mode

Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or

Bluetooth® Mode is entered by pairing a

Bluetooth® device containing music to the

Uconnect system.

Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be paired with the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the Uconnect system.

Once the Bluetooth® device is paired to the

Uconnect system, push the MEDIA button

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 431 located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode, select Source screen and then select

Bluetooth®.

For mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions, please visit UconnectPhone.com.

AUX Mode

AUX Mode is entered by inserting an AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm stereo audio jack into the AUX port, or by pushing MEDIA button on the faceplate located to the left of the display. Once in Media Mode, push the MEDIA button and select AUX.

Inserting Auxiliary Device

Gently insert the auxiliary device cable into the

AUX port. If you insert an auxiliary device with the ignition ON/RUN and the radio On, the unit will switch to AUX mode and begin to play when you insert the device cable.

Controlling The Auxiliary Device

The control of the auxiliary device (e.g., selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be provided by the radio; use the device controls instead. Adjust the volume with the

ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob, or with the volume of the attached device.

NOTE:

The vehicle radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output from the auxiliary device.

Therefore, if the volume control on the auxiliary device is set too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music on the device.

P

HONE

M

ODE

Operating Phone Mode

Phone Mode Voice Commands

The Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communications system with Voice Command Capability. Refer to “Voice

Recognition Quick Tips” for further information.

The Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands.

MULTIMEDIA 431

NOTE:

The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Profile. To check mobile phone compatibility please visit UconnectPhone.com.

Uconnect System Support:





US residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call

1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day, 7 days a week)

Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or

1-800-387-9983 (French)

Monday–Friday: 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET

Saturday: 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET

Sunday: Closed

WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of the


9


432 MULTIMEDIA

Changing The Volume

1. Start a dialogue by pushing the PHONE button on the faceplate, then adjust the volume during a normal call.

2. Use the radio ON/VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Uconnect system is speaking.

Please note the volume setting for

Uconnect phone is different than the audio system volume setting.

Making A Phone Call

1. Push the PHONE button on the steering wheel.

2. After the BEEP, say “dial” or “call” a full name or phone number.

NOTE:

A phone call can also be made with the

Uconnect 3.0 by pushing the phone button on the radio, and selecting a particular contact in the phone book, or recent calls.

Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During Call

Push the “Play/Pause/Mute” hard button on the radio or during a call, push the Voice

Recognition button on the steering wheel. After the BEEP, say “mute” (or “mute off”).

Pairing A Phone

To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a cellular phone and the Uconnect system.

To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner's

Manual. Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone compatibility information.

NOTE:





You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to complete this procedure.

The vehicle must be in PARK.

1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.

2. Push the Phone button on the faceplate.

NOTE:

If there are no phones currently connected with the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you would like to pair a mobile phone.

3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.

4. Search for available devices on your

Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.



Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.



Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to search for Bluetooth® connections.

5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to pair a mobile phone, press the Settings button from the Uconnect Phone main screen.



Select “Paired Phones”, and then select

“Add Device”.



Search for available devices on your

Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see below). When prompted on the phone, select Uconnect and accept the connec tion request.

6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress screen while the system is connecting.

7. When your mobile phone finds the

Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.


8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the connection request from

Uconnect Phone.

NOTE:

Some mobile phones will require you to enter the PIN.

9. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range and will connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one

Bluetooth® audio device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply select Uconnect from the mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and the Uconnect system reconnects to the Bluetooth® device.

NOTE:

Software updates on your phone or the

Uconnect system may interfere with the

Bluetooth® connection. If this happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first, make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth® settings.

Phonebook Download — Phonebook

Transfer From Mobile Phone

If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone will ask you if you want to download names (text names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook.

Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook

Access Profile may support this feature. See

UconnectPhone.com for supported phones.

Receiving A Call — Accept (And End)

1. When an incoming call rings or is announced on Uconnect, push the PHONE button on the faceplate.

2. To end a call, push the PHONE button on the steering wheel or the PHONE button on the faceplate.

NOTE:

A phone call can also be accepted, and ended by pushing the steering wheel PHONE button.

Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset

And Vehicle

With a call in progress use the browse/enter scroll wheel to select transfer then press the

MULTIMEDIA 433 enter button or push the “Phone Pickup” button on the steering wheel controls during a call, push the Voice Recognition button on the steering wheel. After the BEEP, say “transfer call.”

UCONNECT 3 WITH 5-INCH DISPLAY

I

NTRODUCTION

1 — RADIO

Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display

Push the RADIO button on the faceplate to enter

Radio Mode. The different tuner modes;

FM/AM/SXM (if equipped), can be selected by pressing the corresponding buttons on the touchscreen in Radio Mode.

9


434 MULTIMEDIA

2 — COMPASS

Push the COMPASS button on the faceplate to display the current direction of the vehicle.

3 — SETTINGS

Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate to display the customer programmable features.

4 — MORE

Push the MORE button on the faceplate to access additional options.

5 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL

Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to accept a highlighted selection on the screen. Rotate the

TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune to a radio station.

6 — SCREEN OFF

Push the SCREEN OFF button to turn the touchscreen off. To turn the touchscreen back on, press the screen.

7 — MUTE

Push the MUTE button to turn off the audio of the radio system. Press it again to turn the audio back on.

8 — VOLUME/POWER

Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the Volume.

Push the VOLUME/POWER button to turn the system ON or OFF.

9 — PHONE

Push the PHONE button on the faceplate to access the Uconnect Phone feature.

10 — MEDIA

Pushing the MEDIA button on the faceplate will allow you to switch to Media mode: CD (if equipped), USB, AUX, and Bluetooth®.

R

ADIO

M

ODE

Operating Radio Mode

1 — Station Presets

Radio Mode

2 — All Presets

3 — Seek Up

4 — Audio

5 — Info

6 — Tune

7 — AM/FM/SXM

8 — Seek Down

The radio is equipped with the following modes:





FM

AM



SiriusXM® Radio – If Equipped

Push the RADIO button on the faceplate, to enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes – FM/AM/SXM (if equipped) – can then be selected by pressing the corresponding buttons on the touchscreen in the Radio mode.

VOLUME/POWER Knob

Rotate the VOLUME/POWER rotary knob to adjust the Volume. When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

Push the VOLUME/POWER button to turn the system on or off.

MUTE Button

Push the MUTE button to mute the system.

Push the MUTE button again to unmute the system.


TUNE/SCROLL Control

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station frequency. Push the

ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a selection.

Seek Functions

Seek Up

Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listenable station or channel.

During a Seek Up function, if the radio reaches the starting station after passing through the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station where it began.

Fast Seek Up

Press and hold the Seek Up button on the touchscreen to advance the radio through the available stations or channels at a faster rate.

The radio stops at the next available station or channel when the button on the touchscreen is released.

Seek Down

Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listenable station or channel.

During a Seek Down function, if the radio reaches the starting station after passing through the entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station where it began.

Fast Seek Down

Press and hold the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to advance the radio through the available stations or channels at a faster rate.

The radio stops at the next available station or channel when the button on the touchscreen is released.

Direct Tune Functions

Press the Tune button on the touchscreen to directly tune to a specific radio station. A keypad will appear. On the keypad, enter in your desired radio station, and the system will automatically tune to it.

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If

Equipped

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear, coast to coast radio content.

SiriusXM® is a subscription based service.

MULTIMEDIA 435

Get over 160 channels on your satellite radio, and enjoy all you want, all in one place. Hear commercial-free music, sports, news, talk, and entertainment. Get all the premium programming, including Howard Stern, every

NFL® game, every MLB®, every NHL® game, every NASCAR® race, Martha Stewart, Oprah

Radio, and more. Get 20+ extra channels, including SiriusXM® Latino, offering 20 channels of commercial-free music, news, talk, comedy, sports, and more dedicated to Spanish language programming.

SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold separately after the trial included with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your service at the end of your trial subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at then-current rates until you call

SiriusXM® at 1-866-635-2349 to cancel. See

SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (US Residents) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canadian Residents). All fees and programming subject to change. Our satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our Sirius satellite service is also

9


436 MULTIMEDIA available in Puerto Rico (with coverage limitations). Our Internet radio service is available throughout our satellite service area and in Alaska and Hawaii. © 2020 SiriusXM®

Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.

This functionality is only available for radios equipped with a Satellite receiver. To receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky.

If the screen displays Acquiring Signal, you may need to change the vehicle’s position to receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal in underground parking garages or tunnels.

Setting Presets

The Presets are available for all Radio Modes and are activated by pressing any of the four

Preset buttons on the touchscreen, located at the top of the screen.

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit into memory, press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep.

The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the

Radio modes. Four presets are visible at the top of the radio screen.

Audio Settings

1. Push the SETTINGS button on the right side of the radio faceplate. If the settings button is not present, push the MORE button on the faceplate, then the Settings button on the touchscreen.

2. Scroll down and press the Audio button on the touchscreen to open the Audio menu.

3. The Audio Menu shows the following options for you to customize your audio settings:



Auto Play — Press the Auto Play button on the touchscreen to select between On or

Off. This feature determines if music automatically starts playing from a device when it is first connected to the Media hub’s USB port.



Equalizer — Press the Equalizer button on the touchscreen to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble. Use the + or – buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the equalizer to your desired settings. Press the Back

Arrow button on the touchscreen when done.



Balance/Fade — Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound from the speakers. Use the arrow button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the

Center C button on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting. Press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen when done.



Speed Adjust Volume — Press the Speed

Adjusted Volume button on the touch screen to select between “OFF”, “1”, “2” or “3”. This will decrease the radio volume relative to a decrease in vehicle speed. Press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen when done.



Loudness — Press the Loudness button on the touchscreen to select the Loud ness feature. When this feature is acti vated, it improves sound quality at lower volumes.


Clock Settings

1. Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate, or push the MORE button on the faceplate, and then the SETTINGS button on the touchscreen.

2. Select the Clock and Date button on the touchscreen.

3. Next, select Set Time to change the time.

4. Select Set Date to change the date.

5. To set the time, select the Seek Up or Seek

Down arrows as appropriate. Select “12 hrs vs 24 hrs”, “AM” or “PM” or select the “Time

Zones” (if equipped).

6. Select the Done button when complete.

M

EDIA

M

ODE

Operating Media Mode

Media Mode

1 — Seek Down

2 — Seek Up

3 — Additional Functions

4 — Info

5 — Pause/Play

6 — Source

7 — Browse

Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button located on the faceplate.

MULTIMEDIA 437

Audio Source Selection

Once in Media Mode, press the Source button on the touchscreen and the desired mode button on the touchscreen. Disc (if equipped),

USB, SD Card (if equipped), AUX and

Bluetooth® (if equipped), are the Media sources available. When available, you can select the Browse button on the touchscreen to be given these options:







Now Playing

Artists

Albums







Genres

Songs

Playlists



Folders

You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the

Info button on the touchscreen for artist information on the current song playing.

9


438 MULTIMEDIA

Seek Up/Seek Down Functions

Seek Up /Seek Down

Press and release the Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next selection. Press and release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the track is within the first few seconds of the current selection.

Fast Seek Up

Press and hold the Seek Up button on the touchscreen and the desired mode will begin to fast forward through the current track until the button on the touchscreen is released.

Fast Seek Down

Press and hold the Seek Down button on the touchscreen and the desired mode will begin to rewind through the current track until the button on the touchscreen is released.

Track Selection (Browse)

Rotate the Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll through and select a desired track on the iPod®, MP3 player, phone, or USB. Press the

Exit button on the touchscreen if you wish to cancel the Browse function.

Repeat

Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to repeat the song selection. To cancel Repeat, press the Repeat button on the touchscreen a second time.

Shuffle

Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to play the selections on the USB/iPod® or

Bluetooth® device in random order to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.

Track Info

Press the Info button on the touchscreen to display the current track information. Press the

X button on the touchscreen to cancel this feature.

Audio

Refer to “Audio Settings” for the adjustable audio settings.

USB/IPOD® MODE

USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting a USB Jump Drive or iPod® cable into the USB port, or by pushing the MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press the

Source button on the touchscreen, and select the USB/iPod® button.

Inserting USB/iPod® Device

Gently insert the USB/iPod® device into the

USB Port. If you insert a USB/iPod® device with the ignition ON, the unit will switch to USB/ iPod® mode and begin to play when you insert the device. The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

Browse

Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to select Artist, Albums, Genres, Songs, Playlists or

Folders from the USB/iPod® device. Once the desired selection is made you can chose from the available media by pressing the button on the touchscreen. Press the Exit button on the touchscreen if you wish to cancel the Browse function.

BLUETOOTH® MODE

Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or

Bluetooth® Mode is entered by pairing a

Bluetooth® device containing music to the

Uconnect system.


Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be paired with the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the Uconnect system.

Refer to Phone Mode chapter in this manual for pairing procedure.

Once the Bluetooth® device is paired to the

Uconnect system, push the MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press the Source button on the touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button.

NOTE:

For mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions, please visit UconnectPhone.com.

AUX MODE

AUX Mode is entered by inserting a AUX device using a stereo cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port or by pushing the MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in Media

Mode, press the Source button on the touchscreen, and select the AUX button.

MULTIMEDIA 439

Inserting Auxiliary Device

Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the

AUX Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition on, the unit will switch to AUX mode and begin to play when you insert the device cable.

Controlling The Auxiliary Device

The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be provided by the radio; use the device controls instead. Adjust the volume with the

VOLUME rotary knob or with the volume of the attached device.

The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music on the device.

P

HONE

M

ODE

Operating Phone Mode

Phone Mode

1 — Call/Redial/Hold

2 — Phone Signal Strength

3 — Paired Phone

4 — Phone Battery Life

5 — Mute Microphone

6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System

7 — Uconnect Phone Settings

8 — Text Messaging

9 — Direct Dial Pad

10 — Recent Call Log

11 — Browse Phone Book

12 — End Call

9


440 MULTIMEDIA

The Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle communications system with voice command capability. Refer to Voice

Recognition (VR) within this publication for further information.

The Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands.

NOTE:

The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Profile. To check mobile phone compatibility, please visit UconnectPhone.com.

For Uconnect customer support:



US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or call 1-877-855-8400



Canadian residents - visit Uconnect -

Phone.com or call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French)

Phone Mode Activation

Press the PHONE button on the front panel to activate the Phone mode.

Main Functions

The buttons on the display can be used to:







Compose phone numbers using the graphic keypad on the display.

Display and call the contacts in the mobile phone phonebook.

Display and call contacts from the Recent

Calls menu.







Pair up to 10 phones/audio devices to make access and connection easier and quicker.

Transfer calls from the system to the mobile phone and vice versa.

Deactivate the microphone audio for privacy.

The mobile phone audio is transmitted through the vehicle’s audio system. The system automatically mutes the radio when the Phone function is used.

Connecting/Disconnecting A Mobile

Phone Or Bluetooth® Device

Pairing A Phone

To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must pair your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a cellular phone and the Uconnect system.

To complete the pairing process, you need to reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual.

Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone compatibility information.

NOTE:



You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to complete this procedure.



The vehicle must be in PARK.

1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.

2. Push the PHONE button on the faceplate.



If there are no phones currently connected with the system, a pop-up appears asking if you would like to pair a mobile phone.

3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.

4. Search for available devices on your

Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.



Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.



Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to search for Bluetooth® connections.


Pairing A Phone

If “No” is selected and you still would like to pair a mobile phone, press the Settings but ton from the Uconnect Phone main screen.



Select the Paired Phones button, and then press the Add Device button on the touchscreen.



Search for available devices on your

Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see below). When prompted on the phone, select “Uconnect” and accept the connection request.

5. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress screen while the system is connecting.

6. When your mobile phone finds the

Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”

7. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the connection request from

Uconnect Phone.



Some mobile phones will require you to enter the PIN.

8. When the pairing process has successfully completed, the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting the Yes button will make this phone the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range and will connect to the

Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth® audio device can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time. If the No button is selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/ audio device Bluetooth® screen, and the

Uconnect system will reconnect to the

Bluetooth® device.

NOTE:

Software updates on your phone or the

Uconnect system may interfere with the

MULTIMEDIA 441

Bluetooth® connection. If this happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first, make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth® settings.

Storing Names/Numbers in The Mobile Phone

Before pairing your mobile phone, you must make sure you have stored the names you want to contact in the phonebook on your mobile phone, so you can call them using the vehicle's hands-free system.

If your phonebook does not contain any names, enter new names for the most frequently used numbers.

For further details, consult your mobile phone owner's handbook.

NOTE:

The names in the phonebook which do not contain phone numbers or where both fields

(name and surname) are empty will not be displayed.

Connection

The system connects automatically to the paired mobile phone with the highest priority.

9


442 MULTIMEDIA

To choose a specific mobile phone or

Bluetooth® audio device, proceed as follows:

1. Access the Settings menu.

2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.

3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio list using the corresponding button on the display.

4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or

Bluetooth® device).

5. Press the Connect button.

6. During the connection stage, a screen is displayed showing the progress of the operation.

7. The device connected is highlighted in the list.

Disconnection

To disconnect a specific mobile phone or

Bluetooth® audio device, proceed as follows:






5. Press the Disconnect button.

Deletion Of A Mobile Phone Or A

Bluetooth® Audio Device

To delete a mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio device from a list, proceed as follows:




4. Select the device (mobile phone or


5. Press the Delete Device button.

6. A confirmation screen will appear on the display:



Press the Yes button to delete the device.



Press the No button to cancel the opera tion.

Setting A Mobile Phone Or A Bluetooth®

Audio Device As A Favorite

To set a mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio device as a favorite, proceed as follows:






5. Press the Make Favorite button.

6. The device selected is moved to the top of the list.

Downloading A Phonebook From Your

Mobile Phone

If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone asks you if you want to download names (text names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook.

Specific Bluetooth®-enabled phones with

Phonebook Access Profile may support this feature. See UconnectPhone.com for supported phones.


If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone asks you if you want to download names (text names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook.

Specific Bluetooth®-enabled phones with

Phonebook Access Profile may support this feature.

NOTE:



If supported, the download and update begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect

Phone. For example, after you start the vehicle. You may be asked for permission to initiate the phonebook download.







A maximum of 2,000 contact names with six numbers per contact will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone.

Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previ ously downloaded phonebook is available for use.

Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible.





Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is down loaded. SIM card phonebook is not part of the mobile phonebook.

This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.

These can only be edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection.

Deletion Of Phone Data (Phonebook And

Recent Calls)

Select "Delete Phone Data" on the display to delete the list of recent calls and the phonebook copy.

Making A Phone Call

Dialing The Phone Number Using The

"Keyboard" Icon On The Display

Enter the phone number using the graphic keypad displayed.

Proceed as follows:

1. Press the Keyboard icon on the display and use the number buttons to enter the number.

2. Press the Call button to make a call.

MULTIMEDIA 443

Call By Saying A Phonebook Name Or Phone

Number

1. Push the PHONE button on the steering wheel.

2. After the beep, say “dial” (or “call” a full name or phone number).

Recent Calls

The list of the last calls made for each of the following call types can be displayed:







Calls received

Calls made

Calls without a reply



All calls

To access these types of calls, press the Recent

Calls button on the Phone menu main screen.

Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In

Progress

When a phone conversation is active, a second phone call can be made as follows:







Select the number/contact from the list of recent calls.

Select the contact from the phonebook.

Press the Hold button and dial the number using the graphic keyboard of the display.

9


444 MULTIMEDIA

Redial

To call the number/contact of last call made, press the Redial button.

Answering An Incoming Call

Call Controls

The buttons on the display allow the following phone call functions to be managed:















Answer

End

Ignore

Put on hold/resume

Deactivate/activate the microphone

Transfer the call

Switch from one call to the other



Conference/merge two active calls

Answering Or Ignoring A Call With No Call

Currently In Progress

When an incoming call rings or is announced on the Uconnect system, push the Answer button on the touchscreen, or push the PHONE button on the steering wheel.

Answering Or Ignoring An Incoming Call With A

Call Currently In Progress

When an incoming call rings or is announced on the Uconnect system, push the Answer button on the touchscreen, or push the PHONE button on the steering wheel to answer the call and put the ongoing call on hold.

NOTE:

Not all mobile phones may support the manage ment of an incoming call when another phone conversation is active.

Managing Two Phone Calls

If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), it is possible to switch between them pressing the Call On Hold button or to merge the two calls in a conference pressing the Merge

Calls button.

NOTE:

Check whether the mobile phone in use supports the management of a second call and the "Conference" mode.

Transferring/Call Continuation

Transferring

The ongoing calls can be transferred from the mobile phone to the system and vice versa without ending the call.

To transfer the call, press the Transfer button.

Call Continuation

After the engine is switched off, it is still possible to continue a phone call.

The call continues until it is ended manually or for a maximum period of about 20 minutes.

When the system is switched off, the call is transferred to the mobile phone.

Ending A Call

Press the End button on the touchscreen or the

PHONE button on the steering wheel controls to end a call in progress.

Only the ongoing call is ended and any call on hold becomes the new active call.

Depending on the type of mobile phone, if the ongoing call is ended by the caller, the call on hold may not be activated automatically.

Uconnect Phone Features

Mute/Unmute

1. During a call, push the VOICE COMMAND button on the steering wheel.

2. After the beep, say “mute” or “mute off”.


Reading Messages

The system can read the messages received by the mobile phone.

To use this function, the mobile phone must support the SMS exchange function via

Bluetooth®.

If this function is not supported by the phone, the corresponding message button is deactivated (greyed out) or may only accept incoming messages.

When a text message is received, the display will show a screen where the options "Listen",

"Call" or "Ignore" can be selected.

Press the Message button to access the list of

SMS messages received by the mobile phone.

The list displays a maximum of 60 messages received.

Browsing SMS

Using the steering wheel commands, you can view and manage the last 10 SMS messages received on the instrument panel. To use this function, the mobile phone must support the

SMS exchange function through Bluetooth®.

Select the PHONE button on the instrument panel menu, and then select “SMS Reader” using the arrow keys on the steering wheel controls.

The “SMS Reader” submenu allows the last

10 SMS messages to be displayed.

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED

The remote sound system controls are located on the back surface of the steering wheel.

Reach behind the wheel to access the switches.

Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Rearview Of Steering

Wheel)

The right-hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume.

MULTIMEDIA 445

Pushing the center button will make the radio switch between the various modes available

(AM/FM/SXM or Media etc.).

The left-hand control is a rocker type switch with a push button in the center. The function of the left-hand control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left-hand control operation in each mode.

R

ADIO

O

PERATION

Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left-hand control will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.

M

EDIA

M

ODE

Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/

Bluetooth®/CD). Pushing the bottom of the switch once goes to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play.

9


446 MULTIMEDIA

IPOD®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

Located on the center stack, just below the instrument panel, is the main media hub. There are four total USB Ports: Two Mini-USBs (Type C) and two Standard USBs (Type A). There is also an AUX Port located in the middle of the USB

Ports.

Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB Port may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features, if equipped. For further information, refer to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the Owner’s Manual Supplement.

NOTE:

Two devices can be plugged in at the same time and both ports will provide charging capabili ties. Only one port can transfer data to the system at a time. A pop-up will appear and allow you to select the device transferring data.

For example, if a device is plugged into the Type

A USB port and another device is plugged into the Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow you to select which device to use.

Center Stack USB/AUX Media Hub

1 — Mini-USB Type C Port And Standard USB Type

A Port #1

2 — AUX Port

3 — Mini-USB Type C Port And Standard USB Type

A Port #2

A third and fourth USB Port are located behind the center console, above the power inverter.

One is a charge-only port, and can only charge

USB devices. The other USB Port allows you to play music from iPod®/MP3 players or USB devices through your vehicle’s sound system.

Rear Center Console Mini-USB (Type C) USB Ports

1 — Mini-USB Type C Port And Standard USB Port #1

2 — Mini-USB Type C Port And Standard USB Port #2

Applicable to only Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With

8.4-inch Display, and Uconnect 4C NAV With

12-inch Display radios, different scenarios are shown below when a non-phone device is plugged into the smaller and larger USB Ports, and when a phone device is plugged into the smaller and larger USB Ports:



“A new device is now connected. Previous connection was lost.”





“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection was lost.”

“Another device is in use through the same

USB port. Please disconnect the first device to use the second device.”


Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause the connection to a previous device to be lost.

If equipped, your vehicle may also contain a

USB Port located on the top tray of the vehicle’s center console.

If equipped, two Mini-USB Ports (Type C), two

Standard USB Ports (Type A), and one AUX Port may be located to the left of the center stack, just below the climate controls.

Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub

1 — Standard USB Type A Ports

2 — Mini-USB Type C Ports

3 — AUX Port

Some USB ports support media and charging.

You can use features, such as Apple CarPlay®,

Android Auto™, Pandora® and others while charging your phone.

NOTE:

Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause the connection to a previous device to be lost.

For further information, refer to the Uconnect

Owner’s Manual Supplement or visit

UconnectPhone.com.

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES

Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily

“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect (if equipped).

MULTIMEDIA 447

R

EGULATORY

A

ND

S

AFETY

I

NFORMATION

USA/CANADA

Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation

The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the human body.

The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community.

The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.

9


448 MULTIMEDIA




Rules and with Innovation, Science, and












NOTE:


NOTE:



This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reason able protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guar -

 antee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

If this equipment does cause harmful inter ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour aged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: a. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

b. Consult an authorized dealer or an expe rienced radio technician for help.

VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS

I

NTRODUCING

U

CONNECT

Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key

Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect system.

If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in the Apps menus, of your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display or the Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C With

8.4-inch Display system.


MULTIMEDIA 449

G

ET

S

TARTED

All you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.

1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.

2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition.

3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is located in the headliner and aimed at the driver.

4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command.

5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category.

Uconnect Voice Command Buttons

1 — Push To Begin Radio Or Media Functions

2 — Push To Initiate, Answer, End A Phone Call, Or

Send/Receive A Text

B

ASIC

V

OICE

C

OMMANDS

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system.

Push the VR button . After the beep, say:



“Cancel” to stop a current voice session





“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice

Commands

“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again

Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the top of the touchscreen.

Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Visual Cues

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Radio

Visual Cues

9


450 MULTIMEDIA

Uconnect 4C NAV With 12-inch Display

R

ADIO

Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, say:



“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”



“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”

TIP:

At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button on the steering wheel and say “Help.”

The system provides you with a list of commands.

M

EDIA

Uconnect offers connections via USB,

Bluetooth® and auxiliary ports (if equipped).

Voice operation is only available for connected

USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist.









“Change source to Bluetooth®”

“Change source to AUX”

“Change source to USB”

“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album

Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight

Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”

TIP:

Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device. Your

Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed.

P

HONE

Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.

Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:





“Call John Smith”

“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts”






“Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”

“Call back (call previous incoming phone number)”

TIP:

When providing a Voice Command, push the

Phone button and say “Call,” then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.”

V

OICE

T

EXT

R

EPLY

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

Uconnect announces incoming text messages.

Push the VR button or Phone button (if enabled) and say “Listen.” (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)

1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the VR button or Phone button

(if enabled). After the beep, say: “Reply.”

2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the predefined messages and follow the system prompts.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY

RESPONSES

Yes.

No.

Okay.

Stuck in traffic.

Start without me.

Where are you?

See you later.

I’ll be late.

Call me.

I’ll call you later.

I’m on my way.

Are you there yet?

I need directions.

Can’t talk right now.

I will be 5 <or

10, 15, 20,

25, 30, 45,

60> minutes late.

See you in 5

<or 10, 15,

20, 25, 30,

45, 60> minutes.

I’m lost.

Thanks.

NOTE:

Only use the numbering listed, otherwise the system does not transpose the message.

MULTIMEDIA 451

TIP:

Your mobile phone must have the full imple mentation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.

Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. For further information on how to enable this feature on your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s®

“User Manual”.

TIP:

Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with

Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.

C

LIMATE

(4C/4C NAV)

Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the following commands:





“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”

“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”

9


452 MULTIMEDIA

TIP:

Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.

N

AVIGATION

(4C NAV)

The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go.

1. To enter a destination, push the VR button

. After the beep, say: “Find address

800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”

2. Then follow the system prompts.

TIP:

To start a POI search, push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep, say: “Find nearest coffee shop.”

S

IRI

® E

YES

F

REE

— I

F

E

QUIPPED

Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and responds back to confirm your requests. The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.

To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the

Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After you hear a double beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages and many other useful requests.

U

SING

D

O

N

OT

D

ISTURB

With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb.

Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call, or both, when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail.

Automatic reply messages can be:





“I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”

Create a custom auto reply message up to

160 characters.

While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls.

NOTE:



Only the beginning of your custom message will be seen on the touchscreen.





Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones®.

Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that support Bluetooth® Message

Access Profile (MAP).

A

NDROID

A

UTO

™ — I

F

E

QUIPPED

NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android

Auto™ features may or may not be available in every region and/or language.

Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech technology through your vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your Android™-powered smartphone and a number of its apps onto your

Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™

5.0 or higher to one of the media USB ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and press the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces your

“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin

Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR button on

20_DPF_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 453 the steering wheel, or press and hold the

“Microphone” icon within Android Auto™, to activate Android’s™ VR, which recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s features:





Maps

Music





Phone

Text Messages



Additional Apps

Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual

Supplement for further information.

NOTE:

Requires compatible smartphone running

Android™ 5.0 or higher and download app on

Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™, and

Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.

A

PPLE

C

AR

P

LAY

® — I

F

E

QUIPPED

NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple

CarPlay® features may or may not be available in every region and/or language.

Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smartphone to project your iPhone® and many apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen (smartphone’s data plan will be used for certain apps). Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of the media USB ports, using the Apple® factory-provided

Lightning cable, and press the new Apple

CarPlay® icon that replaces your Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay®.

Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or press and hold the Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands to use certain iPhone® features such as:



Phone







Music

Messages

Maps



Additional Apps

Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual

Supplement for further information.

MULTIMEDIA 453

NOTE:

Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.

Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®.

Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc. iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis tered in the US and other countries. Apple® terms of use and privacy statements apply.

G

ENERAL

I

NFORMATION









9


454 MULTIMEDIA








NOTE:


A

DDITIONAL

I

NFORMATION

© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and

Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US

LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.

SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.

Uconnect System Support:





US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)

Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon

nect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or

1-800-387-9983 (French)

SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:





US residents visitwww.driveuconnect.com/ sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827

Canadian residents visitwww.siriusxm.ca/ guardian-v1/ or call: 1-877-324-9091


455

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE

FOR YOUR VEHICLE

P

REPARE

F

OR

T

HE

A

PPOINTMENT

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager.

Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.

P

REPARE

A L

IST

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

B

E

R

EASONABLE

W

ITH

R

EQUESTS

If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.

They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.



If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance.



If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufac turer's customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information:











Owner's name and address

Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office)

Authorized dealer name

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

Vehicle delivery date and mileage

10


456 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

FCA US LLC C

USTOMER

C

ENTER

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (866) 726-4636

FCA C

ANADA

I

NC

. C

USTOMER

C

ENTER

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /

(800) 387-9983 French

M

EXICO

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico City: 800-505-1300

Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568

P

UERTO

R

ICO

A

ND

US V

IRGIN

I

SLANDS

FCA Caribbean LLC

P.O. Box 191857

San Juan 00919-1857

Phone: (866) 726-4636

Fax: (787) 782-3345

C

USTOMER

A

SSISTANCE

F

OR

T

HE

H

EARING

O

R

S

PEECH

I

MPAIRED

(TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter

(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing

1-800-380-CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a

Bell Relay Service operator.

S

ERVICE

C

ONTRACT

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's

New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The

Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle

Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.

If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service

Contract National Customer Hotline at

1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call

(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983

French).

FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you require service after the

FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.


WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for further information.

MOPAR PARTS

Mopar original equipment parts & accessories and factory filled fluids are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain its original condition.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

I

N

T

HE

50 U

NITED

S

TATES

A

ND

W

ASHINGTON

, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, an authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY:

1-800-424-9153); or go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 457

Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,

D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

I

N

C

ANADA

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the

Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the

Canadian government should contact

Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect

Investigations and Recalls at

1-800-333-0510 or go to wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/

PCDB-BDPP.

10


458 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below.

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components and is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.

These manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

Owner's Manuals

These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US

LLC vehicles.

To access your Owner's Information online, visit www.mopar.com/om

To order a hard copy of your Owner’s

Information, visit:



Or www.techauthority.com (US)

Call Tech Authority toll free at:





1-800-890-4038 (US)

1-800-387-1143 (Canada)


A

Accessories

...................................................374

Mopar

........................................................374

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise

Control)

..........................................................213

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze)

...............330

Adding Fuel

....................................................247

Additives, Fuel

...............................................363

Adjust

Down

...........................................................32

Forward

.......................................................32

Rearward

.....................................................32

Up

................................................................32

Adjustable Pedals

............................................38

Air Bag

Air Bag Operation

......................................142


................................141

Enhanced Accident Response

......... 147

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

.......................298

If Deployment Occurs

................................146


................................143

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

..............147

Maintenance

.............................................147

Transporting Pets

......................................165

Air Bag Light

............................... 100

,

141

,

,

298

166

459

INDEX

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner

Filter)

................................................... 316

Air Conditioner Maintenance

........................ 318

Air Conditioner Refrigerant

........................... 318

Air Conditioner System

................................. 318

Air Conditioning

.........................................50

Air Conditioning Filter

..............................61

Air Conditioning System

...................................59

Security Alarm

....................................23

Alterations/Modifications

,

,

,

59

319

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips

.......................60

Air Filter

........................................................ 316

Air Pressure

Tires

......................................................... 347

Alarm

Panic

...........................................................14

,

337

101

Vehicle

.........................................................11

Android Auto

................................................. 452

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)

.......................... 330

Capacites

................................................. 368

Disposal

................................................... 331

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

...................... 112

Anti-Lock Warning Light

................................ 106

Apple CarPlay

................................................ 453

Assist, Hill Start

............................................. 118

Audio Systems (Radio)

.................................. 375

Auto Down Power Windows

..............................62

Automatic Door Locks

......................................28

Automatic Headlights

.......................................45

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

..............59


.......................195

Adding Fluid

.............................................. 336

Fluid And Filter Change

............................. 336

Fluid Change

............................................. 336

Fluid Level Check

...................................... 334

Fluid Type

...............................334

Axle Fluid

.....................................336

,

371

374

Shifting

..................................................... 190

Special Additives

...................................... 334

Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode

... 198

AUX Camera

.........................................240

Auxiliary Driving Systems

.............................. 120

,

371

,

,

,

,

336

245

374

Axle Lubrication

............................................ 336

B

Back-Up

......................................................... 238

Back-Up Camera

........................................... 238

Battery

.................................................102

,

313

Blanket

..................................................... 180

Charging System Light

.............................. 102

Keyless Key Fob Replacement

....................14

Battery Saver Feature

......................................47

11


460

Belts, Seat

.....................................................166

Body Builders Guide

........................................ 11

Body Mechanism Lubrication

........................326

B-Pillar Location

.............................................344

Brake Assist System

......................................113

Brake Control System

....................................113

Brake Fluid

.......................................... 333

Brake System

...................................... 333

,

,

371

361

Fluid Check

...............................................333

Master Cylinder

.........................................333

Parking

......................................................187

Warning Light

............................................100

Brake/Transmission Interlock

.......................189

Bulb Replacement

.........................................274

Bulbs, Light

.......................................... 168

,

274

C

Cab Top Clearance Lights

..............................278

Camera

..........................................................238

Camera, AUX

........................................ 240

Camera, Rear

...................................... 238

Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)

.........368

Capacities, Fluid

............................................368

Caps, Filler

Oil (Engine)

...................................... 310

Carbon Monoxide Warning

.................. 166

,

,

,

245

241

Power Steering

..........................................211

Radiator (Coolant Pressure)

......................331

Car Washes

...................................................358

,

315

365

Cargo Light

...................................................... 46

Cellular Phone

.............................................. 447

Center High Mounted Stop Light

................... 278

Center Seat Storage Compartment

..................69

Changing A Flat Tire

...................................... 285

Charge Air Cooler

.......................................... 332

Chart, Tire Sizing

........................................... 341

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator

Light)

............................................................. 110

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety

................. 165

Checks, Safety

.............................................. 165

Child Restraint

.............................................. 148

Child Restraints

Booster Seats

........................................... 151

Child Seat Installation

..................... 158

,

160

How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt

.... 157

Infant And Child Restraints

....................... 150

Locating The LATCH Anchorages

.............. 155

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children

.. 153

Older Children And Child Restraints

......... 151

Seating Positions

...................................... 152

Clean Air Gasoline

......................................... 363

Cleaning

Wheels

..................................................... 353

Climate Control

................................................50

Automatic

....................................................53

Manual

........................................................50

Cold Weather Operation

............................... 172

Compact Spare Tire

...................................... 352

Contract, Service

.......................................... 456

Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)

............ 331

Cooling System

............................................. 329

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze)

...................... 330

Coolant Level

...................................329

Cruise Control (Speed Control)

.............211

,

332

Cooling Capacity

....................................... 368

Disposal Of Used Coolant

......................... 331

Drain, Flush, And Refill

............................. 330

Inspection

................................................. 332

Points To Remember

................................ 332

Pressure Cap

............................................ 331

Radiator Cap

............................................. 331

Selection Of Coolant

(Antifreeze)

.........................330

,

369

,

Corrosion Protection

..................................... 357

,

371

213

Cruise Light

................................................... 109

Cupholders

.......................................................73

Customer Assistance

.................................... 455

Cybersecurity

................................................ 375

D


...................................44

Dealer Service

............................................... 314

Defroster, Rear Window

...................................50

Defroster, Windshield

............................ 50

,

166

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers

..............................49

Diagnostic System, Onboard

......................... 109

Diesel Exhaust Brake

.................................... 186

Diesel Fuel

.................................................... 365

Diesel Fuel Requirements

............................. 365

Bulk Storage Of

......................................... 248


Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming

.....................324

Differential, Limited Slip

................................209

Dipsticks

Power Steering

..........................................211

Disabled Vehicle Towing

................................296

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)

.......................331

Do Not Disturb

...............................................452

Door Ajar

........................................................103

Door Ajar Light

...............................................103

Door Locks

Automatic

.................................................... 28

Doors

............................................................... 24

Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter

............321

Driver’s Seat Back Tilt

..................................... 30

Driving

Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow

Standing Water

.....................................267

Dual Rear Wheels

....................... 289

,

356

,

361

E

Electric Brake Control System

.......................113

Anti-Lock Brake System

.............................112

Electronic Roll Mitigation

................. 114

Electronically Shifted Transfer Case

.... 200

120

Electrical Power Outlets

...................................74

Electronic Range Select (ERS)

............. 193

,

,

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

...................114

Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light

......102

,

199

204

Emergency Braking

........................................187

Emergency, In Case Of

Freeing Vehicle When Stuck

..................... 295

Hazard Warning Flasher

........................... 269

Jacking

..................................................... 285

Jump Starting

........................................... 290

Emission Control System Maintenance

........ 110

Engine

.................................................. 310

Oil

...........................................314

Oil Filler Cap

.................................... 310

311

Air Cleaner

................................................ 316

Block Heater

............................................. 175

Break-In Recommendations

..................... 185

Compartment

........................................... 311

Compartment Identification

...................... 310

Coolant (Antifreeze)

......................... 369

Exhaust Gas Caution

....................... 166

Fails To Start

............................................ 172

Flooded, Starting

...................................... 172

Fuel Requirements

................................... 363

Identifcation

............................................. 311

Idling

........................................................ 181

Jump Starting

........................................... 290

,

369

,

,

,

,

,

371

365

371

315

Oil Filter

.................................................... 316

Oil Reset

......................................................87

Oil Selection

............................................. 314

Oil Synthetic

............................................. 316

Overheating

.............................................. 292

Runaway

................................................... 246

Starting

..................................................... 170

Engine Oil Viscosity

....................................... 315

461

Enhanced Accident Response

Feature

................................................147

Exhaust System

..........................166

298

Entry System, Illuminated

................................48

Ethanol

.......................................................... 364

Exhaust Brake

............................................... 186

Exhaust Gas Cautions

..........................166

,

328

Exterior Lighting

...............................................43

Exterior Lights

........................................ 43

,

,

,

,

365

337

168

F

Filters

Air Cleaner

................................................ 316

Air Conditioning

................................. 61

Engine Fuel

......................................321

Engine Oil

...............................316

369

Fluids And Lubricants

...........................369

Fog Lights

.............................................. 46

,

,

371

Engine Oil Disposal

................................... 316

Flashers

Turn Signals

.............................. 46

,

,

108

,

,

Flash-To-Pass

...................................................45

Flat Tire Stowage

.......................................... 289

Fluid Capacities

............................................ 368

Fluid Leaks

.................................................... 168

Fluid Level Checks

Brake

........................................................ 333

Power Steering

......................................... 211

,

,

319

369

168

371

277

Fold Flat Load Floor

.........................................71

Fold-Flat Seats

.................................................30

11


462

Forward Collision Warning

.............................120

Four Wheel Drive

...........................................200

Four-Way Hazard Flasher

...............................269

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle

.................................295

Front Axle (Differential)

..................................336

Fuel

............................................ 247

Diesel

..................................... 247

,

,

363

Adding

.......................................................246

Additives

...................................................363

Capacity

....................................................368

Clean Air

....................................................363

365

Requirements

................................. 363

371

Ethanol

......................................................364

Filler Cap (Gas Cap)

...................................247

Filter

................................................ 321

,

,

,

Gasoline

....................................................363

Light

..........................................................104

Materials Added

........................................363

Methanol

...................................................364

Octane Rating

...........................................363

,

365

369

365

Specifications

............................................366

Tank Capacity

............................................368

Fuses

.............................................................279

G

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)

....................64

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap)

...............................247

Gasoline, Clean Air

........................................363

Gasoline, Reformulated

.................................363

Gauges

Voltage

..................................................... 178

Gear Ranges

................................................. 190

Gear Selector Override

................................. 293

General Information

............................. 122

,

131

Glass Cleaning

.............................................. 360

Gross Axle Weight Rating

.............................. 252

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

......................... 252

Guide

Body Builders

..............................................11

GVWR

............................................................ 251

H

Hazard

Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow

Standing Water

.................................... 267

Hazard Warning Flashers

.............................. 269

Head Restraints

...............................................35

Head Rests

......................................................35

Headlights

.................................................... 275

Automatic High Beam

..................................44

Cleaning

................................................... 358

High Beam

...................................................44

Lights On Reminder

.....................................46

Passing

........................................................45

Switch

..........................................................43

Heated Mirrors

.................................................42

Hill Descent Control

...................................... 117

Hill Descent Control Indicator

....................... 117

Hill Start Assist

.............................................. 118

Hitches

Trailer Towing

........................................... 255

Hoisting

......................................................... 340

HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)

.....................64

Hood Prop

........................................................63

Hood Release

...................................................63

Hub Caps

...................................................... 289

I

Idle-Up Feature

............................................. 181

Ignition

.............................................................17

Switch

..........................................................17

Illuminated Entry

..............................................48

In Vehicle Help

Vehicle User Guide

......................................12

Inside Rearview Mirror

........................... 39

,

Instrument Cluster

....................................82

269

,

84

Descriptions

.............................................. 108

Display

.........................................................85

Engine Oil Reset

..........................................87

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning

................... 360

Integrated Trailer Brake Control

.................... 258

Interior Appearance Care

.............................. 359

Interior Lights

...................................................47

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)

..................49

Intervention Regeneration Strategy

....... 95

,

325

Introduction

.....................................................10

Inverter Outlet (115V)

......................................75

iPod/USB/MP3 Control

................................. 446


J

Jack Location

.................................................285

Jack Operation

...............................................285

Jacking And Tire Changing

.............................285

Jump Starting

................................................290

K

Key Fob

Panic Alarm

................................................. 14


....... 16

Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless

Entry)

............................................................... 14

Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless

Entry)

............................................................... 16

Keyless Enter-N-Go

........................25

Lock The Vehicle’s Doors

....... 383

,

,

169

399

,

,

173

417

Passive Entry

...............................................25

Passive Entry Programming

............. 399

,

,

22

417

Keys

.................................................................13

Replacement

...............................................22

L

Lane Change And Turn Signals

........................ 46

Lane Change Assist

.........................................46

LaneSense

....................................................235

Latches

..........................................................168

Hood

...........................................................63

Lead Free Gasoline

........................................363

Leaks, Fluid

...................................................168

Life Of Tires

...................................................349

Light Bulbs

........................................... 168

Lights

............................................................ 168

Air Bag

....................................100

,

141

Headlights

............................................43

166

Automatic High Beam

..................................44

Brake Assist Warning

............................... 116

Brake Warning

.......................................... 100

Bulb Replacement

.................................... 274

Cab Top Clearance

................................... 278

Cargo

...........................................................46

Center Mounted Stop

............................... 278

Courtesy/Reading

.......................................47

Cruise

....................................................... 109

Daytime Running

.........................................44

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

Indicator

............................................... 102

Exterior

...............................................43

,

,

,

274

168

Fog

........................................................... 277

Four Wheel Drive Indicator

....................... 209

Hazard Warning Flasher

........................... 269

,

45

High Beam

...................................................44

Hill Descent Control Indicator

................... 117

Illuminated Entry

.........................................48

Interior

.........................................................47

Lights On Reminder

.....................................46

Low Fuel

................................................... 104

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)

....... 103

Park

.......................................................... 108

Passing

........................................................45

Seat Belt Reminder

.................................. 100

463

Security Alarm

.......................................... 101

Service

...................................................... 274

Traction Control

........................................ 116

Transfer Case

........................................... 209

Turn Signals

.....................46

Warning Instrument Cluster

,

108

,

168

Descriptions

................................102

Limited-Slip Differential

.......................209

Lug Nuts/Bolts

.....................................289

,

,

,

108

336

Load Shed Battery Saver Mode

........................99

Load Shed Battery Saver On

............................99

Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction

..............99

Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor

...............99

Loading Vehicle

............................................. 251

Tires

.......................................................... 344

Locks

Automatic Door

............................................28

Child Protection

...........................................28

Power Door

..................................................25

Low Tire Pressure System

............................. 123

Lubrication, Body

.......................................... 326

,

275

361

M

Maintenance Free Battery

............................ 313

Maintenance Plan

......................................... 305

Maintenance Schedule

...............299

,

303

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check

Engine)

.................................................103

,

,

305

110

11


464

Manual

Park Release

.............................................294

Service

......................................................458

Media Hub

.....................................................446

Memory Seat

................................................... 29

Memory Settings

............................................. 29

Methanol

.......................................................364

Mirrors

.............................................................39

Electric Powered

.........................................40

Heated

........................................................42

Memory

.......................................................29

Outside

........................................................40

Rearview

............................................39

,

269

Trailer Towing

.............................................. 41

Modifications/Alterations

Vehicle

........................................................11

Monitor, Tire Pressure System

.......................123

Mopar Accessories

........................................374

Mopar Parts

...................................................457

MP3 Control

..................................................446

Multi-Function Control Lever

............................ 43

N

Navigation System (Uconnect GPS)

...............238

New Vehicle Break-In Period

..........................185

Noise Control

Maintenance

.............................................337

Tampering Prohibited

................................337

Noise Emission Warranty

..................... 337

,

338

O

Occupant Restraints

..................................... 131

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel)

..................... 363

Oil Change Indicator

..................................... 303

Oil Filter, Change

.......................................... 316

Oil Filter, Selection

........................................ 316

Oil Pressure Light

.......................................... 102

Oil Reset

..........................................................87

Oil, Engine

...................................314

Filter

.......................................316

,

,

369

Capacity

.................................................... 368

Change Interval

........................................ 314

Dipstick

.................................................... 312

Disposal

................................................... 316

369

Owner's Manual

..................................11

371

Filter Disposal

........................................... 316

Identification Logo

........................... 314

,

,

,

Materials Added To

.................................. 316

Pressure Warning Light

............................ 102

Recommendation

..................................... 314

Synthetic

.................................................. 316

Viscosity

................................................... 315

Onboard Diagnostic System

.......................... 109

Operating Precautions

.................................. 109

Operator Manual

,

371

315

458

Outside Rearview Mirrors

................................40

Overdrive

...................................................... 194

Overdrive OFF Switch

.................................... 194

Overheating, Engine

...................................... 292

P

Paint Care

..................................................... 357

Panic Alarm

......................................................14

Parking Brake

............................................... 187

ParkSense System, Rear

......................225

Passive Entry

....................................................25

Pedals, Adjustable

...........................................38

Pets

............................................................... 165

Placard, Tire And Loading Information

.......... 344

Power

Distribution Center (Fuses)

....................... 279

Door Locks

...................................................25

Mirrors

.........................................................40

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet)

..........74

Seats

...........................................................32

Sliding Rear Window

....................................63

Steering

.................................... 40

,

210

,

,

230

,

75

211

Take-Off Adapter

....................................... 210

Take-Off Operation

.................................... 210

Windows

......................................................61

Power Seats

Down

...........................................................32

Forward

.......................................................32

Rearward

.....................................................32

Recline

.........................................................32

Tilt

................................................................32

Up

................................................................32

Power Steering Fluid

..................................... 371


Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

...................138

Preparation For Jacking

.................................285

PTO (Power Take-Off)

.....................................210

R

Radial Ply Tires

..............................................348

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)

.. 330

Features

............................. 385

Uconnect Settings

.................. 385

,

Radio Operation

............................................447

Rain Sensitive Wiper System

........................... 50

Rear Axle (Differential)

...................................336

Rear Camera

.................................................241

Rear ParkSense System

...................... 225

,

Rear Window, Sliding

....................................... 63

Recreational Towing

......................................264

Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N)

.....265

Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N)

..266

Reformulated Gasoline

..................................363

Refrigerant

....................................................318

Release, Hood

................................................. 63

Reminder, Seat Belt

......................................132

Remote Keyless Entry

......................................13

Panic Alarm

................................................. 14


....... 16

Remote Start (Diesel)

......................................20

Remote Start (Gasoline)

.................................. 18

Remote Starting

Exit Remote Start Mode

.............................. 19

Uconnect Customer Programmable

,

,

401

401

,

,

331

230

,

22

418

418

Replacement Bulbs

...................................... 274

Replacement Keys

...........................................22

Replacement Tires

........................................ 350

Reporting Safety Defects

.............................. 457

Resetting Perform Service Indicator

............. 304

Restraints, Child

........................................... 148

Restraints, Head

..............................................35

Rotation, Tires

.............................................. 355

S

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle

........................ 166

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle

..................... 168

Safety Defects, Reporting

............................. 457

Safety Information, Tire

................................ 340

Safety Tips

.................................................... 165

Safety, Exhaust Gas

...................................... 166

Schedule, Maintenance

................................ 299

Seat Belt

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

........... 139

Seat Belt Reminder

....................................... 100

Seat Belts

............................................ 132

Front Seat

........................................ 132

,

Adjustable Shoulder Belt

.......................... 136

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage

..... 136

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt

Anchorage

............................................ 136

Child Restraints

........................................ 148

Extender

................................................... 138

,

166

135

Inspection

................................................. 166

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation

.................... 135

465

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting

................... 136


.............................. 135

Pregnant Women

...................................... 138

Reminder

.................................................. 132

Seat Belt Extender

.................................... 138

Seat Belt Reminder

.................................. 132

Untwisting Procedure

................................ 136

Seat Belts Maintenance

................................ 359

Seats

..................................................30

,

31

Adjustment

...........................................30

Easy Entry

....................................................33

Folding Floor

................................................71

Head Restraints

...........................................35

Memory

.......................................................29

Power

...........................................................32

Rear Folding

................................................30

Tilting

...........................................................30

Security Alarm

........................................ 23

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)

.........369

Sentry Key

,

,

,

,

32

32

101

371

Key Programming

........................................22

Sentry Key (Immobilizer)

..................................22

Sentry Key Replacement

..................................22

Service Assistance

........................................ 455

Service Contract

............................................ 456

Service Manuals

........................................... 458

Shift Lever Override

...................................... 293

Shifting

.......................................................... 188


..................190

,

195

Transfer Case

........................................... 209

11


466

Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case

Neutral (N)

............................................265

Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case

Neutral (N)

............................................266

Signals, Turn

..................................46

Speed Control (Cruise Control)

............ 211

Starting

....................................... 169

,

Siri

.................................................................452

Sliding Rear Window, Power

............................ 63

Snow Chains (Tire Chains)

.............................354

Snow Plow

.....................................................262

Snow Tires

.....................................................351

Spare Tires

................................. 351

,

,

,

Spark Plugs

...................................................369

Speed Control

Accel/Decel

...............................................212

Cancel

.......................................................213

Resume

.....................................................213

,

108

352

170


.................. 169

Button

......................................................... 17

Cold Weather

............................................172

Engine Block Heater

..................................175

Engine Fails To Start

.................................172

Starting And Operating

..................................170

Starting Procedures

............................. 170

Power

.............................................. 210

,

,

,

,

353

213

173

173

Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines)

............173

Starting Procedures (Gas Engines)

................169

Steering

,

168

173

211

Tilt Column

..................................................37

Wheel, Heated

.............................................37

Wheel, Tilt

....................................................37

Steering Wheel Audio Controls

..................... 445

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System

Controls

........................................................ 445

Storage

............................................................68

Storage Compartment, Center Seat

.................69

Storage, Vehicle

......................................60

,

357

Storing Your Vehicle

...................................... 357

Sunglasses Storage

.........................................77

Sway Control, Trailer

..................................... 120

Synthetic Engine Oil

...................................... 316

T

Telescoping Steering Column

..........................37

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC)

.............59

Tilt

Down

...........................................................32

Up

................................................................32

Tilt Steering Column

........................................37

Tip Start

............................................... 169


........... 344

Tire Markings

................................................ 340

Tire Safety Information

................................. 340

Tires

...................................168

,

346

,

351

,

,

173

356

Aging (Life Of Tires)

.................................. 349

Air Pressure

.............................................. 346

Chains

...................................................... 354

Changing

.................................................. 285

Compact Spare

......................................... 352

Dual

........................................289

,

356

General Information

........................346

High Speed

............................................... 348

Inflation Pressure

..................................... 347

Jacking

...................................................... 285

Life Of Tires

.............................................. 349

Load Capacity

........................................... 344

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

.........................................105

Towing

..................................................252

,

,

,

361

351

Quality Grading

......................................... 356

Radial

....................................................... 348

Replacement

............................................ 350

Rotation

.................................................... 355

Safety

..............................................340

346

Sizes

......................................................... 341

Snow Tires

................................................ 351

Spare Tires

......................................351

,

,

Spinning

................................................... 349

Trailer Towing

........................................... 257


.............................. 349

Wheel Nut Torque

..................................... 361

To Open Hood

..................................................63

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight

...................... 256

Torque Converter Clutch

............................... 194

,

123

353

296

Disabled Vehicle

....................................... 296

Guide

........................................................ 256

Recreational

............................................. 264

Weight

...................................................... 256

Towing Behind A Motorhome

........................ 264


Traction

.........................................................267

Traction Control

.............................................120


.............................120

Trailer Towing

................................................252

Cooling System Tips

..................................262

Hitches

......................................................255

Minimum Requirements

............................256

Mirrors

......................................................... 41

Tips

...........................................................261

Trailer And Tongue Weight

........................256

Wiring

........................................................260

Trailer Towing Guide

......................................256

Trailer Weight

................................................256

Transfer Case

................................................337

Electronically Shifted

....................... 200

Fluid

................................................ 371

Transmission

.................................................195

Automatic

............................... 190

,

195

Fluid

................................................ 371

,

,

,

,

204

374

334

374

Maintenance

.............................................334

Shifting

......................................................188

Transporting Pets

..........................................165


...................................349

Turn Signals

...................................46

,

108

,

275

U

Uconnect

Uconnect

Settings

... 376

,

383

,

385

,

399

,

401

,

417

,

418

Uconnect Phone

Call Continuation

...................................... 445

Uconnect Settings

Customer Programmable

Features

...25

Passive Entry

,

383

,

385

,

399

Programming

.............. 25

,

,

401

383

,

,

417

399

,

,

418

417

Uconnect Voice Command

............................ 448

Uniform Tire Quality Grades

.......................... 356

Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)

.....64

Universal Transmitter

......................................64

Unleaded Gasoline

....................................... 363

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt

................... 136

USB

............................................................... 446

V

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

.............. 361

Vehicle Loading

................................... 251

Vehicle Storage

.......................................60

Vehicle User Guide

,

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations

....................11

,

344

357

In Vehicle Help

............................................12

Navigation

...................................................12


.................................12

Searching User Guide

..................................12

Viscosity, Engine Oil

...................................... 315

Voice Recognition System (VR)

..................... 448

Voltmeter

...................................................... 178

467

W

Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster

Descriptions)

................................................. 104

Warnings And Cautions

....................................11

Warranty Information

.................................... 457

Washers, Windshield

............................. 49

Windshield Washers

.............................. 49

Fluid

................................................... 49

,

Washing Vehicle

............................................ 358

Water

Driving Through

........................................ 267

Water Separator

Diesel Fuel

................................................ 321

Wheel And Wheel Tire Care

........................... 353

Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim

........................... 353

Wheel Covers

................................................ 289

Wind Buffeting

.................................................63

Window Fogging

...............................................60

Windows

..........................................................61

Power

...........................................................61

Rear Sliding

.................................................63

Reset Auto-Up

..............................................62

Windshield Defroster

.................................... 166

,

,

312

312

312

Windshield Wiper Blades

.............................. 326

Windshield Wipers

...........................................49

Wipers Blade Replacement

........................... 326

Wipers, Intermittent

.........................................49

Wipers, Rain Sensitive

.....................................50

Wireless Charging Pad

.....................................76

11

This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.

With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling

1-866-726-4636

(U.S.) or

1-800-387-1143

(Canada), or by contacting your dealer.

This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting

www.techauthority.com

and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling

1-800-387-1143

.

WARNING:

Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle

.

The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common questions.

Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit

www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html

(U.S.),

www.owners.mopar.ca

(Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.

WARNING

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important extension of your Ram vehicle.

Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App

Store

®

or Google Play

®

Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).

U.S.

CANADA

DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF

THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLET

MOPAR.COM/OM OWNERS.MOPAR.CA

RAMTRUCKS.COM

(U.S.)

RAMTRUCK.CA

(CANADA)

©2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.

`

RAM CHASSIS CAB

2020 OWNER’S MANUAL